Basic English Grammar Course for Beginners | 37 Lessons | Learn with Esther

Hi everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

Welcome to Beginner 1.

শিক্ষানবিস 1

In these videos, I hope to  teach you some basic English.

-এ স্বাগতম। এই ভিডিওগুলিতে, আমি আপনাকে কিছু প্রাথমিক ইংরেজি শেখাতে আশা করি।

So, these videos are for low level beginners.

সুতরাং, এই ভিডিওগুলি নিম্ন স্তরের নতুনদের জন্য।

Okay…

Now when you watch these videos, I want you to pay attention.

ঠিক আছে...

এখন আপনি যখন এই ভিডিওগুলি দেখেন, আমি চাই আপনি মনোযোগ দিন।

Okay…

Watch all the videos in the series.

ঠিক আছে…

সিরিজের সব ভিডিও দেখুন।

Okay…

ঠিক আছে...

Please listen carefully and if there are any words or expressions that you don’t know,

অনুগ্রহ করে মনোযোগ সহকারে শুনুন এবং যদি এমন কোন শব্দ বা অভিব্যক্তি থাকে যা আপনি জানেন না,

please check your dictionary.

অনুগ্রহ করে আপনার অভিধানটি দেখুন।

Another thing you should do is repeat after me.

আরেকটি জিনিস আপনার করা উচিত আমার পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি.

Repeating is a really good practice.

পুনরাবৃত্তি সত্যিই একটি ভাল অভ্যাস.

Okay…

ঠিক আছে...

So, I know that some of these videos are hard.

তাই, আমি জানি যে এই ভিডিওগুলির মধ্যে কিছু কঠিন।

But please don’t give up.

কিন্তু দয়া করে হাল ছাড়বেন না।

If you try your best, and watch all of these videos,

আপনি যদি আপনার যথাসাধ্য চেষ্টা করেন, এবং এই সমস্ত ভিডিওগুলি দেখেন,

I know that your English will get better.

আমি জানি যে আপনার ইংরেজি আরও ভাল হবে।

Okay, well let’s get started.

ঠিক আছে, চলুন শুরু করা যাক.

Hi, everybody and welcome to this video.

হাই, সবাই এবং এই ভিডিওতে স্বাগতম।

Now in this video, I want to talk about the difference between consonants and vowels.

এখন এই ভিডিওতে, আমি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ এবং স্বরবর্ণের মধ্যে পার্থক্য সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে চাই।

Now, in the English alphabet,  there are twenty-six letters.

এখন ইংরেজি বর্ণমালায় ছাব্বিশটি বর্ণ আছে।

And in the alphabet, there are five main vowels and one special vowel.

আর বর্ণমালায় পাঁচটি প্রধান স্বরবর্ণ এবং একটি বিশেষ স্বরবর্ণ রয়েছে।

And the rest are consonants.

আর বাকিগুলো ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

So, let’s look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড তাকান.

Here’s the alphabet.

এখানে বর্ণমালা আছে.

The first letter, ‘a’, is a vowel.

প্রথম অক্ষর, 'a', একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

The next letter, ‘b’, is a consonant.

পরবর্তী অক্ষর, 'b' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘c’ is a consonant.

'c' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘d’ consonant.

'd' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘e’ is a vowel.

'e' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

Then, ‘f’, is a consonant.

তারপর, 'চ' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘g’ consonant.

'g' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘h’ consonant.

'h' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘i’ is another vowel.

'i' আরেকটি স্বরবর্ণ।

‘j’ is a consonant.

'j' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘k’ consonant.

'k' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘l’, ‘m’, ‘n’ are consonants.

'l', 'm', 'n' হল ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘o’ is another vowel.

'o' আরেকটি স্বরবর্ণ।

‘p’, ‘q’, ‘r’, ’s’ and ‘t’, these are all consonants.

'p', 'q', 'r', 's' এবং 't', এগুলো সবই ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘u’ is the last main vowel.

'u' শেষ প্রধান স্বরবর্ণ।

‘v’ consonant.

'v' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘w’ consonant.

'w' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘x’ consonant.

'x' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘y’ is the special vowel.

'y' বিশেষ স্বরবর্ণ।

And we’ll talk about that more later on.

এবং আমরা এটি সম্পর্কে পরে আরও কথা বলব।

And ‘z’ is the last letter, and it is a consonant.

এবং 'z' শেষ অক্ষর, এবং এটি একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

Okay, so, there are twenty-six  letters in the alphabet.

ঠিক আছে, তাই, বর্ণমালায় ছাব্বিশটি অক্ষর আছে।

There are five main vowels.

পাঁচটি প্রধান স্বরবর্ণ আছে।

One special vowel.

একটি বিশেষ স্বরবর্ণ।

And the rest are consonant.

আর বাকিগুলো ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Let’s look at some words.

আসুন কিছু শব্দ দেখি।

Now all English words have vowels.

এখন সব ইংরেজি শব্দের স্বর আছে।

Maybe one or many vowels.

হতে পারে এক বা একাধিক স্বরবর্ণ।

So, let’s look at these words.

সুতরাং, আসুন এই শব্দ তাকান.

The first word is “cat”.

প্রথম শব্দটি "বিড়াল"।

Okay, we have ‘c’ is a consonant.

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের কাছে 'c' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘a’ a vowel.

'a' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

‘t’ consonant.

't' ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

“Egg”.

"ডিম"।

‘e’ is a vowel.

'e' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

And ‘g’, ‘g’.

এবং 'g', 'g'।

‘g’ is a consonant.

'g' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

“Hit”.

"হিট"।

‘h’ is a consonant.

'h' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘i’ a vowel.

'আমি' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

And ‘t’ a consonant.

এবং 't' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

“Top”.

"শীর্ষ"।

‘t’ is a consonant.

't' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘o’ is a vowel.

'o' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

And ‘p’ a consonant.

এবং 'p' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

The last word is “cut”.

শেষ শব্দটি "কাট"।

‘c’ is a consonant.

'c' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

‘u’ a vowel.

'u' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

And ‘t’ a consonant.

এবং 't' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

So, we have the main vowels: ‘a’, ’e’, ‘i’, ‘o’, ‘u’.

সুতরাং, আমাদের প্রধান স্বর আছে: 'a', 'e', ​​'i', 'o', 'u'।

Now, I said ‘y’ is a special vowel.

এখন, আমি বললাম 'y' একটি বিশেষ স্বরবর্ণ।

That’s because sometimes it’s a vowel and sometimes it’s a consonant.

এর কারণ কখনও কখনও এটি একটি স্বরবর্ণ এবং কখনও কখনও এটি একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

So, let’s look.

সুতরাং, এর তাকান.

In the word, “why”,

"কেন" শব্দে,

the letter ‘y’ sounds like ‘i’.

'y' অক্ষরটি 'i'-এর মতো শোনায়।

“Why”.

"কেন"।

So, it is a vowel.

সুতরাং, এটি একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

“Bicycle”.

"সাইকেল"।

The letter ‘y’ sounds like ‘i’.

'y' অক্ষরটি 'i'-এর মতো শোনাচ্ছে।

“Bicycle”.

"সাইকেল"।

‘i’ is the letter ‘i’, right, it sounds like the letter ‘i’.

'i' হল 'i' অক্ষর, ঠিক আছে, এটা 'i' অক্ষরের মতো শোনাচ্ছে।

So, in this case ‘y’ is also a vowel.

সুতরাং, এক্ষেত্রে 'y'ও একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

“Pretty”.

"সুন্দর"।

“Pretty”.

"সুন্দর"।

‘y’ sounds like ‘e’.

'y' শব্দ 'e' এর মতো।

Okay…

ঠিক আছে...

“Pretty”.

So, it’s a vowel.

"সুন্দর"।

সুতরাং, এটি একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

Now, in the last two words,

এখন, শেষ দুটি শব্দ,

“you” and “yes”, the letter ‘y’ is a consonant.

“তুমি” এবং “হ্যাঁ”, 'y' অক্ষরটি একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

Usually, if ‘y’ comes at the beginning of a word,

সাধারণত, যদি কোনো শব্দের শুরুতে 'y' আসে,

or if it makes a /u/ sound,

অথবা যদি এটি একটি /u/ শব্দ করে,

for example, “you”, “yes”,

উদাহরণস্বরূপ, "তুমি", "হ্যাঁ",

it is a consonant. Okay…

এটি একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ। ঠিক আছে…

So again, five main vowels: ‘a’, ’e’, ’i’, ’o’, ’u’.

তাই আবার, পাঁচটি প্রধান স্বর: 'a', 'e', ​​'i', 'o', 'u'।

And ‘y’ the special vowel.

এবং 'y' বিশেষ স্বরবর্ণ।

Now to help us remember vowels, we can say, “a, e, i, o, u and sometimes y.”

এখন স্বরবর্ণগুলি মনে রাখতে সাহায্য করার জন্য, আমরা বলতে পারি, "a, e, i, o, u এবং কখনও কখনও y।"

Okay, repeat again after me.

ঠিক আছে, আমার পরে আবার পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“a, e, i, o, u and sometimes y.”

"a, e, i, o, u এবং কখনও কখনও y।"

One more time, faster.

আরও একবার, দ্রুত।

“a, e, i, o, u and sometimes y.”

"a, e, i, o, u এবং কখনও কখনও y।"

Okay, and that’s the end of this video. Thank you.

ঠিক আছে, এবং যে এই ভিডিও শেষ. ধন্যবাদ.

Hi everybody and welcome to this video.

হাই সবাইকে এবং এই ভিডিওতে স্বাগতম।

In this video, we’re going to  talk about using ‘a’ or ‘an’.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা 'a' বা 'an' ব্যবহার করার বিষয়ে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We use ‘a’ or ‘an’ in front of nouns.

আমরা বিশেষ্যের সামনে 'a' বা 'an' ব্যবহার করি।

Well, what is a noun?

আচ্ছা, একটি বিশেষ্য কি?

A noun is a person, place, thing, or animal.

একটি বিশেষ্য একটি ব্যক্তি, স্থান, জিনিস, বা প্রাণী.

Okay, so let’s look at the board.

ঠিক আছে, তাই বোর্ড তাকান.

The first noun we have is “banana”.

আমাদের কাছে প্রথম বিশেষ্যটি হল "কলা"।

“banana”, starts with the consonant ‘b’.

"কলা", ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ 'b' দিয়ে শুরু হয়।

So, we put “a banana”.

সুতরাং, আমরা "একটি কলা" রাখি।

“a banana”.

"একটি কলা".

Look at the next word. “Apple”.

পরের শব্দ তাকান. "আপেল"।

In this case, the first letter is ‘a’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে, প্রথম অক্ষর 'ক'।

‘a’ is a vowel.

'a' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

Remember the vowels are a, e, i, o, u,

মনে রাখবেন স্বরগুলি a, e, i, o, u,

so we have to put ‘an’.

তাই আমাদের 'an' বসাতে হবে।

“an apple”.

"একটি আপেল".

“cat”. Hmmm.

"বিড়াল"। হুমম।

The first letter, ‘c’, is a consonant.

প্রথম অক্ষর 'গ' একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

So, should we put, ‘a’ or ‘an’?

সুতরাং, আমরা 'a' বা 'an' লাগাতে হবে?

Remember, if it’s a consonant, we have to put ‘a’.

মনে রাখবেন, এটি একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ হলে, আমাদের 'a' বসাতে হবে।

“a cat”.

"একটি বিড়াল".

The next word, “boy”.

পরের শব্দ, "ছেলে"।

Again, the word starts with a consonant: ‘b’.

আবার, শব্দটি একটি ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ দিয়ে শুরু হয়: 'বি'।

So, we have to say, “a boy”.

সুতরাং, আমাদের বলতে হবে, "একটি ছেলে"।

The next word, “egg”, has the letter ‘e’ in front.

পরবর্তী শব্দ, “ডিম”-এর সামনে 'ই' অক্ষর রয়েছে।

‘e’ is a vowel.

'e' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

So, what do we put?

তাই, আমরা কি রাখব?

We put ‘an’.

আমরা 'আন' রাখি।

If we read it, it sounds like “an egg.”

যদি আমরা এটি পড়ি, এটি "একটি ডিম" এর মতো শোনায়।

“an egg”.

"একটি ডিম".

Okay, and the last word is “ant”.

ঠিক আছে, এবং শেষ শব্দটি "পিঁপড়া"।

“ant” starts with the vowel ‘a’.

"পিঁপড়া" স্বরবর্ণ 'a' দিয়ে শুরু হয়।

So again, we must put……”an ant”.

তাই আবার, আমাদের অবশ্যই..."একটি পিঁপড়া" লাগাতে হবে।

“an ant”.

"একটি পিপীলিকা".

Now, let’s go through these words together.

এখন, আসুন একসাথে এই শব্দগুলির মধ্য দিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

“a banana”. “a banana”.

"একটি কলা". "একটি কলা".

“an apple”. “an apple”.

"একটি আপেল". "একটি আপেল".

Keep in mind that when you have ‘an’ in front,

মনে রাখবেন যে যখন আপনার সামনে 'an' থাকে,

it has to sound like almost one word.

তখন এটি প্রায় একটি শব্দের মতো শোনাতে হয়।

“an apple”. “an apple”.

"একটি আপেল". "একটি আপেল".

“a cat”. “a cat”.

"একটি বিড়াল". "একটি বিড়াল".

“a boy”. “a boy”.

"একটি ছেলে"। "একটি ছেলে"।

“an egg”. “an egg”.

"একটি ডিম". "একটি ডিম".

“an egg”.

"একটি ডিম".

Again, it sounds like one word.

আবার, এটি একটি শব্দ মত শোনাচ্ছে.

"an egg". 

"একটি ডিম".

"an ant" "an ant"

"একটি পিঁপড়া" "একটি পিঁপড়া"

"an ant"

"একটি পিঁপড়া"

Okay. Let’s move on the next part.

ঠিক আছে। এর পরবর্তী অংশে চলুন.

Okay, let’s do some extra practice.

ঠিক আছে, এর কিছু অতিরিক্ত অনুশীলন করা যাক.

Ahhh, I have some nouns on the board.

আহহ, বোর্ডে আমার কিছু বিশেষ্য আছে।

Remember, a noun is a person, place, thing or animal.

মনে রাখবেন, একটি বিশেষ্য একটি ব্যক্তি, স্থান, জিনিস বা প্রাণী।

So let’s go through them one by one.

সুতরাং আসুন একের পর এক তাদের মাধ্যমে যেতে দিন.

“a book”, “book” is a thing.

"একটি বই", "বই" একটি জিনিস।

It’s a thing that we read.

এটা একটা জিনিস যা আমরা পড়ি।

“park”, is a place. It’s a place we go.

"পার্ক", একটি জায়গা। এটা আমরা যেতে একটি জায়গা.

“umbrella” is a thing.

"ছাতা" একটি জিনিস।

Right. Umbrella is a thing that we use when it’s raining.

ঠিক। ছাতা এমন একটি জিনিস যা আমরা বৃষ্টির সময় ব্যবহার করি।

“elephant”. “elephant” is an animal.

"হাতি"। "হাতি" একটি প্রাণী।

“doctor”. “doctor” is a person.

"ডাক্তার"। "ডাক্তার" একজন ব্যক্তি।

And “orange”. "orange" is a thing that we eat.

এবং "কমলা"। "কমলা" এমন একটি জিনিস যা আমরা খাই।

Okay. Now, I’m going to say ‘a’ or ‘an’ in front of the nouns.

ঠিক আছে. এখন, আমি বিশেষ্যের সামনে 'a' বা 'an' বলতে যাচ্ছি।

I want you to listen and see if you can hear the difference.

আমি চাই আপনি শুনুন এবং দেখুন আপনি পার্থক্য শুনতে পাচ্ছেন কিনা।

Okay…

ঠিক আছে...

We have “book”.

আমাদের কাছে "বই" আছে।

In that case we say, “a book”. “a book”.

সেক্ষেত্রে আমরা বলি, “একটি বই”। "একটি বই".

We have to say, “a book”.

আমাদের বলতে হবে, "একটি বই"।

Okay…

The next one is “park”.

ঠিক আছে...

পরেরটা হল "পার্ক"।

We say, “a park”. “a park”.

আমরা বলি, "একটি পার্ক"। "একটি উদ্যান".

Remember, we put ‘a’ in front of words that begin with consonants.

মনে রাখবেন, আমরা ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ দিয়ে শুরু হওয়া শব্দের সামনে 'a' রাখি।

‘b’ and ‘p’ are consonants.

'b' এবং 'p' হল ব্যঞ্জনবর্ণ।

That’s why we say, “a book”, “a park”.

তাই আমরা বলি, “একটি বই”, “একটি পার্ক”।

Okay…

ঠিক আছে...

How about the next word?

পরের কথাটা কেমন?

“an umbrella”.

"একটি ছাতা".

“an umbrella”.

"একটি ছাতা".

Could you here the difference? “an umbrella”.

আপনি এখানে পার্থক্য করতে পারে? "একটি ছাতা".

We say ‘an’ because umbrella starts with a vowel: ‘u’.

আমরা 'আন' বলি কারণ ছাতা একটি স্বরবর্ণ দিয়ে শুরু হয়: 'উ'।

“an umbrella”.

"একটি ছাতা".

Okay… “elephant”.

ঠিক আছে... "হাতি"।

We should we say?

আমরা কি বলা উচিত?

“an elephant”. “an elephant”.

"একটি হাতি". "একটি হাতি".

Again, 'elephant' starts with a vowel.

আবার 'হাতি' স্বর দিয়ে শুরু হয়।

“a doctor”. “a doctor”.

"একজন ডাক্তার". "একজন ডাক্তার".

“a doctor”.

"একজন ডাক্তার".

And the last word, “an orange”. “an orange”.

এবং শেষ শব্দ, "একটি কমলা"। "একটি কমলা".

Again, we have to say, “an orange” because ‘o’ is a vowel.

আবার, আমাদের বলতে হবে, "একটি কমলা" কারণ 'ও' একটি স্বরবর্ণ।

So, let’s go through each word one more time.

সুতরাং, আসুন প্রতিটি শব্দ আরও একবার করে দেখি।

“a book”. “a book”.

"একটি বই". "একটি বই".

Okay…

ঠিক আছে...

“a park”. “a park”.

"একটি পার্ক"। "একটি উদ্যান".

“an umbrella”. “an umbrella”.

"একটি ছাতা". "একটি ছাতা".

Notice it sounds like one word.

এটি একটি শব্দ মত শোনাচ্ছে লক্ষ্য করুন.

“an umbrella”.

"একটি ছাতা".

“an elephant” “an elephant”

"একটি হাতি" "একটি হাতি"

“a doctor” “a doctor”

"একটি ডাক্তার" "একটি ডাক্তার"

And the last one.

এবং শেষটি।

“an orange” “an orange”

"একটি কমলা" "একটি কমলা"

Okay. So that’s the end of this video.

ঠিক আছে। তাই এই ভিডিওর শেষ।

I hope you can remember when to use ‘a’ and ‘an’.

আমি আশা করি আপনি কখন 'a' এবং 'an' ব্যবহার করতে হবে তা মনে রাখতে পারেন।

Okay, thank you. Bye.

ঠিক আছে ধন্যবাদ. বিদায়।

Hi, everybody and welcome to this video.

হাই, সবাই এবং এই ভিডিওতে স্বাগতম।

Now, in this lesson I’m going to talk about singular and plural nouns.

এখন, এই পাঠে আমি একবচন এবং বহুবচন বিশেষ্য সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay. Singular means one.

ঠিক আছে. একবচন মানে এক।

And plural means more than one or many.

আর বহুবচন মানে একাধিক বা একাধিক।

Okay. So let’s look at the board.

ঠিক আছে. তাই এর বোর্ড তাকান.

This part is showing singular nouns.

এই অংশ একবচন বিশেষ্য দেখাচ্ছে.

Okay, remember, singular means one.

ঠিক আছে, মনে রাখবেন, একবচন মানে এক।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So when the noun is singular, we put ‘a’ or ‘an’.

তাই বিশেষ্য যখন একবচন হয় তখন আমরা 'a' বা 'an' রাখি।

So let’s look.

তাই দেখা যাক.

“a ring”

"একটি রিং"

That means one ring. “a ring”

এর অর্থ একটি রিং। "একটি আংটি"

“a dog” Again, one dog.

"একটি কুকুর" আবার, একটি কুকুর।

“a dog”

"একটি কুকুর"

“a teacher” One teacher.

"একজন শিক্ষক" একজন শিক্ষক।

“a teacher”

"একটি শিক্ষক"

“an apple” “an apple”

"একটি আপেল" "একটি আপেল"

One apple.

একটি আপেল।

“an egg” “an egg”

"একটি ডিম" "একটি ডিম"

One egg.

একটি ডিম।

So again, one…. noun is singular.

তাই আবার, এক... বিশেষ্য একবচন।

Okay. Now over here, we have plural nouns.

ঠিক আছে. এখন এখানে, আমরা বহুবচন বিশেষ্য আছে.

Plural means more than one. Two, three, four, and so on.

বহুবচন মানে একাধিক। দুই, তিন, চার, এবং তাই.

So, many. Okay.

অনেক. ঠিক আছে.

So, when we have a plural noun, we have to,

সুতরাং, যখন আমাদের একটি বহুবচন বিশেষ্য থাকে, তখন আমাদেরকে

don’t forget, we have to put ‘s’ or ‘es’.

's' বা 'es' বসাতে হবে, ভুলে যাবেন না।

Again, if there’s more than one,

আবার, যদি একাধিক

if the noun is plural,

থাকে, বিশেষ্যটি বহুবচন হলে,

you have to put ‘s’ or ‘es’.

আপনাকে 's' বা 'es' বসাতে হবে।

Now the nouns here, you just have to add an ‘s’.

এখন এখানে বিশেষ্য, আপনাকে শুধু একটি 's' যোগ করতে হবে।

Okay, and we’re going to  go through them right now.

ঠিক আছে, এবং আমরা এখন তাদের মাধ্যমে যেতে যাচ্ছি.

“two rings”.

"দুটি রিং"।

Okay, we had one ring. “a ring”.

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের একটি রিং ছিল। "একটি রিং".

Now we have “two rings.” With an ‘s’.

এখন আমাদের "দুটি রিং" আছে। একটি 's' দিয়ে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We had “a dog”.

আমাদের "একটি কুকুর" ছিল।

The plural is “three dogs”.

বহুবচন হল "তিন কুকুর"।

Again, ‘s’ “three dogs”

আবার, 's' "তিন কুকুর"

“a teacher” One teacher

"একজন শিক্ষক" একজন শিক্ষক

“four teachers” “four teachers”

"চার শিক্ষক" "চার শিক্ষক"

Don’t forget the ‘s’.

's' ভুলে যাবেন না।

Okay, you must not forget that.

ঠিক আছে, আপনি যে ভুলবেন না.

“an apple”. That’s one apple.

"একটি আপেল". ওটা একটা আপেল।

Then we have plural. “five apples”

তারপর আমরা বহুবচন আছে. "পাঁচটি আপেল"

“five apples”

"পাঁচটি আপেল"

Okay. And the last one.

ঠিক আছে। এবং সর্বশেষটি.

“an egg”. One egg.

"একটি ডিম". একটি ডিম.

“six eggs”

"ছয় ডিম"

Don’t forget ‘s’. “six eggs”

ভুলবেন না 's'. "ছয়টি ডিম"

Okay. I really need you to remember that.

ঠিক আছে। আমি সত্যিই আপনি যে মনে রাখা প্রয়োজন.

“two rings”

"দুটি আংটি"

“three dogs”

"তিনটি কুকুর"

“four teachers”

"চার শিক্ষক"

“five apples”

"পাঁচটি আপেল"

and “six eggs”.

এবং "ছয়টি ডিম"।

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Now we have some more nouns.

এখন আমরা আরো কিছু বিশেষ্য আছে.

These nouns are a little bit different.

এই বিশেষ্যগুলি একটু আলাদা।

Uhhh, when they’re singular it’s the same.

উহ, যখন তারা একবচন হয় তখন একই হয়।

You put ‘a’ or ‘an’ in front.

আপনি সামনে 'a' বা 'an' বসান।

But when you want to make them  plural, you have to add ‘es’.

কিন্তু আপনি যখন তাদের বহুবচন করতে চান, তখন আপনাকে 'es' যোগ করতে হবে।

Remember, I said, you can add ‘s’ or ‘es’ to make a noun plural…more than one.

মনে রাখবেন, আমি বলেছিলাম, আপনি একটি বিশেষ্য বহুবচন তৈরি করতে 's' বা 'es' যোগ করতে পারেন… একাধিক।

So again, these nouns you have to add ‘es’.

তাই আবার, এই nouns আপনি 'es' যোগ করতে হবে.

So let’s go through them one more time.

সুতরাং আসুন তাদের মধ্য দিয়ে যেতে আরো একবার.

Okay. So we have “a bus”.

ঠিক আছে. তাই আমাদের "একটি বাস" আছে।

“a bus”

"একটি বাস"

Again, that means one bus.

আবার, তার মানে একটি বাস।

“a box” “a box”

"একটি বাক্স" "একটি বাক্স"

“a watch” “a watch”

"একটি ঘড়ি" "একটি ঘড়ি"

Okay, one.

ঠিক আছে, এক।

“a kiss” “a kiss”

"একটি চুম্বন" "একটি চুম্বন"

And “an ax”. “an ax”

এবং "একটি কুড়াল"। "একটি কুড়াল"

One. “an ax”

এক। "একটি কুড়াল"

Okay. Now, we’re going to move on to the plural.

ঠিক আছে। এখন, আমরা বহুবচনে যেতে যাচ্ছি।

Remember, again, to make the plural, or more 

মনে রাখবেন, আবার, বহুবচন বা একাধিক

than one, here, we add ‘es’. Okay.

করতে, এখানে আমরা 'es' যোগ করি। ঠিক আছে.

“a bus” One.

"একটি বাস" একটি।

“two buses” “two buses”

"দুটি বাস" "দুটি বাস"

“a box”

"একটি বাক্স"

“three boxes” “three boxes”

"তিনটি বাক্স" "তিনটি বাক্স"

“a watch”. “four watches”

"একটি ঘড়ি"। "চার ঘড়ি"

‘es’ right. “four watches”

'es' ঠিক। "চার ঘড়ি"

“a kiss” One.

"একটি চুম্বন" এক.

“five kisses” “five kisses”

"পাঁচ চুম্বন" "পাঁচ চুম্বন"

Add the ‘es’.

'es' যোগ করুন।

And the last one.

এবং সর্বশেষটি.

“an ax” “an ax”

"একটি কুড়াল" "একটি কুড়াল"

Okay, we have “six axes”. “six axes”

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের "ছয়টি কুড়াল" আছে। "ছয় অক্ষ"

So don’t forget. We have to put  

তাই ভুলবেন না.

‘es’ to make these nouns plural.

এই বিশেষ্যগুলিকে বহুবচন করার জন্য আমাদের 'es' লাগাতে হবে।

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

So, how do we know if we should put ‘s’ or ‘es’ to make the noun plural?

সুতরাং, আমরা কিভাবে বুঝব যে বিশেষ্যটিকে বহুবচন করতে আমাদের 's' বা 'es' বসানো উচিত?

Well, for most nouns, you just have to put ‘s’.

ঠিক আছে, বেশিরভাগ বিশেষ্যের জন্য, আপনাকে শুধু 's' লাগাতে হবে।

Okay, for most of them.

ঠিক আছে, তাদের অধিকাংশ জন্য.

But, for some, you have to put ‘es’. And how do we know?

কিন্তু, কারো কারো জন্য আপনাকে 'es' লাগাতে হবে। এবং আমরা কিভাবে জানি?

Well…

আচ্ছা…

Let’s look at the board. We have some nouns.

বোর্ডের দিকে তাকাই। আমরা কিছু বিশেষ্য আছে.

The first one is “church”. Okay.

প্রথমটি হল "গির্জা"। ঠিক আছে.

“Church” ends in ‘ch’.

"চার্চ" 'ch' এ শেষ হয়।

So if the noun ends in ‘ch’, you have to put ‘es’.

তাই বিশেষ্যটি 'ch' দিয়ে শেষ হলে 'es' বসাতে হবে।

Okay. So it becomes “churches”.

ঠিক আছে. তাই এটি "গীর্জা" হয়ে যায়।

So again, if the noun ends in ‘ch’,

তাই আবার, বিশেষ্যটি 'ch'

add ‘es’ at the end to make it plural.

দিয়ে শেষ হলে, শেষে 'es' যোগ করে বহুবচন করুন।

The same goes for the next word “brush”.

একই পরবর্তী শব্দ "ব্রাশ" এর জন্য যায়।

You’ll notice “brush” ends in ‘sh’. Okay.

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন "ব্রাশ" এর শেষে 'sh'। ঠিক আছে.

So if it ends in ‘sh’, same thing, we add ‘es’ at the end to make it plural.

সুতরাং যদি এটি 'sh' এ শেষ হয়, একই জিনিস, আমরা এটিকে বহুবচন করতে শেষে 'es' যোগ করি।

Okay. The next word is 'fox'.

ঠিক আছে. পরের শব্দ 'শেয়াল'।

We have the letter ‘x’ at the end. Okay.

আমাদের শেষে 'x' অক্ষর আছে। ঠিক আছে.

All nouns that end in ‘x’, we have to put ‘es’ to make it plural.

সমস্ত বিশেষ্য যেগুলি 'x' দিয়ে শেষ হয়, আমাদের এটিকে বহুবচন করতে 'es' বসাতে হবে।

Okay, so, ‘ch’, ‘sh’, ‘x’.

ঠিক আছে, তাই, 'ch', 'sh', 'x'।

If the noun ends with these, put ‘es’.

বিশেষ্য এই দিয়ে শেষ হলে, 'es' বসান।

And the last one is “dress”.

এবং শেষটি হল "পোশাক"।

Okay, we have ‘ss’ at the end.

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের শেষে 'ss' আছে।

Same thing.

একই জিনিস.

Put ‘es’ at the end to make it plural.

বহুবচন করার জন্য শেষে 'es' বসান।

Okay. “dresses”

ঠিক আছে. “dresses”

Again, if it ends in ‘ss’ put ‘es’.

আবার, যদি এটি 'ss' দিয়ে শেষ হয় তাহলে 'es' লিখুন।

Okay, so please, don’t  forget ‘ch’, ‘sh’, ‘x’, ‘ss’, 

ঠিক আছে, তাই দয়া করে, 'ch', 'sh', 'x', 'ss' ভুলবেন না,

we must put ‘es’ at the end.

আমাদের অবশ্যই শেষে 'es' বসাতে হবে।

Most of the other nouns we just add ‘s’.

অন্যান্য বিশেষ্যের অধিকাংশই আমরা শুধু 's' যোগ করি।

Okay. Now we have some special nouns on this side.

ঠিক আছে. এখন আমরা এই দিকে কিছু বিশেষ বিশেষ্য আছে.

“Potato, tomato, volcano”.

"আলু, টমেটো, আগ্নেয়গিরি"।

Now, most nouns that end in ‘o’, like “photo”,

এখন, বেশিরভাগ বিশেষ্য যা 'o' দিয়ে শেষ হয়, যেমন "ফটো",

all we have to do is add an ‘s’ to make it plural.

আমাদের যা করতে হবে তা হল এটিকে বহুবচন করতে একটি 's' যোগ করতে হবে।

“photos”. Okay.

"ফটো"। ঠিক আছে.

But these are special because we actually 

কিন্তু এগুলো বিশেষ কারণ আমাদের আসলে

have to put ‘es’ at the end… to make them…plural.

শেষে 'es' বসাতে হবে... এগুলোকে... বহুবচন করতে।

Okay. So we have “potatoes, tomatoes, volcanoes”.

ঠিক আছে. তাই আমাদের আছে "আলু, টমেটো, আগ্নেয়গিরি"।

Again, these are a little bit special.

আবার, এই সামান্য বিট বিশেষ.

For most nouns that end in ‘o’, we just add ‘s’.

'o' দিয়ে শেষ হওয়া বেশিরভাগ বিশেষ্যের জন্য আমরা শুধু 's' যোগ করি।

Okay, and, uhhh, let’s go to the final part.

ঠিক আছে, এবং, উহহ, এর চূড়ান্ত অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, let’s do some extra practice.

ঠিক আছে, এর কিছু অতিরিক্ত অনুশীলন করা যাক.

On the board, I have some nouns.

বোর্ডে, আমার কিছু বিশেষ্য আছে।

Some are singular and some are plural.

কিছু একবচন আবার কিছু বহুবচন।

We have to decide together  if we should put ‘s’ or ‘es’

আমাদের একসাথে সিদ্ধান্ত নিতে হবে যে আমরা 's' বা 'es'

or make them singular. Okay.

রাখব নাকি একবচন করব। ঠিক আছে.

So you have to listen carefully and  remember what we learned in this video.

তাই আপনাকে মনোযোগ সহকারে শুনতে হবে এবং আমরা এই ভিডিওতে যা শিখেছি তা মনে রাখতে হবে।

Okay. “two books”

ঠিক আছে. "দুটি বই"

Right, this is plural. There are two.

ঠিক আছে, এটি বহুবচন। দুই আছে.

“two books” We have to put an ‘s’.

"দুটি বই" আমাদের একটি 's' লাগাতে হবে।

“two books”

"দুটি বই"

Okay. The next one.

ঠিক আছে। পরের এক.

“three class” Hmmmm.

"থ্রি ক্লাস" হুমম।

“class” ends with an ‘s’. So what do we put?

"শ্রেণী" একটি 's' দিয়ে শেষ হয়। তাই আমরা কি করা?

“three classes” “three classes”

"তিন ক্লাস" "তিন ক্লাস"

Okay. So again the plural is “three classes”.

ঠিক আছে। তাই আবার বহুবচন হল "তিন শ্রেণী"।

Okay. 

ঠিক আছে.

“a lion” “a lion”

"একটি সিংহ" "একটি সিংহ"

Do we have to put anything? No.

আমাদের কি কিছু রাখতে হবে? না।

No ‘s’ or ‘es’ because this is singular. There’s just one lion.

না 's' বা 'es' কারণ এটি একবচন। শুধু একটা সিংহ আছে।

“a lion”

"একটি সিংহ"

“six hats” “six hats”

"ছয় টুপি" "ছয় টুপি"

We have to put an ‘s’. “six hats”

আমাদের একটি 'এস' লাগাতে হবে। "ছয় টুপি"

Okay. The next noun is “seven match”.

ঠিক আছে। পরবর্তী বিশেষ্য হল "সাত ম্যাচ"।

What do we put?

আমরা কি রাখব?

Well, we have a ‘ch’. So we have to put “matches”.

আচ্ছা, আমাদের একটা 'চ' আছে। তাই আমাদের “ম্যাচ” রাখতে হবে।

“seven matches” “seven matches”

"সাত ম্যাচ" "সাত ম্যাচ"

Okay. And the last one is “one bat”.

ঠিক আছে। এবং শেষটি হল "এক ব্যাট"।

“one bat”.

"এক ব্যাট"।

We do not put an ‘s’ or ‘es’ because again, it’s just one.

আমরা একটি 's' বা 'es' রাখি না কারণ আবার, এটি শুধুমাত্র একটি।

We don’t have to put anything after ‘bat’.

আমাদের 'ব্যাট' এর পরে কিছু লাগাতে হবে না।

Okay, this is singular.

ঠিক আছে, এই একবচন.

Okay, so, in this video, we learned how to make a noun singular.

ঠিক আছে, তাই, এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা শিখেছি কিভাবে একটি বিশেষ্যকে একবচন করা যায়।

Okay. And how to make a noun plural.

ঠিক আছে. এবং কিভাবে একটি বিশেষ্য বহুবচন করা.

Remember, singular means one. Plural means more than one.

মনে রাখবেন, একবচন মানে এক। বহুবচন মানে একাধিক।

And remember, don’t forget, we have to put 

এবং মনে রাখবেন, ভুলে যাবেন না, আমাদের

‘s’ or ‘es’. Okay.

's' বা 'es' লাগাতে হবে। ঠিক আছে.

And thanks for joining. That’s the end of this video.

এবং যোগদানের জন্য ধন্যবাদ. এটাই এই ভিডিওর শেষ।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi everybody and welcome to this video.

হাই সবাইকে এবং এই ভিডিওতে স্বাগতম।

In this video, we’re going to  talk about subjective pronouns.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা বিষয়গত সর্বনাম সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Here they are. The subjective pronouns.

এখানে তারা. বিষয়গত সর্বনাম।

Please take a careful look. They’re very important in English.

অনুগ্রহ করে সাবধানে দেখুন। তারা ইংরেজিতে খুবই গুরুত্বপূর্ণ।

Okay. So, the first subjective pronoun is ‘I’.

ঠিক আছে. সুতরাং, প্রথম বিষয়গত সর্বনাম হল 'আমি'।

“I” means me. “I’m Esther”.

"আমি" মানে আমি। "আমি ইস্টার"।

I

আমি

He Now, “he” is only used for boys or men.

এখন, "সে" শুধুমাত্র ছেলে বা পুরুষদের জন্য ব্যবহৃত হয়।

Okay. He

ঠিক আছে. সে

So another boy or man is “he”.

তাই আরেকটা ছেলে বা পুরুষ হল “সে”।

“She” is used for girls or women.

"সে" মেয়ে বা মহিলাদের জন্য ব্যবহৃত হয়।

Okay. She

ঠিক আছে. She

It “It”  

It “It”

is used for a place like a school, an animal like a dog, or a thing like a chair.

ব্যবহার করা হয় স্কুলের মতো জায়গা, কুকুরের মতো প্রাণী বা চেয়ারের মতো জিনিসের জন্য।

Okay. It

ঠিক আছে. এটি

The next one is “you”. “You” means you.

পরেরটি হল "আপনি"। "তুমি" মানে তুমি।

Okay. “you”.

ঠিক আছে. "আপনি".

We “We” means other people and me.

আমরা "আমরা" মানে অন্য মানুষ এবং আমি।

For example, “I sing”, “you sing”, then “we sing”.

উদাহরণস্বরূপ, "আমি গাই", "তুমি গাও", তারপরে "আমরা গান করি"।

Okay. “we”.

ঠিক আছে. "আমরা"।

And the last one is “they”.

এবং শেষটি হল "তারা"।

“They” means many people,  places, animals or things.

"তারা" মানে অনেক মানুষ, জায়গা, প্রাণী বা জিনিস।

Okay. So, more than one.

ঠিক আছে. সুতরাং, একাধিক.

If there’s more than one, we use  the subjective pronoun ‘they’.

যদি একাধিক থাকে, আমরা 'তারা' ব্যবহার করি।

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, so let’s practice together  with subjective pronouns.

ঠিক আছে, তাই আসুন বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনামের সাথে একসাথে অনুশীলন করি।

The first sentence on the  board says, “Jenny sings”.

বোর্ডের প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে, "জেনি গান করে"।

Now Jenny is one girl.

এখন জেনি এক মেয়ে।

So we can say, “She sings”.

তাই আমরা বলতে পারি, "তিনি গান করেন"।

“Jack sings”. Jack is one boy.

"জ্যাক গেয়েছে"। জ্যাক এক ছেলে।

So we have to say, “he sings”.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, "তিনি গান করেন"।

The last sentence says, “Jenny and Jack sing”.

শেষ বাক্যটি বলে, "জেনি এবং জ্যাক গান"।

Now Jenny and Jack are two people.

এখন জেনি আর জ্যাক দুজন মানুষ।

So we have to say, “they sing”.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, “তারা গান গায়”।

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, let’s do some more practice.

ঠিক আছে, এর আরো কিছু অনুশীলন করা যাক.

The first sentence on the board says,

বোর্ডের প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে,

“The cat runs”.

"বিড়াল দৌড়ায়"।

‘The cat’ is an animal, so we have to say, “It runs”.

'বিড়াল' একটি প্রাণী, তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, "এটি চলে"।

The next sentence says, “The dog and cat run”.

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, "কুকুর এবং বিড়াল দৌড়ায়"।

Now, ‘the dog and cat’, they are two animals.

এখন 'কুকুর আর বিড়াল', এরা দুটি প্রাণী।

So anytime you have two or more  things, we say, “They run”.

তাই যখনই আপনার কাছে দুটি বা ততোধিক জিনিস থাকে, আমরা বলি, "তারা দৌড়ায়"।

‘They’.

'তারা'।

Okay, now, for the last sentence, I’m  going to talk about my cat, Ongee.

ঠিক আছে, এখন, শেষ বাক্যটির জন্য, আমি আমার বিড়াল, ওঙ্গি সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

Ongee is a cat. He’s an animal.

Ongee একটি বিড়াল. সে একটা পশু।

But he has a name. He’s a boy cat.

কিন্তু তার একটা নাম আছে। সে একটা ছেলে বিড়াল।

Okay and I love him. And he’s like family.

ঠিক আছে এবং আমি তাকে ভালবাসি। এবং তিনি পরিবারের মত.

So, “Ongee runs”. I can say “He runs”.

সুতরাং, "Ongee রান"। আমি বলতে পারি "সে দৌড়ায়"।

Okay. Let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে. এর পরের অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, here are some more examples.

ঠিক আছে, এখানে আরো কিছু উদাহরণ আছে।

But, this time, you have to figure out the subjective pronoun together with me.

কিন্তু, এই সময়, আপনাকে আমার সাথে একসাথে বিষয়গত সর্বনামটি বের করতে হবে।

Okay. So, “My students study”.

ঠিক আছে. তাই, "আমার ছাত্ররা পড়াশোনা করে"।

What should we use?

আমরা কি ব্যবহার করা উচিত?

Well, ‘My students’, there’s an ‘s’. Right.

আচ্ছা, 'আমার ছাত্র', সেখানে একটি 's' আছে। ঠিক।

They’re people and there’s more than one.

তারা মানুষ এবং একাধিক আছে.

Many people.

অনেক মানুষ.

So we have to use the subjective pronoun, ‘they’.

তাই আমাদেরকে বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করতে হবে, 'তারা'।

“They study”.

"তারা পড়াশোনা করে"।

The next example.

পরবর্তী উদাহরণ.

“John is handsome”.

"জন সুদর্শন"।

Okay, ‘John’, that’s a person.

ঠিক আছে, 'জন', এটা একজন ব্যক্তি।

There’s only one. Right…

সেখানে মাত্র একটি. ঠিক আছে...

And it’s a boy, ‘John’.

আর এটা একটা ছেলে, 'জন'।

So what should we use?

তাই আমরা কি ব্যবহার করা উচিত?

We have to use the subjective pronoun, ‘he’.

আমাদের বিষয়গত সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করতে হবে, 'সে'।

One boy. We say, “he”.

একটা ছেলে. আমরা বলি, "সে"।

“He is handsome”.

"তিনি সুদর্শন".

Okay, the last one. “Pizza is delicious”.

ঠিক আছে, শেষটা। "পিজ্জা সুস্বাদু"।

‘Pizza’ is a thing.

'পিজ্জা' একটা জিনিস।

And there’s only one. Right.

এবং শুধুমাত্র একটি আছে. ঠিক।

There’s no ‘s’. One pizza.

কোনো 'স' নেই। এক পিজা।

We say, “it”.

আমরা বলি, "এটি"।

“It is delicious”. Okay.

"এটা সুস্বাদু". ঠিক আছে.

Let’s move on to some more examples.

আরও কিছু উদাহরণে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, the first example says,

ঠিক আছে, প্রথম উদাহরণটি বলে,

“Seoul is a city”.

"সিউল একটি শহর"।

Now, ‘Seoul’ is a place. Okay.

এখন, 'সিউল' একটি জায়গা। ঠিক আছে.

So we have to use the subjective pronoun, ‘it’.

তাই আমাদের বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করতে হবে, 'এটি'।

“It is a city”.

"এটি একটি শহর"।

The next example says,

পরবর্তী উদাহরণটি বলে,

“My parents love Ongee”.

"আমার বাবা-মা ওঙ্গিকে ভালোবাসেন"।

Now, ‘Ongee’ is my cat. “My parents love Ongee”.

এখন, 'Ongee' আমার বিড়াল. "আমার বাবা-মা ওঞ্জিকে ভালোবাসেন"।

Well, ‘my parents’, they are two people. My mom and my dad.

আচ্ছা, 'আমার বাবা-মা', তারা দুজন মানুষ। আমার মা এবং আমার বাবা.

So, what do I use?

তাই, আমি কি ব্যবহার করব?

I have to say, “they”. “They love Ongee”.

আমাকে বলতে হবে, "তারা"। "তারা Ongee ভালোবাসে"।

The last example is very  similar to the second one.

শেষ উদাহরণটি দ্বিতীয়টির সাথে খুব মিল।

“My parents and I love Ongee”. Okay.

"আমার বাবা-মা এবং আমি ওঞ্জিকে ভালোবাসি"। ঠিক আছে.

The difference is… it says, “and I”.

পার্থক্য হল... এটা বলে, "এবং আমি"।

So this is ‘my parents’ with ‘me’.

তাই এই 'আমার বাবা'র সাথে 'আমার'।

So I have to say, “we”. “We love Ongee”.

তাই আমাকে বলতে হবে, "আমরা"। "আমরা Ongee ভালোবাসি"।

Okay. All of us.

ঠিক আছে. আমরা সবাই.

Okay, so, in this video we  learned about subjective pronouns.

ঠিক আছে, তাই, এই ভিডিওতে আমরা বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম সম্পর্কে শিখেছি।

I hope you guys have a good understanding  of ‘when’ and ‘how’ to use them.

আমি আশা করি আপনি 'কখন' এবং 'কীভাবে' এগুলি ব্যবহার করতে হবে সে সম্পর্কে ভাল ধারণা পেয়েছেন।

Thank you for watching and I’ll see you guys next time.

দেখার জন্য আপনাকে ধন্যবাদ এবং আমি পরের বার দেখা হবে.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody. Welcome to this video.

সবাই কেমন আছেন. এই ভিডিওতে স্বাগতম।

Now, in this video, we’re going to talk about subjective pronouns,

এখন, এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা বিষয়গত সর্বনাম,

‘be’ verbs, and also, contractions.

'হওয়া' ক্রিয়া এবং এছাড়াও, সংকোচন সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি ।

So let’s take a look at the board.

তো চলুন বোর্ড দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

Okay. First, we have the subjective pronouns.

ঠিক আছে. প্রথমত, আমাদের সাবজেক্টিভ সর্বনাম আছে।

And we have the ‘be’ verbs: am, is, and are.

এবং আমাদের 'হবে' ক্রিয়া আছে: am, is, এবং are।

Okay. So let’s look at the first one.

ঠিক আছে. তাই প্রথম এক তাকান.

“I am”. “I am Esther”.

"আমি". "আমি ইস্টার"।

The contraction for ‘I am’ is ‘I’m’.

'আমি'-এর সংকোচন হল 'আমি'।

“I’m”.

"আমি"।

Now, a contraction is a more common way of saying subjective pronouns and their ‘be’ verb.

এখন, একটি সংকোচন হল বিষয়গত সর্বনাম এবং তাদের 'হওয়া' ক্রিয়া বলার আরও সাধারণ উপায়।

It’s faster and quicker and shorter.

এটা দ্রুত এবং দ্রুত এবং ছোট.

Okay, it’s more common.

ঠিক আছে, এটা আরো সাধারণ.

I want you to use contractions. Okay.

আমি চাই আপনি সংকোচন ব্যবহার করুন। ঠিক আছে.

So, “I am” becomes “I’m”.

সুতরাং, “আমি” হয়ে “আমি”।

“He is” – “he’s”.

"তিনি" - "তিনি"।

“She is” - “she’s”.

"সে হলো তার".

“It is” - “it’s”.

"এটা হলো এটাই".

Okay, let’s move on to the bottom.

ঠিক আছে, এর নীচের দিকে সরানো যাক.

“You are” becomes “you’re”.

"তুমি আছো" হয়ে যায় "তুমি"।

“You’re”.

"তুমি"।

“We are” – “we’re”. “We’re”.

"আমরা" - "আমরা"। "আমরা"।

and “They are”. The contraction is “they’re”.

এবং তারা". সংকোচন হল "তারা"।

“They’re”.

"তারা"।

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We’re going to take a look at some sentences using the ‘be’ verbs.

আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করে কিছু বাক্য দেখতে যাচ্ছি।

Now, notice on the board,  I only used contractions.

এখন, বোর্ডে লক্ষ্য করুন, আমি শুধুমাত্র সংকোচন ব্যবহার করেছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

For example, instead of “I am”, I’m going to say “I’m”.

উদাহরণস্বরূপ, "আমি" এর পরিবর্তে, আমি "আমি" বলতে যাচ্ছি।

So, the first sentence. “I’m a student”.

সুতরাং, প্রথম বাক্য. "আমি একজন ছাত্র".

Okay. This means one.

ঠিক আছে. এই এক মানে.

So we have to say, “a student”.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, "একজন ছাত্র"।

“a”

“ক”

Now many people make the mistake of saying,

এখন অনেকেই এই বলে ভুল করে যে,

“I’m student”, but that’s wrong. Okay.

“আমি ছাত্র”, কিন্তু সেটা ভুল। ঠিক আছে.

You have to put ‘a’.

আপনাকে 'ক' বসাতে হবে।

Now, before I read it, you  have to listen carefully.

এখন, আমি পড়ার আগে, আপনাকে মনোযোগ দিয়ে শুনতে হবে।

‘I’m a’ - sounds like one word.

'আমি একজন' - একটি শব্দের মতো শোনাচ্ছে।

“I’m a…” “I’m a…”

"আমি একজন..." "আমি একজন..."

“I’m a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র"।

Okay. Please repeat after me.

ঠিক আছে. অনুগ্রহ করে আমার পরে কথা বলো.

“I’m a student”. “I’m a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র". "আমি একজন ছাত্র".

Okay, the next one, again, sounds like one word.

ঠিক আছে, পরেরটি আবার, একটি শব্দের মতো শোনাচ্ছে।

“He’s a…”. “He’s a…”.

Okay.so…

“He’s a student”.

Please repeat.

"সে একজন…". "সে একজন…". ঠিক আছে তাই...

"সে একজন ছাত্র"।

অনুগ্রহ করে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“He’s a student”. “He’s a student”.

"সে একজন ছাত্র". "সে একজন ছাত্র".

Same thing.

একই জিনিস.

“She’s a student”.

"সে একজন ছাত্রী".

Please repeat.

অনুগ্রহ করে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“She’s a student”. “She’s a student”.

"সে একজন ছাত্রী". "সে একজন ছাত্রী".

Okay. The next sentence has ‘it’.

ঠিক আছে. পরের বাক্যটিতে 'এটি' আছে।

Now remember, ‘it’ is only used for a place, a thing or an animal.

এখন মনে রাখবেন, 'এটি' শুধুমাত্র একটি স্থান, একটি জিনিস বা একটি প্রাণীর জন্য ব্যবহৃত হয়।

So we can’t have those things be a student.

তাই আমরা ছাত্র হতে পারে না.

So we have to say, “It’s a dog”.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, "এটি একটি কুকুর"।

Okay, please repeat.

ঠিক আছে, অনুগ্রহ করে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“It’s a dog”. “It’s a dog”.

"এটি একটি কুকুর". "এটি একটি কুকুর".

Okay, the next one.

ঠিক আছে, পরেরটা।

“You’re a student”.

"তুমি একজন ছাত্র".

Please repeat.

অনুগ্রহ করে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“You’re a student”. “You’re a student”.

"তুমি একজন ছাত্র". "তুমি একজন ছাত্র".

Okay. Now let’s look at ‘we’re’.

ঠিক আছে. এখন দেখা যাক 'আমরা'।

“We’re students”. Okay.

"আমরা ছাত্র"। ঠিক আছে.

We took out the ‘a’ and we put an ‘s’

আমরা 'a' বের করেছি এবং আমরা একটি 's'

because ‘we’re’ means many people.

রাখি কারণ 'আমরা' মানে অনেক মানুষ।

Not one student, but many students.

একজন শিক্ষার্থী নয়, অনেক শিক্ষার্থী।

So, we have to say, “we’re students”.

সুতরাং, আমাদের বলতে হবে, "আমরা ছাত্র"।

Please repeat.

অনুগ্রহ করে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“We’re students”. “We’re students”.

"আমরা ছাত্র"। "আমরা ছাত্র"।

The same thing goes for ‘they’.

একই জিনিস 'তারা' জন্য যায়.

Again, ‘they’ means many people…or many things.

আবার, 'তারা' মানে অনেক মানুষ...বা অনেক কিছু।

Here, we put ‘s’. And we took out the ‘a’.

এখানে, আমরা 's' রাখি। এবং আমরা 'a' বের করেছি।

So, “they’re students”.

সুতরাং, "তারা ছাত্র"।

Please repeat.

অনুগ্রহ করে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“They’re students”. “They’re students”.

"তারা ছাত্রছাত্রী". "তারা ছাত্রছাত্রী".

Okay, we’re going to look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে, আমরা আরও কিছু উদাহরণ দেখতে যাচ্ছি।

Please listen and repeat carefully.

দয়া করে শুনুন এবং মনোযোগ সহকারে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

Let’s start with the first one: “I’m”.

প্রথমটি দিয়ে শুরু করা যাক: "আমি"।

“I’m a boy”. “I’m a boy”.

"আমি ছেলে". "আমি ছেলে".

“I’m a girl”. “I’m a girl”.

"অমি একটি ময়ে". "অমি একটি ময়ে".

“He’s”.

“He’s a man”. “He’s a man”.

"তিনি"।

"তিনি একজন মানুষ"। "তিনি একজন মানুষ"।

“He’s a boy”. “He’s a boy”.

"সে একটি ছেলে"। "সে একটি ছেলে"।

“She’s”.

“She’s a woman”. “She’s a woman”.

"সে"। "তিনি একজন মহিলা"। "তিনি একজন মহিলা"।

“She’s a girl”. “She’s a girl”.

"সে একটি মেয়ে"। "সে একটি মেয়ে"।

“It’s”.

"এটি"। "এটা একটা কেদারা". "এটা একটা কেদারা".

“It’s a chair”. “It’s a chair”.

“It’s a cat”. “It’s a cat”.

"এটি একটি বিড়াল". "এটি একটি বিড়াল".

“You’re”.

"তুমি"।

“You’re a singer”. “You’re a singer”.

"আপনি একজন গায়ক"। "আপনি একজন গায়ক"।

“You’re a friend”. “You’re a friend”.

"তুমি একজন বন্ধু"। "তুমি একজন বন্ধু"।

“We’re”.

“We’re sisters”. “We’re sisters”.

"আমরা"।

"আমরা বোন"। "আমরা বোন"।

“We’re brothers”. “We’re brothers”.

"আমরা ভাই"। "আমরা ভাই"।

“They’re”.

“They’re people”. “They’re people”.

"তারা"। "তারা মানুষ"। "তারা মানুষ"।

“They’re cars”. “They’re cars”.

"তারা গাড়ি"। "তারা গাড়ি"।

Well I hope that this video helped you understand

আচ্ছা আমি আশা করি যে এই ভিডিওটি আপনাকে বুঝতে সাহায্য করেছে যে

how to use subjective pronouns,

কীভাবে বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম,

their ‘be’ verbs, and also contractions.

তাদের 'হওয়া' ক্রিয়া এবং সংকোচনগুলি ব্যবহার করতে হয়।

Now, before we go, I wanted to share a  little bit about myself using the lesson.

এখন, আমরা যাওয়ার আগে, আমি পাঠটি ব্যবহার করে নিজের সম্পর্কে কিছুটা ভাগ করতে চেয়েছিলাম।

So, first, remember, “I’m a…”.

তাই, প্রথমে মনে রাখবেন, "আমি একজন..."।

“I’m a girl”.

"অমি একটি ময়ে".

Also, “I’m a teacher”.

এছাড়াও, "আমি একজন শিক্ষক"।

“I’m an American”.

"আমি একজন আমেরিকান"।

Now, the word ‘American’  starts with the vowel ‘a’,

এখন, 'আমেরিকান' শব্দটি 'এ' স্বরবর্ণ দিয়ে শুরু হয়,

so we have to say ‘an’.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে 'আন'।

“I’m an American”.

"আমি একজন আমেরিকান"।

And “I’m an animal lover”.

এবং "আমি একজন প্রাণী প্রেমিক"।

Again, same thing.

আবার, একই জিনিস.

‘Animal’ starts with the vowel ‘a’,

'Animal' স্বরবর্ণ 'a' দিয়ে শুরু হয়,

so we have to put ‘an’.

তাই আমাদের 'an' বসাতে হবে।

“I’m an animal lover”.

"আমি একজন প্রাণী প্রেমিক"।

And that means someone who loves animals.

এবং এর মানে এমন কেউ যে প্রাণীকে ভালবাসে।

I love dogs and cats and other animals.

আমি কুকুর এবং বিড়াল এবং অন্যান্য প্রাণী ভালোবাসি.

So, “I’m an animal lover”.

তাই, "আমি একজন প্রাণী প্রেমিক"।

Okay.

Well, that’s it and thank you for watching.

ঠিক আছে.

ওয়েল, এটা এবং দেখার জন্য আপনাকে ধন্যবাদ.

And I’ll see you guys next time.

এবং আমি পরের বার দেখা হবে.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to talk about subjective pronouns,

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা বিষয়গত সর্বনাম,

‘be’ verbs,

'হও' ক্রিয়া

and how to use them with the word ‘not’.

এবং কীভাবে সেগুলি 'না' শব্দের সাথে ব্যবহার করতে হয় সে সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি

Okay. So, let’s look at the board to help us out.

। ঠিক আছে. সুতরাং, আসুন আমাদের সাহায্য করার জন্য বোর্ডের দিকে তাকাই।

Now the first sentence says, “I’m not a student”.

এখন প্রথম বাক্যটি বলছে, “আমি ছাত্র নই”।

‘Not’ means it’s not true.

'না' মানে এটা সত্য নয়।

No.

না।

So remember, “I’m a student” means ‘yes’.

তাই মনে রাখবেন, "আমি একজন ছাত্র" মানে 'হ্যাঁ'।

“I’m a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র".

I go to school, and I learn.

আমি স্কুলে যাই, এবং আমি শিখি।

“I’m not a student” means ‘no’.

"আমি ছাত্র নই" মানে 'না'।

“I’m a teacher” or “No, I’m not a student”.

"আমি একজন শিক্ষক" বা "না, আমি ছাত্র নই"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, notice, we first have the subjective pronoun and the ‘be’ verb.

এখন, লক্ষ্য করুন, আমাদের প্রথমে সাবজেক্টিভ সর্বনাম এবং 'বে' ক্রিয়া আছে।

Then, we put ‘not’.

তারপর, আমরা 'না' রাখি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

‘Not’ comes after.

'না' পরে আসে।

And then we have the noun.

এবং তারপর আমরা বিশেষ্য আছে.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“I’m not a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র নই".

Okay.

Now, also, listen carefully.

ঠিক আছে.

এখন, এছাড়াও, মনোযোগ দিয়ে শুনুন.

“Not a…” sounds like one word.

"একটি নয় ..." একটি শব্দের মতো শোনাচ্ছে।

“I’m not a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র নই".

“Not a…”.

"একটি নয়..."।

“I’m not a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র নই".

Okay, let’s look at the next one.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরেরটি দেখি।

“He’s not a student”.

"সে ছাত্র নয়"।

“He’s not a student”.

"সে ছাত্র নয়"।

“She’s not a student”.

"সে একজন ছাত্রী নয়"।

“She’s not a student”.

"সে একজন ছাত্রী নয়"।

“It’s not a dog”.

"এটি একটি কুকুর নয়"।

Remember, ‘it’ is used for place, thing or animal.

মনে রাখবেন, 'এটি' স্থান, জিনিস বা প্রাণীর জন্য ব্যবহৃত হয়।

So, “It’s not a dog”.

সুতরাং, "এটি একটি কুকুর নয়"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“You’re not a student”.

"তুমি ছাত্র নও"।

“You’re not a student”.

"তুমি ছাত্র নও"।

Okay, the next one is a little bit different.

ঠিক আছে, পরেরটি একটু ভিন্ন।

We have ‘we are’.

আমাদের আছে 'আমরা আছি'।

“We’re”.

Now, remember, ‘we’ means more than one.

"আমরা"।

এখন মনে রাখবেন, 'আমরা' মানে একাধিক।

Many.

Okay.

অনেক

ঠিক আছে.

So we say “students”.

তাই আমরা বলি "ছাত্র"।

We put an ‘s’ and we don’t put an ‘a’ in front.

আমরা একটি 's' রাখি এবং আমরা একটি 'a' সামনে রাখি না।

“We’re not students”.

"আমরা ছাত্র নই"।

“We’re not students”.

"আমরা ছাত্র নই"।

Okay. And ‘they’re’ is the same thing.

ঠিক আছে. এবং 'তারা' একই জিনিস।

It means more than one.

এর অর্থ একাধিক।

So, “They’re not students”.

সুতরাং, "তারা ছাত্র নয়"।

“They’re not students”.

"তারা ছাত্র নয়"।

Okay, we’re going to look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে, আমরা আরও কিছু উদাহরণ দেখতে যাচ্ছি।

I want you to listen carefully and repeat after the examples.

আমি চাই আপনি মনোযোগ সহকারে শুনুন এবং উদাহরণগুলির পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

Let’s start with the first one.

প্রথমটা দিয়ে শুরু করা যাক।

“I’m not”.

"আমি নই".

“I’m not a boy”.

"আমি ছেলে নই"।

“I’m not a boy”.

"আমি ছেলে নই"।

“I’m not a girl”.

"আমি একটা মেয়ে নই".

“I’m not a girl”.

"আমি একটা মেয়ে নই".

“He’s not”.

"তিনি না".

“He’s not a man”.

"তিনি একজন মানুষ নন"।

“He’s not a man”.

"তিনি একজন মানুষ নন"।

“He’s not a boy”.

"সে ছেলে নয়"।

“He’s not a boy”.

"সে ছেলে নয়"।

“She’s not”.

"সে না".

“She’s not a woman”.

"তিনি একজন মহিলা নন"।

“She’s not a woman”.

"তিনি একজন মহিলা নন"।

“She’s not a girl”.

"সে মেয়ে নয়"।

“She’s not a girl”.

"সে মেয়ে নয়"।

“It’s not”.

"এটা না"।

“It’s not a chair”.

"এটি একটি চেয়ার নয়"।

“It’s not a chair”.

"এটি একটি চেয়ার নয়"।

“It’s not a cat”.

"এটি একটি বিড়াল নয়"।

“It’s not a cat”.

"এটি একটি বিড়াল নয়"।

“You’re not”.

"তুমি নও".

“You’re not a singer”

"আপনি একজন গায়ক নন"

“You’re not a singer”.

"আপনি একজন গায়ক নন"।

“You’re not a friend”.

"তুমি বন্ধু নও"।

“You’re not a friend”.

"তুমি বন্ধু নও"।

“We’re not”.

"আমরা নই"।

“We’re not sisters”.

"আমরা বোন নই"।

“We’re not sisters”.

"আমরা বোন নই"।

“We’re not brothers”.

"আমরা ভাই নই"।

“We’re not brothers”.

"আমরা ভাই নই"।

“They’re not”.

"তারা না".

“They’re not people”.

"তারা মানুষ নয়"।

“They’re not people”.

"তারা মানুষ নয়"।

“They’re not cars”.

"তারা গাড়ি নয়"।

“They’re not cars”.

"তারা গাড়ি নয়"।

Okay, so in this video, we learned how to use subjective pronouns

ঠিক আছে, তাই এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা শিখেছি কীভাবে

with the ‘be’ verb

'বে' ক্রিয়াপদের সাথে

and how to use them with the word ‘not’. Okay.

সাবজেক্টিভ সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করতে হয় এবং কীভাবে 'না' শব্দের সাথে ব্যবহার করতে হয়। ঠিক আছে.

So, I wrote some sentences about  myself using what we learned.

তাই, আমরা যা শিখেছি তা ব্যবহার করে আমি নিজের সম্পর্কে কিছু বাক্য লিখেছি।

So remember, “I’m not a…”.

তাই মনে রাখবেন, "আমি একজন নই..."।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“I’m not a boy”.

"আমি ছেলে নই"।

“I’m not a boy”.

"আমি ছেলে নই"।

“I’m not a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র নই".

“I’m not a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র নই".

“I’m not a Canadian”.

"আমি কানাডিয়ান নই"।

“I’m not a Canadian”.

"আমি কানাডিয়ান নই"।

And the last one.

এবং সর্বশেষটি.

“I’m not a loser”.

"আমি একজন পরাজিত নই"।

“I’m not a loser”.

"আমি একজন পরাজিত নই"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So that was a little bit about me.

তাই যে আমার সম্পর্কে একটি সামান্য বিট ছিল.

Thanks for watching and  I’ll see you guys next time.

দেখার জন্য ধন্যবাদ এবং আমি পরের বার দেখা হবে.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, I’m going to talk about how to make questions using subjective pronouns

এই ভিডিওতে, আমি কীভাবে বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম এবং 'বে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করে প্রশ্ন তৈরি করতে হয় সে সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি

and ‘be’ verbs.

।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

So, this example sentence says.

সুতরাং, এই উদাহরণ বাক্য বলে.

“I’m a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র".

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Remember, “I’m” is just a contraction for “I am”.

মনে রাখবেন, "আমি আছি" শুধুমাত্র "আমি" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, “I’m a student”.

তাই, "আমি একজন ছাত্র"।

“I am a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র".

They mean the same thing.

তারা একই জিনিস মানে।

Now when we want to make a question,

এখন যখন আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন করতে চাই,

we just have to make a simple  change. It’s very easy.

আমাদের শুধু একটি সাধারণ পরিবর্তন করতে হবে। এটা খুব সহজ.

All you have to do is put  the ‘be’ verb in the front.

আপনাকে যা করতে হবে তা হল 'be' ক্রিয়াটি সামনে রাখা।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, “Am I a student?”.

তাই, "আমি কি একজন ছাত্র?"

“Am I a student?”.

"আমি কি একজন শিক্ষার্থী?".

The ‘be’ verb comes in the front.

'বে' ক্রিয়াটি সামনে আসে।

Okay.

I also want you to listen to my intonation.

ঠিক আছে.

আমিও চাই তুমি আমার স্বর শুনো।

When I say it in a sentence, “I’m a student”.

যখন আমি একটি বাক্যে বলি, “আমি একজন ছাত্র”।

“I’m a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র".

Okay, then when I say it in a question.

ঠিক আছে, তারপর যখন আমি একটি প্রশ্নে এটি বলি।

“Am I a student?”.

"আমি কি একজন শিক্ষার্থী?".

“Am I a student?”.

"আমি কি একজন শিক্ষার্থী?".

Notice my intonation goes up for the question.

লক্ষ্য করুন আমার স্বর প্রশ্নটির জন্য উঠে যায়।

Okay, now there are two possible answers for this question.

ঠিক আছে, এখন এই প্রশ্নের জন্য দুটি সম্ভাব্য উত্তর আছে।

“Am I a student?”.

"আমি কি একজন শিক্ষার্থী?".

The answers you can say are: “Yes, I am”.

আপনি যে উত্তরগুলি বলতে পারেন তা হল: "হ্যাঁ, আমি"।

“Yes, I am”.

"হ্যাঁ আমি".

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And, “No, I’m not”.

এবং, "না, আমি নই"।

“No, I’m not”.

"না আমি নই".

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We’re going to look at some more examples.

আমরা আরো কিছু উদাহরণ তাকান চলুন.

Please make sure you repeat after each example.

আপনি প্রতিটি উদাহরণ পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি নিশ্চিত করুন.

Let’s look at the first one.

এর প্রথম এক তাকান.

“Am I…?”.

"আমি কি…?".

“Am I a girl?”.

"আমি কি মেয়ে?"

“Yes, I am”.

"হ্যাঁ আমি".

“Am I a boy?”.

"আমি কি ছেলে?".

“No, I’m not”.

"না আমি নই".

“Am I a singer?”.

"আমি কি গায়ক?"

“Yes, I am”.

"হ্যাঁ আমি".

“Am I a friend?”.

"আমি কি বন্ধু?"

“No, I’m not”.

"না আমি নই".

Now, we’re going to talk about “he is” and “she is” and how to use them in questions.

এখন, আমরা "তিনি" এবং "তিনি" সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি এবং কীভাবে সেগুলিকে প্রশ্নে ব্যবহার করতে হয়।

So let’s look at the sentence on the board.

তাই আসুন বোর্ডে বাক্যটি দেখি।

“He’s a doctor”.

"সে একজন ডাক্তার".

Or…

অথবা...

“She’s a doctor”.

"সে একজন ডাক্তার"।

Remember, “he’s” and “she’s” are contractions for “he is” and “she is”.

মনে রাখবেন, "তিনি" এবং "সে" হল "তিনি" এবং "সে" এর জন্য সংকোচন।

The ‘be’ verb there is ‘is’.

সেখানে 'হবে' ক্রিয়াটি 'হয়'।

So, when we make a question, we have to move the ‘be’ verb to the front.

সুতরাং, যখন আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন তৈরি করি, তখন আমাদের 'be' ক্রিয়াটিকে সামনে নিয়ে যেতে হবে।

Okay.

So we put ‘is’ in the front.

ঠিক আছে.

তাই আমরা সামনে 'is' রাখি।

“Is he a doctor?”.

"তিনি কি একজন ডাক্তার?".

“Is she a doctor?”.

"সে কি চিকিৎসক?".

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Very easy.

খুব সহজ.

Just put the ‘be’ verb in the front.

শুধু সামনে 'be' ক্রিয়াটি রাখুন।

Now I want you to listen to the intonation again.

এখন আমি চাই তুমি আবার ধ্বনি শুনো।

“He’s a doctor”.

"সে একজন ডাক্তার".

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The intonation is going down.

ধ্বনি কমে যাচ্ছে।

“Is he a doctor?”.

"তিনি কি একজন ডাক্তার?".

In the question, again, the intonation goes up.

প্রশ্নে, আবার, স্বর উঠে যায়।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now when you answer, they are several possible answers you can give.

এখন আপনি যখন উত্তর দেন, তখন তারা বেশ কয়েকটি সম্ভাব্য উত্তর যা আপনি দিতে পারেন।

So…

তাই...

“Yes, he is”.

"হ্যাঁ, তিনি"।

Or…

অথবা...

“Yes, she is”.

"হ্যাঁ, সে"।

Okay.

That’s easy.

ঠিক আছে.

এটা সহজ.

When you come to know, this is where it gets a little tricky, but you can do it.

যখন আপনি জানতে পারেন, এটি যেখানে একটু কৌশলী হয়, তবে আপনি এটি করতে পারেন।

“No, he isn’t”.

"না, সে নয়"।

Okay, “isn’t” is a contraction for “is not”.

ঠিক আছে, "হয় না" হল "হয় না" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“No, he isn’t”.

"না, সে নয়"।

Or…

অথবা...

“No, she isn’t”.

"না, সে নয়"।

Okay, so you can use “she isn’t”, “he isn’t”.

ঠিক আছে, তাই আপনি "সে নেই", "সে নয়" ব্যবহার করতে পারেন।

Another answer you can give is “No, he’s not”.

আরেকটি উত্তর যা আপনি দিতে পারেন তা হল "না, সে নয়"।

Or…

অথবা...

“No, she’s not”.

"না, সে নয়"।

You already know this is a contraction for ‘he is’ and ‘she is’.

আপনি ইতিমধ্যেই জানেন যে এটি 'তিনি' এবং 'সে' এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

So, “No, he’s not”.

তাই, "না, সে নয়"।

“No, she’s not”.

"না, সে না".

Okay.

So these are both common.

ঠিক আছে.

তাই এ দুটোই সাধারণ।

And they’re both ok to use.

এবং তারা উভয় ব্যবহার করার জন্য ঠিক আছে.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, remember, we can give two  different answers for ‘no’.

সুতরাং, মনে রাখবেন, আমরা 'না' এর জন্য দুটি ভিন্ন উত্তর দিতে পারি।

Alright, now we’re going to  look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে, এখন আমরা আরও কিছু উদাহরণ দেখতে যাচ্ছি।

Please make sure you repeat after each example.

আপনি প্রতিটি উদাহরণ পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি নিশ্চিত করুন.

“Is he…?”, “Is she…?”.

"সে কি...?", "সে কি...?"।

“Is he a man?”

"সে কি মানুষ?"

“Yes, he is”.

"হ্যাঁ, সেই".

“Is he a cowboy?”.

"সে কি কাউবয়?"

“No, he isn’t.”

"না, সে নয়।"

“Is she a woman?”

"সে কি একজন মহিলা?"

“Yes, she is”.

"হ্যাঁ সে".

“Is she a cowgirl?”.

"সে কি কাউগার্ল?"

“No, she’s not.

"না, সে না.

Now, we’re going to move on to ‘it is’.

এখন, আমরা 'এটি আছে'-এ যেতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

And how to use that in a question.

ঠিক আছে.

এবং কিভাবে একটি প্রশ্ন যে ব্যবহার.

So, let’s look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড তাকান.

“It’s a dog”.

"এটি একটি কুকুর".

Okay, we have the contraction “it’s”.

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের সংকোচন "এটি" আছে।

Remember, “it’s” is a contraction for “it is”.

মনে রাখবেন, "এটি" হল "এটি" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

The ‘be’ verb is ‘is’.

'হবে' ক্রিয়া হল 'হয়'।

When we make a question, remember, we have to put the ‘be’ verb in the front.

আমরা যখন একটি প্রশ্ন করি, মনে রাখবেন, আমাদের সামনে 'be' ক্রিয়াটি বসাতে হবে।

“Is it a dog?”

"এটি একটি কুকুর?"

“Is it a dog?”

"এটি একটি কুকুর?"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The intonation goes up for the question.

প্রশ্নের জন্য স্বর উঠে যায়।

“Is it a dog?”

"এটি একটি কুকুর?"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, there are several answers you can give.

এখন, আপনি দিতে পারেন বেশ কিছু উত্তর আছে.

The first one is “Yes, it is”.

প্রথমটি হল "হ্যাঁ, এটি"।

“Yes, it is”.

"হ্যাঁ, এটা"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

When you say “no”, you can give two answers.

আপনি যখন "না" বলেন, আপনি দুটি উত্তর দিতে পারেন।

“No, it isn’t”.

"না, এটা নয়"।

“No, it isn’t”.

"না, এটা নয়"।

Remember, “isn’t” is a contraction for “is not”.

মনে রাখবেন, "হয় না" হল "হয় না" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We can also say “No, it’s not”.

আমরা "না, এটা নয়" বলতে পারি।

“No, it’s not”.

"না এইটা না".

“It’s” is a contraction for “it is”.

"এটি" হল "এটি" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Okay.

So again, remember, we have these two answers for ‘no’, but they’re both common and

ঠিক আছে.

তাই আবার, মনে রাখবেন, আমাদের কাছে 'না'-এর জন্য এই দুটি উত্তর আছে, কিন্তু তারা উভয়ই সাধারণ এবং

they’re both ok to use when you say “no”.

আপনি যখন "না" বলবেন তখন উভয়ই ব্যবহার করা ঠিক হবে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We’re going to look at some more examples.

আমরা আরো কিছু উদাহরণ তাকান চলুন.

Please make sure you follow  and repeat after each one.

অনুগ্রহ করে নিশ্চিত করুন যে আপনি অনুসরণ করুন এবং প্রতিটির পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“Is it…?”.

"তাই কি…?".

“Is it a book?”.

"এটা কি একটা বই?".

“Yes, it is”.

"হ্যাঁ, এটা"।

“Is it a chair?”.

"এটা কি চেয়ার?"

“No, it isn’t”.

"না, এটা নয়"।

“Is it a shoe?”.

"এটা কি জুতা?"

“Yes, it is”.

"হ্যাঁ, এটা"।

“Is it a car?”.

"এটা কি গাড়ি?"

“No, it’s not”.

"না এইটা না".

Now, we’re going to move on to “you are” and put that in a question.

এখন, আমরা "তুমি আছো" এ চলে যাবো এবং সেটিকে একটি প্রশ্নে রাখব।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

On the board the sentence says.

বোর্ডে বাক্যটি বলে।

“You’re a boy”.

"আপনি একটি ছেলে".

Remember, “you’re” is a contraction for “you are”.

মনে রাখবেন, "আপনি" হল "আপনি" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

The ‘be’ verb is ‘are’.

'be' ক্রিয়া হল 'are'।

So we have to put that in  the front of the question.

তাই আমাদেরকে প্রশ্ন সামনে রাখতে হবে।

“Are you a boy?”

"তুমি কি ছেলে?"

“Are you a boy?”

"তুমি কি ছেলে?"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

When we answer, it’s very simple.

যখন আমরা উত্তর দিই, এটা খুবই সহজ।

We can say, “Yes, I am” or “No, I’m not”.

আমরা বলতে পারি, "হ্যাঁ, আমি" বা "না, আমি নই"।

Okay.

We’re going to look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে.

আমরা আরো কিছু উদাহরণ তাকান চলুন.

Please follow and repeat after each one.

অনুগ্রহ করে অনুসরণ করুন এবং প্রতিটির পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

“Are you…?”

"আপনি…?"

“Are you a Korean?”

"আপনি কি কোরিয়ান?"

“Yes, I am.”

"হ্যাঁ আমি."

“Are you a clown?”

"তুমি কি ক্লাউন?"

“No, I’m not.”

"না আমি নই."

“Are you a nurse?”

"আপনি কি একজন নার্স?"

“Yes, I am.”

"হ্যাঁ আমি."

“Are you a dancer?”

"আপনি কি একজন নর্তকী?"

“No, I’m not.”

"না আমি নই."

Now, let’s talk about “we are” and how to use that in a question.

এখন, আসুন "আমরা" সম্পর্কে কথা বলি এবং একটি প্রশ্নে এটি কীভাবে ব্যবহার করবেন।

Okay.

So the sentence here says, “We’re teachers”.

ঠিক আছে.

তাই এখানে বাক্যটি বলছে, “আমরা শিক্ষক”।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“We’re” is a contraction from “we are”.

"আমরা আছি" হল "আমরা আছি" থেকে সংকোচন।

So the ‘be’ verb ‘are’ goes in the front.

তাই 'be' ক্রিয়া 'are' সামনে চলে যায়।

“Are we teachers?”

"আমরা কি শিক্ষক?"

“Are we teachers?”

"আমরা কি শিক্ষক?"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

When we answer, we can say several things.

আমরা যখন উত্তর দিই, তখন আমরা বেশ কিছু কথা বলতে পারি।

“Yes, we are.”

"হ্যাঁ, আমরা আছি।"

“Yes, we are.”

"হ্যাঁ, আমরা আছি।"

Or…

অথবা...

“No, we aren’t.”

"না, আমরা নই।"

Listen… “aren’t.”

শোন... "হয় না।"

“No, we aren’t.”

"না, আমরা নই।"

“Aren’t” is a contraction for “are not”.

"হয় না" হল "হয় না" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Or we can say, “No, we’re not”.

অথবা আমরা বলতে পারি, "না, আমরা নই"।

“No, we’re not”.

"না, আমরা নই".

And you know “We’re” is a  contraction for “we are”.

এবং আপনি জানেন "আমরা" হল "আমরা" এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We’re going to look at some more examples.

আমরা আরো কিছু উদাহরণ তাকান চলুন.

Please repeat after each one.

প্রতিটি এক পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন.

“Are we…?”

"আমরা কি…?"

“Are we boys?”

"আমরা কি ছেলে?"

“Yes, we are.”

"হ্যাঁ, আমরা আছি।"

“Are we girls?”

"আমরা কি মেয়ে?"

“No, we aren’t.”

"না, আমরা নই।"

“Are we friends?”

"আমরা কি বন্ধু?"

“Yes, we are.”

"হ্যাঁ, আমরা আছি।"

“Are we pro-gamers?”

"আমরা কি প্রো-গেমার?"

“No, we aren’t.”

"না, আমরা নই।"

Now, we’re moving on to ‘they are’ in a question.

এখন, আমরা একটি প্রশ্নে 'তারা আছে' এ চলেছি।

The sentence on the board says, “They’re friends”.

বোর্ডের বাক্যটি বলে, "তারা বন্ধু"।

Remember, ‘They’re’ is a  contraction for ‘they are’.

মনে রাখবেন, 'তারা' হল 'তারা' এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

The ‘be’ verb ‘are’ goes in the front of the question.

'be' ক্রিয়া 'are' প্রশ্নের সামনে চলে যায়।

“Are they friends?”

"তারা কি বন্ধু?"

“Are they friends?”

"তারা কি বন্ধু?"

Okay.

Now when we answer, we can say, “Yes, they are.”

ঠিক আছে.

এখন যখন আমরা উত্তর দিই, আমরা বলতে পারি, "হ্যাঁ, তারা।"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

Or, we can say, “No, they aren’t.”

অথবা, আমরা বলতে পারি, "না, তারা নয়।"

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

‘Aren’t’ is a contraction for ‘are not’.

'Aren't' হল 'are not'-এর সংকোচন।

The last thing we can say is “No, they’re not”.

শেষ জিনিসটি আমরা বলতে পারি "না, তারা নয়"।

“No, they’re not.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

‘They’re’ is a contraction for ‘they are’.

'তারা' হল 'তারা' এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

These two answers for ‘no’ are both correct.

'না' এর জন্য এই দুটি উত্তর উভয়ই সঠিক।

And they’re both common.

এবং তারা উভয়ই সাধারণ।

So you can say either one.

তাই আপনি একটি বলতে পারেন.

Okay.

We’re going to look at some more examples now.

ঠিক আছে.

আমরা এখন আরো কিছু উদাহরণ তাকান চলুন.

Please repeat after each example.

প্রতিটি উদাহরণ পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন.

“Are they…?”

"তারা কি…?"

“Are they tourists?”

"তারা কি পর্যটক?"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

“Are they dogs?”

"তারা কি কুকুর?"

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

“Are they computers?”

"তারা কি কম্পিউটার?"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

“Are they birds?”

"এরা কি পাখি?"

“No, they’re not.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

In this lesson, we learned how to change a 

এই পাঠে, আমরা শিখেছি কিভাবে একটি

subjective pronoun and a  ‘be’ verb into a question.

বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম এবং একটি 'হবে' ক্রিয়াকে একটি প্রশ্নে পরিবর্তন করতে হয়।

Remember, when you’re making a question, you have to put the ‘b’ verb in the beginning.

মনে রাখবেন, আপনি যখন একটি প্রশ্ন করছেন, আপনাকে শুরুতে 'b' ক্রিয়াটি বসাতে হবে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Alright, that’s the end of this video.

ঠিক আছে, এটাই এই ভিডিওর শেষ।

Thanks for watching.

দেখার জন্য ধন্যবাদ.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Okay, so this is a review video.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এটি একটি পর্যালোচনা ভিডিও।

We learned about subjective  pronouns and ‘be’ verbs.

আমরা বিষয়গত সর্বনাম এবং 'হও' ক্রিয়া সম্পর্কে শিখেছি।

We also learned how to use them in a negative sentence and in a question.

আমরা এগুলি কীভাবে একটি নেতিবাচক বাক্যে এবং একটি প্রশ্নে ব্যবহার করতে হয় তাও শিখেছি।

So, let’s look at the board for review.

সুতরাং, এর পর্যালোচনার জন্য বোর্ড তাকান.

“I am a teacher.”

"আমি একজন শিক্ষক."

Remember, ‘am’ is the ‘be’ verb.

মনে রাখবেন, 'am' হল 'be' ক্রিয়া।

“I am a teacher.”

"আমি একজন শিক্ষক."

Okay, we also learned contractions: “I’m”.

ঠিক আছে, আমরা সংকোচনও শিখেছি: "আমি"।

“I’m a teacher.”

"আমি একজন শিক্ষক."

“I’m a teacher.”

"আমি একজন শিক্ষক."

Okay, this is a negative sentence.

ঠিক আছে, এটি একটি নেতিবাচক বাক্য।

“I’m not a teacher.”

"আমি কোন শিক্ষক নই."

“I’m not a teacher.”

"আমি কোন শিক্ষক নই."

Remember, ‘not’ goes after the ‘be’ verb.

মনে রাখবেন, 'হবে' ক্রিয়াপদের পরে 'no' যায়।

Okay.

And here’s a question.

ঠিক আছে.

এবং এখানে একটি প্রশ্ন.

“Am I a teacher?”

"আমি কি একজন শিক্ষক?"

“Am I a teacher?”

"আমি কি একজন শিক্ষক?"

Remember, the ‘be’ verb comes in the front for a question.

মনে রাখবেন, 'be' ক্রিয়াটি একটি প্রশ্নের সামনে আসে।

Okay.

We’re going to listen to some more examples.

ঠিক আছে.

আমরা আরো কিছু উদাহরণ শুনতে যাচ্ছি.

I want you to repeat after each one.

আমি চাই আপনি প্রতিটি একের পরে পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখি।

“He is a king.”

"তিনি একজন রাজা।"

“He is a king.”

"তিনি একজন রাজা।"

“He’s a king.”

"তিনি একজন রাজা।"

“He’s a king.”

"তিনি একজন রাজা।"

“He’s not a king.”

"তিনি রাজা নন।"

“He’s not a king.”

"তিনি রাজা নন।"

“Is he a king?”

"সে কি রাজা?"

“Is he a king?”

"সে কি রাজা?"

Next.

পরবর্তী.

“She is a queen.”

"তিনি একজন রাণী।"

“She is a queen.”

"তিনি একজন রাণী।"

“She’s a queen.”

"তিনি একজন রাণী।"

“She’s a queen.”

"তিনি একজন রাণী।"

“She’s not a queen.”

"সে রানী নয়।"

“She’s not a queen.”

"সে রানী নয়।"

“Is she a queen?”

"সে কি রাণী?"

“Is she a queen?”

"সে কি রাণী?"

Next.

পরবর্তী.

“It is a monkey.”

"এটি একটি বানর।"

“It is a monkey.”

"এটি একটি বানর।"

“It’s a monkey.”

"এটি একটি বানর।"

“It’s a monkey.”

"এটি একটি বানর।"

“It’s not a monkey.”

"এটি একটি বানর নয়।"

“It’s not a monkey.”

"এটি একটি বানর নয়।"

“Is it a monkey?”

"এটা কি বানর?"

“Is it a monkey?”

"এটা কি বানর?"

Next.

পরবর্তী.

“You are a cook.”

"আপনি একজন রাঁধুনি।"

“You are a cook.”

"আপনি একজন রাঁধুনি।"

“You’re a cook.”

"আপনি একজন রাঁধুনি।"

“You’re a cook.”

"আপনি একজন রাঁধুনি।"

“You’re not a cook.”

"আপনি একজন রাঁধুনি নন।"

“You’re not a cook.”

"আপনি একজন রাঁধুনি নন।"

“Are you a cook?”

"আপনি কি একজন রাঁধুনি?"

“Are you a cook?”

"আপনি কি একজন রাঁধুনি?"

Next.

পরবর্তী.

“We are friends.”

"আমরা বন্ধু."

“We are friends.”

"আমরা বন্ধু."

“We’re friends.”

"আমরা বন্ধু."

“We’re friends.”

"আমরা বন্ধু."

“We’re not friends.”

"আমরা বন্ধু নই।"

“We’re not friends.”

"আমরা বন্ধু নই।"

“Are we friends?”

"আমরা কি বন্ধু?"

“Are we friends?”

"আমরা কি বন্ধু?"

And last.

এবং শেষে.

“They are monkeys.”

"তারা বানর।"

“They are monkeys.”

"তারা বানর।"

“They’re monkeys.”

"ওরা বানর।"

“They’re monkeys.”

"ওরা বানর।"

“They’re not monkeys.”

"তারা বানর নয়।"

“They’re not monkeys.”

"তারা বানর নয়।"

“Are they monkeys?”

"ওরা কি বানর?"

“Are they monkeys?”

"ওরা কি বানর?"

So that was our review of subjective pronouns,

তাই এটি ছিল আমাদের বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম,

‘be’ verbs,

'হও' ক্রিয়া,

how to use them with ‘not’,

কীভাবে সেগুলিকে 'না' দিয়ে ব্যবহার করতে হয়

and how to use them in questions.

এবং কীভাবে প্রশ্নে সেগুলি ব্যবহার করতে হয়।

I really hope that you repeated  each example that I gave

আমি সত্যিই আশা করি যে আপনি আমার দেওয়া প্রতিটি উদাহরণ পুনরাবৃত্তি করেছেন

because pronunciation is very important.

কারণ উচ্চারণ খুবই গুরুত্বপূর্ণ।

Now, if you didn’t, you should go back and watch it again and repeat.

এখন, যদি আপনি না করেন, আপনার ফিরে যাওয়া উচিত এবং এটি আবার দেখুন এবং পুনরাবৃত্তি করুন।

Okay. Well that’s all. Thank you.

ঠিক আছে. ওয়েল যে সব. ধন্যবাদ.

Bye.

বিদায়।

This is a checkup for subjective pronouns and ‘be’ verbs.

এটি বিষয়গত সর্বনাম এবং 'হও' ক্রিয়াগুলির জন্য একটি চেকআপ।

Let’s take a look at the board.

এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

The first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্য।

“___, are bags.”

"___, ব্যাগ।"

Now, bags are things.

এখন, ব্যাগ জিনিস.

So we can’t say “he” or “she” or, you know, any of those.

তাই আমরা বলতে পারি না "তিনি" বা "সে" বা, আপনি জানেন, এর কোনটি।

We have to use “it” or “they”.

আমাদের "এটি" বা "তারা" ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

Now, we have “are….

এখন, আমাদের আছে "হচ্ছে...

bags”.

ব্যাগ"।

With an ‘s’.

একটি 's' দিয়ে।

So that means more than one.

সুতরাং যে একাধিক মানে.

We have to use ‘they’.

আমাদের 'তারা' ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

“They are bags.”

"তারা ব্যাগ।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The next sentence we have an animal.

পরবর্তী বাক্য আমরা একটি পশু আছে.

“____ is a dog.”

"____ একটি কুকুর।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

But just one.

কিন্তু মাত্র একটি।

Right? ’a’ dog.

ঠিক? 'একটি কুকুর.

So this time we use ‘it’.

তাই এই সময় আমরা 'এটি' ব্যবহার করি।

“It is a dog.”

"এটি একটি কুকুর."

Now let’s look at these two.

এখন এই দুটি তাকান.

“The girl is an artist.”

"মেয়েটি একজন শিল্পী।"

We have ‘the girl’.

আমাদের 'মেয়ে' আছে।

What is the subjective pronoun for one girl?

একটি মেয়ের জন্য বিষয়গত সর্বনাম কি?

“She.”

"সে।"

“She is an artist.”

"সে একজন শিল্পী."

These two sentences have the same meaning.

এই দুটি বাক্য একই অর্থ আছে.

They’re the same.

তারা একই.

Okay, and on the bottom, we have a question.

ঠিক আছে, এবং নীচে, আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন আছে.

When we ask a question, we have to put the ‘be’ verb first.

যখন আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন জিজ্ঞাসা করি, আমাদের প্রথমে 'হবে' ক্রিয়াটি রাখতে হবে।

“Are ___ pandas?”

"___ পান্ডা কি?"

“Are ___ pandas?”

"___ পান্ডা কি?"

With an ‘s’.

একটি 's' দিয়ে।

That means more than one.

মানে একাধিক।

So, we say, “they”.

সুতরাং, আমরা বলি, "তারা"।

“Are they pandas?”

"তারা কি পান্ডা?"

“Yes, ____ are.”

"হ্যাঁ, ____ হয়।"

Again plural.

আবার বহুবচন।

So we just use the same.

তাই আমরা শুধু একই ব্যবহার.

“They.”

"তারা।"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, now we’re going to focus on negatives and questions.

ঠিক আছে, এখন আমরা নেতিবাচক এবং প্রশ্নের উপর ফোকাস করতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay, the first sentence says,

ঠিক আছে, প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে,

“I’m a student”.

"আমি একজন ছাত্র"।

Okay, “I am…I’m a student”.

ঠিক আছে, "আমি...আমি একজন ছাত্র"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

What if I’m a teacher?

যদি আমি একজন শিক্ষক হই?

Okay, it’s not true.

ঠিক আছে, এটা সত্য নয়।

I need ‘not’.

আমার 'না' দরকার।

Right…

ঠিক আছে...

Remember, ‘not’ goes after the ‘be’ verb.

মনে রাখবেন, 'be' ক্রিয়াপদের পরে 'not' যায়।

“I am…am not.”

"আমি আছি... নই।"

And then the noun. “…a student.”

এবং তারপর বিশেষ্য. "…একটি ছাত্র."

“I’m not a student.”

"আমি একজন ছাত্র নই."

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“They are teachers.”

"তারা শিক্ষক."

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And now we have some other people...

এবং এখন আমাদের আরও কিছু লোক আছে...

and that’s not true.

এবং এটি সত্য নয়।

“They are not teachers.”

"তারা শিক্ষক নয়।"

Again, after the ‘be’ verb ‘are’ and before the noun ‘teachers’.

আবার 'be' ক্রিয়ার পরে 'are' এবং noun-এর আগে 'teachers'।

“They are not teachers.”

"তারা শিক্ষক নয়।"

Okay.

Now, I’m going to ask you a question.

ঠিক আছে.

এখন, আমি আপনাকে একটি প্রশ্ন জিজ্ঞাসা করতে যাচ্ছি.

And you have to answer.

এবং আপনাকে উত্তর দিতে হবে।

“Are you a student?”

"তুমি কি একজন ছাত্র?"

“Are you a student?”

"তুমি কি একজন ছাত্র?"

Well, you’re taking my class,  you’re learning English.

আচ্ছা, আপনি আমার ক্লাস নিচ্ছেন, আপনি ইংরেজি শিখছেন।

So, “Yes, I am.”

তাই, "হ্যাঁ, আমি।"

Okay, you should say, “Yes, I am.”

ঠিক আছে, আপনার বলা উচিত, "হ্যাঁ, আমি আছি।"

But how about this one?

কিন্তু কিভাবে এই এক সম্পর্কে?

“Are you a monkey?”

"তুমি কি বানর?"

“Are you a monkey?”

"তুমি কি বানর?"

Of course the answer is “No, I’m not”.

অবশ্যই উত্তর "না, আমি নই"।

“No, I’m not”.

"না আমি নই".

Okay, let’s move on to the last part.

ঠিক আছে, শেষ অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Now for this last part, we’re going to look at some sentences,

এখন এই শেষ অংশের জন্য, আমরা কিছু বাক্য দেখতে যাচ্ছি,

but there’s something wrong  in all of these sentences.

কিন্তু এই সব বাক্যে কিছু ভুল আছে।

So you have to find the mistakes.

তাই ভুলগুলো খুঁজে বের করতে হবে।

The first sentence says, “I’m student”.

প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে, "আমি ছাত্র"।

Okay, look, “student”.

ঠিক আছে, দেখুন, "ছাত্র"।

There’s no ‘s’.

কোনো 'স' নেই।

That means just one.

মানে শুধু একটা।

Just one.

শুধু একটি.

So remember, if there’s just  one, we have to put ‘a’.

তাই মনে রাখবেন, যদি শুধুমাত্র একটি থাকে, তাহলে আমাদের 'a' লাগাতে হবে।

“I’m a student.”

"আমি একজন ছাত্র."

Let’s look at the next one.

এর পরের একটি তাকান.

“They are student”.

"তারা শিক্ষার্থী".

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

This one says, “They are”.

এই এক বলছে, "তারা"।

This means there is more than one.

এর মানে একাধিক আছে।

More than one student.

একাধিক ছাত্র।

So, what do we have to do?

সুতরাং, আমাদের কি করতে হবে?

We have to say “They are….

আমাদের বলতে হবে “তারা…।

students”.

ছাত্র"।

We have to put an ‘s’ to show there’s more than one student.

একাধিক ছাত্র আছে দেখানোর জন্য আমাদের একটি 's' লাগাতে হবে।

“She aren’t a baby.”

"সে একটি শিশু নয়।"

“She.”

"সে।"

That’s one person.

যে এক ব্যক্তি.

One girl or woman.

একটি মেয়ে বা মহিলা।

“…a baby.”

"…একটি বাচ্চা."

That’s one person.

যে এক ব্যক্তি.

But we put “aren’t”.

কিন্তু আমরা রাখি "হয় না"।

Now that’s wrong.

এখন সেটা ভুল।

We have to say... ‘isn’t’.

আমাদের বলতে হবে... 'না'।

“She isn’t a baby”.

"সে একটি শিশু নয়"

“You isn’t a cat”.

"তুমি বিড়াল না"।

Now, for the subjective pronoun ‘you’,

এখন, বিষয়ভিত্তিক সর্বনাম 'তুমি'-এর জন্য

we have to have the ‘be’ verb ‘are’.

আমাদের 'হবে' ক্রিয়াপদ 'are' থাকতে হবে।

So not “You isn’t a cat”,  but “You aren’t... a cat”.

তাই "আপনি একটি বিড়াল নন", কিন্তু "আপনি নন... একটি বিড়াল"।

“You aren’t a cat.”

"তুমি বিড়াল না।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Are it a cat?”

"এটা কি বিড়াল?"

Okay. “…a cat.”

ঠিক আছে. "…একটি বিড়াল."

That’s one animal.

যে একটি প্রাণী.

So, do we need ‘are’?

তাই, আমাদের কি 'হয়' দরকার?

No, we need the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

না, আমাদের 'হবে' ক্রিয়া 'is' দরকার।

“Is it a cat?”

"এটা কি বিড়াল?"

“Is it a cat?”

"এটা কি বিড়াল?"

Okay, so that was the checkup for subjective pronouns and ‘be’ verbs.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এটি ছিল বিষয়গত সর্বনাম এবং 'হও' ক্রিয়াগুলির জন্য চেকআপ।

I hope you guys understood and I’ll see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে পাব।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to learn how to  make questions using ‘what’ and ‘be’ verbs. 

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা শিখতে যাচ্ছি কিভাবে 'what' এবং 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করে প্রশ্ন তৈরি করতে হয়।

Okay. Now when we have one thing,

ঠিক আছে. এখন যখন আমাদের একটি জিনিস আছে, তখন আমাদের

we have to use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

'be' ক্রিয়া 'is' ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“It is a watch.”

"এটি একটি ঘড়ি।"

“It is a watch.”

"এটি একটি ঘড়ি।"

It’s one thing, so I have to say ‘a’.

এটা একটা জিনিস, তাই আমাকে 'ক' বলতে হবে।

“a watch.”

"একটি ঘড়ি."

I can also use the contraction for ‘it is’,

আমি 'এটি', "এটি'-এর জন্য সংকোচনও ব্যবহার করতে পারি

“it’s”.

।

Okay, now listen.

ঠিক আছে, এখন শোন।

“It’s a ….”

"এটা একটা …."

“It’s a ….”

"এটা একটা …."

“It’s a watch.”

"এটি একটি ঘড়ি."

“It’s a watch.”

"এটি একটি ঘড়ি."

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“It’s a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

“It’s a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

Okay. Now, there are two highlighters.

ঠিক আছে. এখন, দুটি হাইলাইটার আছে।

Okay, two.

ঠিক আছে, দুই.

We use ‘are’.

আমরা 'are' ব্যবহার করি।

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“They are highlighters.”

"তারা হাইলাইটার।"

“They are highlighters.”

"তারা হাইলাইটার।"

We have more than one, so we have to say “are”.

আমাদের একাধিক আছে, তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে "হয়"।

And we have to put an ‘s’ at the end.

এবং আমাদের শেষে একটি 's' লাগাতে হবে।

Again, we can use a contraction for ‘they are’:

আবার, আমরা 'তারা' এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন ব্যবহার করতে পারি:

“they’re”.

"তারা"।

“They’re highlighters.”

"তারা হাইলাইটার।"

“They’re highlighters.”

"তারা হাইলাইটার।"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“They’re markers.”

"তারা চিহ্নিতকারী।"

“They’re markers.”

"তারা চিহ্নিতকারী।"

Okay. 

ঠিক আছে.

We’re going to look at some examples  and I’m going to ask some questions.

আমরা কিছু উদাহরণ দেখতে যাচ্ছি এবং আমি কিছু প্রশ্ন জিজ্ঞাসা করতে যাচ্ছি.

We please try to answer them.

আমরা তাদের উত্তর দিতে চেষ্টা করুন.

Listen carefully and answer with “It’s 

মনোযোগ সহকারে শুনুন এবং "এটি

a” or “They’re”. Let’s look at the first one.

একটি" বা "তারা" দিয়ে উত্তর দিন। এর প্রথম এক তাকান.

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

“It’s a key.”

"এটা কি?"

"এটি একটি চাবি।"

“It’s a key.”

"এটি একটি চাবি।"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“They’re keys.”

"তারা চাবি।"

“They’re keys.”

"তারা চাবি।"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“It’s a chair.”

"এটা একটা কেদারা."

“It’s a chair.”

"এটা একটা কেদারা."

“What are they?”

“What are they?”

“They’re chairs.”

"তারা কি?"

"তারা কি?" "তারা চেয়ার।"

“They’re chairs.”

"তারা চেয়ার।"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“It’s a cat.”

"এটি একটি বিড়াল."

“It’s a cat.”

"এটি একটি বিড়াল."

“What are they?”

“What are they?”

“They’re cats.”

“They’re cats.”

"তারা কি?" "তারা কি?"

"তারা বিড়াল।"

"তারা বিড়াল।"

“What is it?”

“What is it?”

“It’s a house.”

"এটা কি?"

"এটা কি?"

"এটি একটি ঘর."

“It’s a house.”

"এটি একটি ঘর."

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“What are they?”

“They’re houses.”

"তারা কি?" "তারা ঘর।"

“They’re houses.”

"তারা ঘর।"

Now let’s focus on pronunciation

এখন উচ্চারণ এবং এই দ্রুত বলার

and saying these fast. Okay. 

উপর ফোকাস করা যাক . ঠিক আছে.

English speakers speak very quickly,

ইংরেজি ভাষাভাষী খুব দ্রুত কথা বলে,

so you have to practice as well.

তাই আপনাকে অনুশীলনও করতে হবে।

Okay. “What is it?” 

ঠিক আছে. "এটা কি?"

Okay, let’s try it faster three times.

ঠিক আছে, তিনবার দ্রুত চেষ্টা করা যাক।

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“What is it?”

It sounds like one word.

"এটা কি?"

এটি একটি শব্দ মত শোনাচ্ছে.

Okay, and the answer is also very fast.

ঠিক আছে, এবং উত্তরটিও খুব দ্রুত।

“It’s a…”

"এটি একটি..."

“It’s a…”

"এটি একটি..."

“It’s a…”

"এটি একটি..."

“It’s a pencil.”

"এটি একটি পেন্সিল।"

“It’s a chair.”

“It’s a marker.”

"এটা একটা কেদারা." "এটি একটি মার্কার।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

When we have more than one,  we say, “What are they?”.

যখন আমাদের একাধিক থাকে, তখন আমরা বলি, "তারা কী?"।

Let’s do it fast three times.

চলুন এটি তিনবার দ্রুত করি।

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

“What are they?”

"তারা কি?"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And when you answer. “They’re…” 

আর যখন তুমি উত্তর দাও। "তারা..."

“They’re pencils”

"ওরা পেন্সিল"

“They’re chairs”

"ওরা চেয়ার"

“They’re markers”

"তারা মার্কার"

Okay, so this video was ‘what’ and ‘be’ verbs.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এই ভিডিওটি ছিল 'কী' এবং 'হবে' ক্রিয়া।

I hope you understood, and  I’ll see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন, এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে পাব।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody, and welcome.

হাই, সবাই, এবং স্বাগতম.

In this video, we’re going to talk about ‘this’ and ‘that’.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা 'এই' এবং 'ওটা' সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

Now ‘this’ and ‘that’ are used to talk about nouns

এখন 'এই' এবং 'সেই' বিশেষ্য সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে ব্যবহৃত হয়

that are close to us, near or far away.

যা আমাদের কাছাকাছি, কাছে বা দূরে।

Okay.

So let’s look at the board.

ঠিক আছে.

তাই এর বোর্ড তাকান.

“This is a flower.”

"এটি একটি ফুল।"

Okay, we use ‘this’ to talk about  one noun, “a flower”, that is close.

ঠিক আছে, আমরা একটি বিশেষ্য সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে 'এই' ব্যবহার করি, "একটি ফুল", যেটি কাছাকাছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“This is a flower.”

"এটি একটি ফুল।"

It’s not far.

এটা বেশী দূরে নয়.

It’s close.

এটা বন্ধ.

“That is a flower.”

"এটি একটি ফুল।"

Okay, we use ‘that’ to talk  about one noun that’s far away.

ঠিক আছে, আমরা একটি বিশেষ্য সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে 'সেই' ব্যবহার করি যা অনেক দূরে।

So, “That… that is a flower”.

তাই, "ওটা... ওটা একটা ফুল"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

For another example…

অন্য উদাহরণের জন্য...

“This is a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

It’s close to me.

এটা আমার কাছাকাছি.

But “That… that is a marker”.

কিন্তু “ওটা… সেটা একটা মার্কার”।

It’s far away.

এটা অনেক দূর.

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

So we know…

তাই আমরা জানি...

“This is a flower.”

"এটি একটি ফুল।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And “That is a flower... that”.

এবং "ওটা একটা ফুল... যে"।

Now, “Is this a flower”?

এখন, "এটা কি ফুল"?

“What is it?”

"এটা কি?"

“It’s a chair.”

"এটা একটা কেদারা."

So we have to use the negative.

তাই আমাদের নেতিবাচক ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

“This isn’t a flower.”

"এটি একটি ফুল নয়।"

It’s close by, but it isn’t a flower.

এটা কাছাকাছি, কিন্তু এটি একটি ফুল নয়.

‘isn’t’ is a contraction for ‘is not’.

'is not' হল 'is not'-এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“This isn’t a flower.”

"এটি একটি ফুল নয়।"

“This is a chair.”

"এই একটি চেয়ার."

“That isn’t a flower.”

"ওটা ফুল নয়।"

It’s far away, so we say “that”.

এটা অনেক দূরে, তাই আমরা বলি “সেটা”।

Again, we have ‘isn’t’, ‘a flower’.

আবার, আমাদের আছে 'হয় না', 'একটি ফুল'।

“That’s a chair.”

"এটা একটা চেয়ার।"

And let’s take another example.

এবং এর আরেকটি উদাহরণ নেওয়া যাক.

“This isn’t a pencil.”

"এটি একটি পেন্সিল নয়।"

“This is a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

And…

এবং...

“That isn’t a pencil.”

"এটি একটি পেন্সিল নয়।"

“That is a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Now we’re going to learn how to use ‘this’ and ‘that’ in a question.

এখন আমরা একটি প্রশ্নে 'এই' এবং 'ওটা' কীভাবে ব্যবহার করতে হয় তা শিখতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So we know, “This is a flower”.

তাই আমরা জানি, "এটি একটি ফুল"।

When we make a question, we have to switch.

যখন আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন করি, আমাদের পরিবর্তন করতে হবে।

We put the ‘be’ verb first.

আমরা প্রথমে 'be' ক্রিয়াটি রাখি।

So it becomes, “Is this a flower?”.

সুতরাং এটি হয়ে যায়, "এটি কি একটি ফুল?"।

Okay, it’s close by.

ঠিক আছে, এটা কাছাকাছি.

So the answer is, “Yes, it is”.

তাই উত্তর হল, "হ্যাঁ, এটা"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Is that a flower?”

"এটা কি ফুল?"

It’s far away.

এটা অনেক দূর.

The answer is, “Yes, it is”.

উত্তর হল, "হ্যাঁ, এটা"।

Okay, but how about this?

ঠিক আছে, কিন্তু এই সম্পর্কে কিভাবে?

“This isn’t a flower.” So...

"এটি একটি ফুল নয়।" তাই...

“Is this a flower?”.

"এটা কি ফুল?"

The answer is, “No, it isn’t”.

উত্তর হল, "না, এটা নয়"।

“Is that a flower?”

"এটা কি ফুল?"

“No, it isn’t.”

"না, এটা নয়।"

Okay, here.

ঠিক আছে, এখানে.

“Is this a marker?”.

"এটা কি মার্কার?"

“Yes, it is.”

"হ্যাঁ, এটা।"

“Is that a marker?”.

"এটা কি মার্কার?"

“Yes, it is.”

“Is this a pencil?”.

"হ্যাঁ, এটা।" "এটা কি পেন্সিল?"

“No, it isn’t.”

"না, এটা নয়।"

“Is that a pencil?”.

“No, it isn’t.”

"এটা কি পেন্সিল?" "না, এটা নয়।"

Okay, so we learned ‘this’  and ‘that’ in this video.

ঠিক আছে, তাই আমরা এই ভিডিওতে 'এই' এবং 'ওটা' শিখেছি।

I hope you guys understand and  I’ll see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে পাব।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody and welcome to this video.

হাই, সবাই এবং এই ভিডিওতে স্বাগতম।

We’re going to talk about how  to use ‘these’ and ‘those’.

আমরা কীভাবে 'এই' এবং 'ওইগুলি' ব্যবহার করব সে সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Uhhh, just like we learned with ‘this’ and ‘that’,

উহহ, ঠিক যেমন আমরা 'এই' এবং 'ওটা' দিয়ে শিখেছি,

we use ‘these’ and ‘those’ to talk  about nouns that are close to us

আমরা 'এই' এবং 'ওই' ব্যবহার করি বিশেষ্যগুলি সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে যা আমাদের কাছাকাছি

or far from us.

বা আমাদের থেকে দূরে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Now, we know if there is just one,

এখন, আমরা জানি যদি শুধুমাত্র একটি থাকে,

and it’s close to us,

এবং এটি আমাদের কাছাকাছি,

we say, “This is a flower”.

আমরা বলি, "এটি একটি ফুল"।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

But there’s more than one.

কিন্তু একাধিক আছে.

It’s plural.

এটা বহুবচন।

So we have to say, “These”.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, "এইগুলি"।

“These are flowers.”

"এগুলো ফুল।"

Again, more than one.

আবার, একাধিক।

Now, I change the ‘be’ verb to ‘are’

এখন, আমি 'be' ক্রিয়াটিকে 'are' এ পরিবর্তন করেছি

and I added an ‘s’ at the end of ‘flower’.

এবং আমি 'ফুল'-এর শেষে একটি 's' যোগ করেছি।

So, “These are flowers.”

সুতরাং, "এগুলি ফুল।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, there’s one that’s far away.

এখন, অনেক দূরে একটি আছে.

We say, “That is a flower.”

আমরা বলি, "এটি একটি ফুল।"

But, again, there’s more than one.

কিন্তু, আবার, একাধিক আছে.

There are two flowers.

দুটি ফুল আছে।

So, in that case, we use, “Those are flowers.”

সুতরাং, সেই ক্ষেত্রে, আমরা ব্যবহার করি, "এগুলি ফুল।"

“Those are flowers.”

"এগুলো ফুল।"

They’re far away.

তারা অনেক দূরে।

“Those are flowers.”

"এগুলো ফুল।"

Let’s look at these.

চলুন এগুলো দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

“This is a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

“These are markers.”

"এগুলি চিহ্নিতকারী।"

“That is a marker.”

"এটি একটি মার্কার।"

“Those are markers.”

"এগুলি চিহ্নিতকারী।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s move on to the next part.

এর পরের অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

So we know “These are flowers”.

তাই আমরা জানি "এগুলো ফুল"।

They’re close by.

তারা কাছাকাছি আছে.

And for the flowers that are far away, we say,

আর যে ফুলগুলো দূরে থাকে তাদের জন্য আমরা বলি,

“Those are flowers”.

“ওগুলো ফুল”।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

But over here we have ‘chairs’.

কিন্তু এখানে আমাদের 'চেয়ার' আছে।

So, we have to use the negative.

সুতরাং, আমাদের নেতিবাচক ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

Okay.

We use the contraction ‘aren’t’

ঠিক আছে.

আমরা ' aren't' সংকোচন ব্যবহার করি

which is short for ‘are not’.

যা 'are not'-এর জন্য সংক্ষিপ্ত।

“These aren’t flowers.”

"এগুলো ফুল নয়।"

“These aren’t flowers.

“এগুলো ফুল নয়।

Okay, and for the chairs that are far away,

ঠিক আছে, এবং দূরে যে চেয়ারগুলির জন্য,

we say, “Those aren’t flowers”.

আমরা বলি, "এগুলি ফুল নয়"।

“Those aren’t flowers.”

Okay, and let’s try with the markers.

"এগুলো ফুল নয়।"

ঠিক আছে, এবং এর মার্কার দিয়ে চেষ্টা করা যাক.

“These aren’t pens.”

"এগুলো কলম নয়।"

“These aren’t pens.”

"এগুলো কলম নয়।"

Okay, and far away.

ঠিক আছে, এবং অনেক দূরে।

“Those aren’t pens.”

"এগুলো কলম নয়।"

“Those aren’t pens.”

"এগুলো কলম নয়।"

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, now we’re going to make some questions.

ঠিক আছে, এখন আমরা কিছু প্রশ্ন করতে যাচ্ছি।

We know, “These are flowers”.

আমরা জানি, "এগুলো ফুল"।

When you want to make a  question, you have to change

আপনি যখন একটি প্রশ্ন করতে চান, আপনাকে

‘these are’ and put the ‘be’ verb first.

'এগুলো' পরিবর্তন করতে হবে এবং প্রথমে 'হবে' ক্রিয়াটি রাখতে হবে।

So, it becomes, “Are these flowers?”.

সুতরাং, এটি হয়ে যায়, "এই ফুলগুলি?"

“Are these flowers?”

"এগুলো কি ফুল?"

And the answer is “Yes, they are.”

এবং উত্তর হল "হ্যাঁ, তারা।"

Okay, now the flowers are far away.

ঠিক আছে, এখন ফুল অনেক দূরে।

So we say, “Are those flowers?”.

তাই আমরা বলি, "ওই ফুলগুলো?"

“Are those flowers?”

"এগুলো কি ফুল?"

And again, the answer is “Yes, they are.”

এবং আবার, উত্তর হল "হ্যাঁ, তারা।"

Okay. Now here, we have chairs.

ঠিক আছে. এখন এখানে, আমরা চেয়ার আছে.

“Are these flowers?”

"এগুলো কি ফুল?"

The answer is “No, they aren’t.”

উত্তর হল "না, তারা নয়।"

Okay, now they’re far away.

ঠিক আছে, এখন তারা অনেক দূরে।

“Are those flowers?”

"এগুলো কি ফুল?"

And again, the answer is “No, they aren’t.”

এবং আবার, উত্তর হল "না, তারা নয়।"

How about these? “Are these markers?”

এগুলো কেমন? "এগুলো কি মার্কার?"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

“Are those markers?”

"সেগুলো কি মার্কার?"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

“Are these pens?”

"এগুলো কি কলম?"

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

“Are those pens?”

“No, they aren’t.”

"এগুলো কি কলম?" "না, তারা নয়।"

Okay, so in this video, we learned  how to use ‘these’ and ‘those’.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা শিখেছি কীভাবে 'এই' এবং 'ওসব' ব্যবহার করতে হয়।

I hope you guys understand and I’ll see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে পাব।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Let’s do some practice with ‘this’, ‘that’,  

আসুন 'এই', 'সেটা',

‘these’, and ‘those’. First, I have this pen.

'এইস', এবং 'ওসব' দিয়ে কিছু অনুশীলন করি। প্রথমত, আমার কাছে এই কলম আছে।

I have to say, “This is a pen.”

আমাকে বলতে হবে, "এটি একটি কলম।"

“This is a pen.”

"এটা একটা কলম."

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Over there, “That is a pen.”

সেখানে, "এটি একটি কলম।"

“That is a pen.”

"এটি একটি কলম।"

Now, I have two pens.

এখন, আমার দুটি কলম আছে।

“These are pens.”

"এগুলো কলম।"

“These are pens.”

"এগুলো কলম।"

Okay, I’m going to move them far away.

ঠিক আছে, আমি তাদের অনেক দূরে সরাতে যাচ্ছি।

“Those are pens.”

"এগুলি কলম।"

“Those are pens.”

"এগুলি কলম।"

Okay, let’s move on to questions.

ঠিক আছে, আসুন প্রশ্নগুলিতে এগিয়ে যাই।

I have one pen.

আমার একটা কলম আছে।

“Is this a pen?”

"এটা কি একটা কলম?"

“Yes, it is.”

"হ্যাঁ, এটা।"

“Is this a cookie?”

"এটা কি কুকি?"

“No, it isn’t.”

"না, এটা নয়।"

“Is that a pen?”

“Yes, it is.”

"এটা কি কলম?" "হ্যাঁ, এটা।"

“Is that a cookie?”

“No, it isn’t.”

"এটা কি কুকি?"

"না, এটা নয়।"

Okay, two pens.

ঠিক আছে, দুটি কলম।

“Are these pens?”

"এগুলো কি কলম?"

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

“Are these cookies?”

"এগুলো কি কুকিজ?"

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

Okay, now they’re over here.

ঠিক আছে, এখন তারা এখানে আছে.

“Are those pens?”

"এগুলো কি কলম?"

Yes, they are?”

হ্যা তারা?"

“Are those cookies?”

"এগুলো কি কুকিজ?"

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

Okay, so that was our practice

ঠিক আছে, তাই

for ‘this’, ‘that’, ‘these’, and ‘those’.

'এই', 'সেটা', 'এই', এবং 'ওসব'-এর জন্য আমাদের অনুশীলন ছিল।

I hope you guys understood and  I’ll see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে পাব।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to  learn about possessive adjectives.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা অধিকারী বিশেষণ সম্পর্কে শিখতে যাচ্ছি।

We use possessive adjectives to show that something belongs to me,

কিছু আমার, বা কিছু অন্য কারোর

or something belongs to someone else.

তা দেখানোর জন্য আমরা অধিকারী বিশেষণ ব্যবহার করি

I own something or someone owns something.

। আমি কিছুর মালিক বা কেউ কিছুর মালিক।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So let’s take a look at the board.

তো চলুন বোর্ড দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

Now last time we learned about subjective pronouns

এখন শেষবার আমরা বিষয়গত সর্বনাম সম্পর্কে শিখেছি

and here they are.

এবং এখানে সেগুলি রয়েছে।

‘I’, ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, ‘you’, ‘we’, ‘they’.

'আমি', 'সে', 'সে', 'এটি', 'আপনি', 'আমরা', 'তারা'।

And here are the possessive adjectives.

এবং এখানে possessive adjectives আছে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

‘My’.

'আমার'.

We use ‘my’ to show that something belongs to me.

কিছু আমার আছে তা দেখানোর জন্য আমরা 'আমার' ব্যবহার করি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

‘His’.

'তার'।

This means that something belongs to one man or one boy.

এর মানে হল কিছু একটা পুরুষ বা একটা ছেলের।

‘Her’.

'তার'।

We use that to show something belongs to one woman or one girl.

আমরা এটি ব্যবহার করি কিছু দেখানোর জন্য যা একজন মহিলা বা একটি মেয়ের।

‘Its’.

'এর'।

We use ‘its’ to show that something belongs to an animal.

কিছু একটা প্রাণীর অন্তর্গত তা দেখানোর জন্য আমরা 'তার' ব্যবহার করি।

We use ‘your’ to show that  something belongs to you.

আমরা 'আপনার' ব্যবহার করি তা দেখানোর জন্য যে কিছু আপনার।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

‘Our’.

'আমাদের'।

‘Our’ means that something belongs to me and you or me and somebody else.

'আমাদের' অর্থ হল কিছু আমার এবং আপনি বা আমার এবং অন্য কারো।

Okay, or me and other people.

ঠিক আছে, বা আমি এবং অন্যান্য মানুষ.

Okay, and last.

ঠিক আছে, এবং শেষ.

We use ‘their’ to show that something belongs to many people.

আমরা 'তাদের' ব্যবহার করি এটা দেখানোর জন্য যে কিছু অনেক লোকের।

Okay, not me, but many people.

ঠিক আছে, আমি না, কিন্তু অনেক মানুষ.

Okay, now I want you to pay  attention to three special words.

ঠিক আছে, এখন আমি আপনাকে তিনটি বিশেষ শব্দের প্রতি মনোযোগ দিতে চাই।

‘Its’, ‘your’ and ‘their’.

'এটা', 'আপনার' এবং 'তাদের'।

Now I want you to notice these words sound like other words.

এখন আমি চাই আপনি এই শব্দগুলি লক্ষ্য করুন অন্যান্য শব্দের মতো শব্দ।

So you have to be careful  not to get them confused.

তাই তাদের বিভ্রান্ত না হওয়ার জন্য আপনাকে সতর্ক থাকতে হবে।

And I’m going to explain.

এবং আমি ব্যাখ্যা করতে যাচ্ছি.

‘Its’ sounds like the contraction for ‘it is’; ‘it’s’.

'এটি' শব্দটি 'এটি'-এর সংকোচনের মতো; 'এটা'।

Okay, so, don’t get that confused.

ঠিক আছে, তাই, বিভ্রান্ত হবেন না।

‘Your’ sounds like the contraction for ‘you are’ ‘you’re’.

'আপনার' শব্দটি 'তুমি আছো' 'তুমি'র সংকোচনের মতো।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So make sure you use this one to show possession.

তাই নিশ্চিত করুন যে আপনি দখল দেখানোর জন্য এটি ব্যবহার করছেন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And the last word, ‘their’, it actually sounds like two other words.

এবং শেষ শব্দ, 'তাদের', এটি আসলে অন্য দুটি শব্দের মতো শোনাচ্ছে।

The contraction for ‘they are’ ‘they’re’

'তারা' এর জন্য সংকোচন 'তারা'

or the word t-h-e-r-e, the  other word ‘there’. Okay.

বা সেখানে শব্দ, অন্য শব্দ 'সেখানে'। ঠিক আছে.

So please don’t get those confused.

তাই দয়া করে ওদের বিভ্রান্ত করবেন না।

Now I know all of this sounds very hard,

এখন আমি জানি এই সব খুব কঠিন শোনাচ্ছে,

but if you practice with me,  I’m sure you’ll understand.

কিন্তু আপনি যদি আমার সাথে অনুশীলন করেন, আমি নিশ্চিত আপনি বুঝতে পারবেন।

So let’s move on to the next part.

তো চলুন পরবর্তী অংশে চলে যাই।

Okay, let’s practice together.

ঠিক আছে, আসুন একসাথে অনুশীলন করি।

Now, here I have a marker.

এখন, এখানে আমি একটি মার্কার আছে.

It belongs to me.

এটা আমার.

So, I have to say, “This is my marker.”

সুতরাং, আমাকে বলতে হবে, "এটি আমার মার্কার।"

“This isn’t your marker.”

"এটি আপনার মার্কার নয়।"

“This is my marker.”

"এটি আমার মার্কার।"

Okay, let’s look at this boy.

ঠিক আছে, এই ছেলেটিকে দেখি।

He has a hat.

তার একটা টুপি আছে।

So, I have to say, “This is his hat.”

সুতরাং, আমাকে বলতে হবে, "এটি তার টুপি।"

“This is his hat.”

"এটি তার টুপি।"

“This isn’t my hat.”

"এটা আমার টুপি নয়।"

“This isn’t your hat.”

"এটা তোমার টুপি নয়।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And this girl has a dress.

এবং এই মেয়ে একটি পোশাক আছে.

So, “This is her dress.”

সুতরাং, "এটি তার পোশাক।"

“This is her dress.”

"এটি তার পোশাক।"

“This isn’t my dress.”

"এটা আমার পোশাক নয়।"

“This isn’t your dress.”

"এটা তোমার পোশাক নয়।"

Okay, in this picture there’s an animal; a dog…and it has a ball.

ঠিক আছে, এই ছবিতে একটি প্রাণী আছে; একটি কুকুর...এবং এর একটি বল আছে।

I have to say, “This is its ball.”

আমাকে বলতে হবে, "এটি তার বল।"

“This is its ball.”

"এটি তার বল।"

“This isn’t my ball.”

"এটা আমার বল নয়।"

and “This isn’t your ball.”

এবং "এটি আপনার বল নয়।"

Now, in this picture, we have two people.

এখন, এই ছবিতে, আমরা দুজন মানুষ।

Okay, and they both own this house.

ঠিক আছে, এবং তারা দুজনেই এই বাড়ির মালিক।

So, “This is their house.”

সুতরাং, "এটি তাদের বাড়ি।"

“This is their house.”

"এটা তাদের বাড়ি।"

Okay, now a little bit farther away, we have three books.

ঠিক আছে, এখন একটু দূরে, আমাদের তিনটি বই আছে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And this boy and girl have the books here.

এবং এই ছেলে মেয়ে এখানে বই আছে.

So, we have to say “those”.

সুতরাং, আমাদের বলতে হবে "সেগুলি"।

And because we have more than one,

এবং আমাদের একাধিক আছে বলে

we have to use ‘are’.

আমাদের 'are' ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Those are their books.”

"এগুলি তাদের বই।"

“Those are their books.”

“Those aren’t my books.”

"এগুলি তাদের বই।"

"এগুলো আমার বই নয়।"

“Those aren’t your books.”

"এগুলি আপনার বই নয়।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And the last one.

এবং সর্বশেষটি.

Here’s the county Korea.

এখানে কাউন্টি কোরিয়া।

Okay, we all live here.

ঠিক আছে, আমরা সবাই এখানে থাকি।

So we say, “This is our country.”

তাই আমরা বলি, "এটা আমাদের দেশ।"

“This is our country.”

"এটা আমাদের দেশ।"

Okay, let’s move on to the next  part for some more practice.

ঠিক আছে, আরও কিছু অনুশীলনের জন্য পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Here are some practice sentences.

এখানে কিছু অনুশীলন বাক্য আছে।

We’re going to put possessive  adjectives on these lines.

আমরা এই লাইনে অধিকারী বিশেষণ বসাতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s try together.

তাই, একসাথে চেষ্টা করা যাক.

“I put candy in ____ mouth.”

"আমি ____ মুখে মিছরি রেখেছি।"

Okay, this is a mouth.

ঠিক আছে, এটা একটা মুখ।

“I put candy in ……”

"আমি মিছরি রেখেছি ......"

What should we put?

আমাদের কী রাখা উচিত?

“my mouth.”

"আমার মুখ."

Okay, next.

ঠিক আছে, পরবর্তী.

“John.”

"জন।"

John is one man or boy.

জন একজন মানুষ বা ছেলে।

“John lost ____ bag.”

"জন ____ ব্যাগ হারিয়েছে।"

Okay, for one man or boy, we say, “his”.

ঠিক আছে, একজন পুরুষ বা ছেলের জন্য, আমরা বলি, "তার"।

“John lost his bag.”

"জন তার ব্যাগ হারিয়েছে।"

Okay, “The parents…”

ঠিক আছে, "বাবা-মা..."

That’s more than one person. That’s two people.

এটি একাধিক ব্যক্তি। ওটা দুই জন।

So, “The parents love ____ baby.”

তাই, "বাবা-মা ____ বাচ্চাকে ভালোবাসে।"

We have to put…

আমাদের রাখতে হবে...

“their”.

"তাদের"।

“The parents love their baby.”

"বাবা-মা তাদের সন্তানকে ভালোবাসে।"

Okay. And here, “The dog…”

ঠিক আছে. এবং এখানে, "কুকুর..."

Okay, ‘the dog’ is an animal.

ঠিক আছে, 'কুকুর' একটি প্রাণী।

So, “The dog eats ____ food.”

সুতরাং, "কুকুরটি ____ খাবার খায়।"

What do we put?

আমরা কি রাখব?

We have to say, “its”.

আমাদের বলতে হবে, "তার"।

“The dog eats its food.”

"কুকুর তার খাবার খায়।"

Okay, let’s look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে, আসুন আরও কিছু উদাহরণ দেখি।

Let’s continue.

চল অবিরত রাখি.

“_____ names are Paul and Sam.”

"_____ নাম পল এবং স্যাম।"

Okay, we have two people, Paul, and Sam.

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের দুজন লোক আছে, পল এবং স্যাম।

And the plural names.

এবং বহুবচন নাম.

So we have to say, “Their”.

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, “তাদের”।

“Their names are Paul and Sam.”

"তাদের নাম পল এবং স্যাম।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Can I use ____ phone?”

"আমি কি ____ ফোন ব্যবহার করতে পারি?"

Okay, I’m asking you.

ঠিক আছে, আমি আপনাকে জিজ্ঞাসা করছি.

So I have to say, “Can I use… your phone?”

তাই আমাকে বলতে হবে, "আমি কি আপনার ফোন ব্যবহার করতে পারি?"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And the next one. “_____ make-up looks good.”

এবং পরেরটি। "_____ মেক আপ ভাল দেখায়।"

Whose make-up? Well, usually  girls or women wear make-up.

কার মেক আপ? ভাল, সাধারণত মেয়েরা বা মহিলারা মেক আপ পরেন।

So, I’m going to say,

তাই, আমি বলতে যাচ্ছি,

“Her make-up looks good.”

"তার মেক আপ ভাল দেখাচ্ছে।"

Okay, and…

ঠিক আছে, এবং...

“_____ videos are helpful to you.”

"_____ ভিডিওগুলি আপনার জন্য সহায়ক।"

Okay, these are the videos that we make. Right?

ঠিক আছে, এই ভিডিওগুলো আমরা তৈরি করি। ঠিক?

We teach English in these videos.

আমরা এই ভিডিওগুলিতে ইংরেজি শেখাই।

So, the answer is “our”.

সুতরাং, উত্তর হল "আমাদের"।

“Our videos are helpful to you.”

"আমাদের ভিডিওগুলি আপনার জন্য সহায়ক।"

Or we sure hope they are.

অথবা আমরা নিশ্চিত তারা আশা করি.

Okay, so in this video, we learned  how to use possessive adjectives.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা শিখেছি কিভাবে অধিকারী বিশেষণ ব্যবহার করতে হয়।

Don’t forget you have to  put a noun after each one.

ভুলে যাবেন না যে আপনাকে প্রতিটির পরে একটি বিশেষ্য রাখতে হবে।

I hope you understand, and I hope to see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন, এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে আশা করি।

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody and welcome.

হাই, সবাই এবং স্বাগতম.

In this video, we’re going to learn about possessive pronouns.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা অধিকারী সর্বনাম সম্পর্কে শিখতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

And we use possessive pronouns to show that something belongs to us

ঠিক আছে. এবং কিছু আমাদের মালিকানাধীন বা কিছু আমাদের মালিকানাধীন

or something is owned by us.

তা দেখানোর জন্য আমরা অধিকারী সর্বনাম ব্যবহার

Okay, or someone else.

করি। ঠিক আছে, বা অন্য কেউ।

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Now, last time we learned  about subjective pronouns.

এখন, গতবার আমরা বিষয়গত সর্বনাম সম্পর্কে শিখেছি।

And here they are.

এবং এখানে তারা.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And in another video, we talked  about possessive adjectives.

এবং অন্য ভিডিওতে, আমরা অধিকারী বিশেষণ সম্পর্কে কথা বলেছি।

And here they are.

এবং এখানে তারা.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And over here are the possessive pronouns that we’re going to talk about in this video.

এবং এখানে অধিকারী সর্বনাম রয়েছে যা আমরা এই ভিডিওতে কথা বলতে যাচ্ছি।

Now, possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns are the same.

এখন, possessive adjectives এবং possessive pronouns একই।

They show possession.

তারা দখল দেখায়।

Which means, I own something.

যার অর্থ, আমি কিছুর মালিক।

Something belongs to me…or to someone else.

কিছু আমার…বা অন্য কারো।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The only difference is that they’re used a little differently.

শুধুমাত্র পার্থক্য হল যে তারা একটু ভিন্নভাবে ব্যবহার করা হয়।

For possessive adjectives, you have to put a noun after.

অধিকারী বিশেষণের জন্য, আপনাকে পরে একটি বিশেষ্য রাখতে হবে।

Okay.

“My dog.”

ঠিক আছে.

"আমার কুকুর."

Okay.

But for possessive pronouns, you don’t have to put a noun after it.

ঠিক আছে.

কিন্তু অধিকারী সর্বনামের জন্য, আপনাকে এটির পরে একটি বিশেষ্য রাখতে হবে না।

Okay, you can just say “mine”.

ঠিক আছে, আপনি শুধু "আমার" বলতে পারেন।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So let’s go through each one.

সুতরাং এর প্রতিটি মাধ্যমে যেতে দিন.

“My"

"আমার"

"Mine”

"আমার"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে।

And this is the same.

এবং এই একই.

“His"

"তার"

"His”

"তার"

Okay.

For ‘her’, we say “hers”.

ঠিক আছে।

'তার' জন্য, আমরা বলি "তার"।

We add an ‘s’.

আমরা একটি 's' যোগ করি।

“Hers”

"তার"

“Its"

"তার"

"Its”

"তার"

Again, it’s the same.

আবার, এটা একই।

“Your"

"আপনার"

"Yours”

"তোমার"

We have to put an ‘s’.

আমাদের একটি 's' লাগাতে হবে।

“Yours”

"আপনার"

“Our"

"আমাদের"

"Ours” and “Their"

"আমাদের" এবং "তাদের"

"Theirs”

"তাদের"

Okay, again, I know that this can be really confusing, but let’s practice some more.

ঠিক আছে, আবার, আমি জানি যে এটি সত্যিই বিভ্রান্তিকর হতে পারে, তবে আসুন আরও কিছু অনুশীলন করি।

Okay.

And let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে.

এবং এর পরের অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, let’s practice together.

ঠিক আছে, আসুন একসাথে অনুশীলন করি।

Now, “This is my marker.”

এখন, "এটি আমার মার্কার।"

But with possessive pronouns, you do not have to put a noun after.

কিন্তু অধিকারী সর্বনামের সাথে, আপনাকে পরে একটি বিশেষ্য লাগাতে হবে না।

Okay, so I can say, “This is mine.”

ঠিক আছে, তাই আমি বলতে পারি, "এটি আমার।"

“This isn’t yours.”

"এটা তোমার নয়।"

“This is mine.”

"এটা আমার."

Okay, let’s look at the board.

ঠিক আছে, এর বোর্ড তাকান.

This boy has a hat.

এই ছেলের একটা টুপি আছে।

So we say, “This is his.”

তাই আমরা বলি, "এটি তার।"

“This isn’t mine.”

"এটা আমার নয়।"

“This isn’t yours.”

"এটা তোমার নয়।"

“This is his.”

"এটা তার."

The girl has a dress.

মেয়েটার একটা জামা আছে।

“This is hers.”

"এটি তার।"

“This isn’t mine.”

“This isn’t yours.”

"এটা আমার নয়।"

"এটা তোমার নয়।"

“This is hers.”

"এটি তার।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now with ‘its’, it’s kind of different.

এখন 'তার' সঙ্গে, এটা ভিন্ন ধরনের.

Okay.

You still have to put a noun,

ঠিক আছে.

আপনাকে এখনও একটি বিশেষ্য রাখতে হবে,

so you can’t say, “This is its.”

তাই আপনি বলতে পারবেন না, "এটি এটি।"

You have to say, “This is its ball.”

আপনাকে বলতে হবে, "এটি তার বল।"

Again, “This is its ball.”

আবার, "এটি তার বল।"

“This isn’t mine.”

“This isn’t yours.”

"এটা আমার নয়।"

"এটা তোমার নয়।"

“This is its ball.”

"এটি তার বল।"

Okay.

Now we have two people who have a house.

ঠিক আছে.

এখন আমাদের দুজনের বাড়ি আছে।

“This is theirs.”

"এটা তাদের।"

“This isn’t mine.”

“This isn’t yours.”

"এটা আমার নয়।"

"এটা তোমার নয়।"

“This is theirs.”

"এটা তাদের।"

Okay.

Now over here, we have some books and we’re going to say that they belong to these two people.

ঠিক আছে.

এখন এখানে, আমাদের কিছু বই আছে এবং আমরা বলতে যাচ্ছি যে সেগুলি এই দুই ব্যক্তির অন্তর্গত।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So we’re going to use the plural ‘be’ verb; ‘are’.

তাই আমরা বহুবচন 'হতে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করতে যাচ্ছি; 'হয়'।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“These are theirs.”

"এগুলো তাদের।"

“These aren’t mine.”

"এগুলো আমার নয়।"

“These aren’t yours.”

"এগুলো তোমার নয়।"

“These are theirs.”

"এগুলো তাদের।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And last, we have a picture of Korea.

এবং শেষ, আমরা কোরিয়া একটি ছবি আছে.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“This is ours.”

"এটা আমাদের।"

“This is ours.”

"এটা আমাদের।"

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, let’s look at these examples.

ঠিক আছে, আসুন এই উদাহরণ তাকান.

We have to put in some possessive pronouns.

আমাদের কিছু possessive pronoun বসাতে হবে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“That lipstick is _____.”

"সেই লিপস্টিকটি হল _____।"

Okay, well we have the noun ‘lipstick’ and usually a girl or woman wears lipstick,

ঠিক আছে, আমাদের বিশেষ্য 'লিপস্টিক' আছে এবং সাধারণত একটি মেয়ে বা মহিলা লিপস্টিক পরে,

so we’re going to use the possessive pronoun ‘hers’.

তাই আমরা 'তার' অধিকারী সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“That lipstick is hers.”

"ওই লিপস্টিক তার।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The next sentence.

পরের বাক্য।

“That sports car is _____.”

"সেই স্পোর্টস কারটি হল _____।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Again, usually a man will drive a sports car.

আবার, সাধারণত একজন মানুষ স্পোর্টস কার চালাবেন।

So, we can say, “That sports car is his.”

সুতরাং, আমরা বলতে পারি, "সেই স্পোর্টস কারটি তার।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, let’s look at these last two.

এখন, এই শেষ দুটি তাকান.

“This money is mine, not yours.”

"এই টাকা আমার, তোমার নয়।"

“This money is mine; it belongs to me.”

“এই টাকা আমার; এটা আমার."

“It doesn’t belong to you.”

"এটা তোমার নয়।"

Not yours.

তোমার না.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And the last one.

এবং সর্বশেষটি.

“Dokdo is ours.”

"ডোকডো আমাদের।"

It’s Koreas.

এটা কোরিয়া।

Right…

ঠিক...

“Not theirs.”

"তাদের নয়।"

Not Japan’s.

জাপানের নয়।

“It belongs to us.”

"এটি আমাদের অন্তর্গত।"

So we say, “It’s ours.”

তাই আমরা বলি, "এটা আমাদের।"

Okay, so in this video, we  learned possessive pronouns.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা অধিকারী সর্বনাম শিখেছি।

I hope you understand, and I’ll see you in the next video.

আমি আশা করি আপনি বুঝতে পেরেছেন, এবং আমি আপনাকে পরবর্তী ভিডিওতে দেখতে পাব।

Bye.

বিদায়।

This is a checkup for ‘this’,  ‘that’, ‘these’, ‘those’,

এটি 'এই', 'সেই', 'এইস', 'সেই',

possessive adjectives, and possessive pronouns.

অধিকারী বিশেষণ এবং অধিকারী সর্বনামের জন্য একটি চেকআপ।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now here, I want you to focus on ‘this’, ‘that’, ‘these’, and ‘those’.

এখন এখানে, আমি চাই আপনি 'এই', 'সেটা', 'এই', এবং 'ওসব'-এ ফোকাস করুন।

Okay, so here’s the first example.

ঠিক আছে, তাই এখানে প্রথম উদাহরণ.

We have a dog.

আমাদের একটা কুকুর আছে।

One dog.

একটি কুকুর.

So we have to use ‘this’ or ‘that’.

তাই আমাদের 'এই' বা 'ওটা' ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

If it’s close, I say, “This is a dog.”

যদি এটি কাছাকাছি হয়, আমি বলি, "এটি একটি কুকুর।"

If it’s far away, I say, “That is a dog.”

যদি এটি দূরে থাকে, আমি বলি, "ওটি একটি কুকুর।"

So, I’m going to write ‘this’.

তাই, আমি 'এই' লিখতে যাচ্ছি।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The next one says, “…are balloons.”

পরেরটি বলে, "...এটি বেলুন।"

“…are balloons.” With an ‘s’.

"...বেলুন।" একটি 's' দিয়ে।

There’s more than one.

একাধিক আছে.

So can we use ‘this’ or ‘that’?

তাই আমরা কি 'এই' বা 'ওটা' ব্যবহার করতে পারি?

No.

না।

We have to use ‘these’ or ‘those’.

আমাদের 'এই' বা 'ওসব' ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

So, if it’s close, I say “These are balloons.”

সুতরাং, যদি এটি কাছাকাছি হয়, আমি বলি "এগুলি বেলুন।"

If they are far, “Those are balloons.”

যদি তারা দূরে থাকে, "এগুলি বেলুন।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So let’s write ‘those’.

তো চলুন 'সেই' লিখি।

“Those are balloons.”

"এগুলো বেলুন।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now when we ask the question,

এখন আমরা যখন প্রশ্ন করি,

“Are these pens?”

"এগুলো কি কলম?"

we have more than one.

আমরা একাধিক আছে.

“These pens.” With an ‘s’.

"এই কলমগুলি।" একটি 's' দিয়ে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

I can put two answers here.

আমি এখানে দুটি উত্তর দিতে পারি।

“No, ___ aren’t.”

"না, ___ না।"

I can say “No, these aren’t.”

আমি বলতে পারি "না, এগুলো নয়।"

Or… I can say “No, they..."  more than one "... they aren’t.”

অথবা... আমি বলতে পারি "না, তারা..." একাধিক "... তারা নয়।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The next one. “These ____ eyes.”

পরের এক. "এই চোখ গুলি."

We need a ‘be’ verb.

আমাদের একটি 'হওয়া' ক্রিয়া দরকার।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

There’s more than one, right.

একাধিক আছে, ডান.

There are two eyes.

দুটি চোখ আছে।

So, “These are eyes.”

সুতরাং, "এগুলি চোখ।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And here “…is a nose.”

এবং এখানে "... একটি নাক।"

One.

এক.

A nose.

And it’s close.

একটি নাক.

এবং এটা কাছাকাছি.

So, I have to say, “This is a nose.”

সুতরাং, আমাকে বলতে হবে, "এটি একটি নাক।"

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

We’re going to do some more checkup.

আমরা আরো কিছু চেকআপ করতে যাচ্ছি.

Now here, I want you to focus on possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns.

এখন এখানে, আমি চাই আপনি অধিকারী বিশেষণ এবং অধিকারী সর্বনামের উপর ফোকাস করুন।

Let’s look at the first example.

এর প্রথম উদাহরণ তাকান.

“These are my pen.”

"এগুলো আমার কলম।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We have ‘these…are’.

আমাদের আছে 'এগুলো...আর'।

This means we need more than one.

এর মানে আমাদের একাধিক প্রয়োজন।

Right…

ডান…

More than one pen.

একাধিক কলম।

So, we have to put ‘s’.

সুতরাং, আমাদের 's' লাগাতে হবে।

“These are my pens.”

"এগুলো আমার কলম।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s look at these two together.

আসুন একসাথে এই দুটি তাকান.

“Those aren’t her children.”

"এরা তার সন্তান নয়।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So we can also say, “Those aren’t ____.”

তাই আমরা এটাও বলতে পারি, "এগুলো ____ নয়।"

What do we put?

আমরা কি রাখব?

“… her children.”

"… তার সন্তান."

We can always say, “Those aren’t hers.”

আমরা সবসময় বলতে পারি, "এগুলো তার নয়।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We don’t need a noun here.

আমরা এখানে একটি বিশেষ্য প্রয়োজন নেই.

We do need a noun over here, though.

আমরা এখানে একটি বিশেষ্য প্রয়োজন, যদিও.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Then, “Is it yours?”

তারপর, "এটা কি তোমার?"

“Is it yours?”

"এটা তোমার?"

“Yes, it’s _____.”

"হ্যা, এটাই _____."

There’s no noun.

কোন বিশেষ্য নেই.

We have to say…

আমাদের বলতে হবে...

“mine”.

"আমার"।

“Is it yours?”

"এটা তোমার?"

“Yes, it’s mine.”

“Yes, it's mine.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And the last two…

And the last two…

” _____ these his shoes?”

” _____ these his shoes?”

We need a ‘be’ verb here.

We need a 'be' verb here.

” _____ these his shoes?”

” _____ these his shoes?”

We have ‘these’, and we have ‘shoes’ with an ‘s’.

We have 'these', and we have 'shoes' with an 's'.

So we need the plural ‘be’ verb.

So we need the plural 'be' verb.

“Are”. “Are these his shoes?”

“Are”. “Are these his shoes?”

Okay.

And the answer. “No, they…”

ঠিক আছে.

And the answer. “No, they…”

Plural.

Plural.

“…are.”

“…are.”

We have ‘no’. “No, they aren’t”

We have 'no'. “No, they aren't”

Okay.

Okay.

“Are not, aren’t”.

“Are not, aren't”.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s move on to the next part.

Let's move on to the next part.

For this last part, we’re going to look at these sentences.

For this last part, we're going to look at these sentences.

But they’re all wrong.

But they're all wrong.

They all have mistakes.

They all have mistakes.

So you have to find the mistakes for me.

So you have to find the mistakes for me.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, the first one says, “That are chairs.”

So, the first one says, “That are chairs.”

Hmmmm, we know that’s wrong.

Hmmmm, we know that's wrong.

‘That’ is used for singular nouns.

'That' is used for singular nouns.

One.

এক.

But it says “are” and it says “chairs” with an ‘s’.

But it says “are” and it says “chairs” with an 's'.

So, we have to change this word.

So, we have to change this word.

We can say, “These are chairs.”

We can say, “These are chairs.”

or “Those are chairs.”

or “Those are chairs.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“This book is my.”

“This book is my.”

Hmm.

Hmm.

We have the possessive pronoun ‘my’.

We have the possessive pronoun 'my'.

But remember, you have to have a noun after,

But remember, you have to have a noun after,

but there’s no noun.

but there's no noun.

So, we can change this to the  possessive adjective ‘mine’.

So, we can change this to the possessive adjective 'mine'.

Okay.

You don’t need a noun if you say ‘mine’.

ঠিক আছে.

You don't need a noun if you say 'mine'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“That is he house.”

“That is he house.”

Hmm.

Hmm.

We want to show that this house belongs to this man or boy.

We want to show that this house belongs to this man or boy.

“That is he house.”

“That is he house.”

But this word ‘he’, does not show possession.

But this word 'he', does not show possession.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, we say, “This is his house.”

So, we say, “This is his house.”

‘His’, then the noun ‘house’.

'His', then the noun 'house'.

Similarly, for the next one.

Similarly, for the next one.

“She name is Jenny.”

“She name is Jenny.”

We want to show that this name belongs to Jenny.

We want to show that this name belongs to Jenny.

So, we say…

So, we say…

“her”.

“her”.

“Her name is Jenny.”

“Her name is Jenny.”

Okay, and the last one is also similar.

Okay, and the last one is also similar.

“It’s ours house.”

“It's ours house.”

Now, if we don’t have ‘house’, “It’s ours.”

Now, if we don't have 'house', “It's ours.”

We can say that.

We can say that.

But since we have a noun, …

But since we have a noun, …

we use the possessive pronoun,

we use the possessive pronoun,

“It’s ‘our’ house.”

“It's 'our' house.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

That was the checkup for possessive  pronouns, possessive adjectives,

That was the checkup for possessive pronouns, possessive adjectives,

‘this’, ‘that’, ‘these’, and ‘those’.

'this', 'that', 'these', and 'those'.

I hope you understood, and I’ll see you in the next video.

I hope you understood, and I'll see you in the next video.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to talk about the articles; ‘a’, ‘an’ and ‘the’.

In this video, we're going to talk about the articles; 'a', 'an' and 'the'.

Now this can be very confusing, so please make sure you pay careful attention.

Now this can be very confusing, so please make sure you pay careful attention.

We use articles in front of nouns.

We use articles in front of nouns.

Okay, so remember that and  let’s look at the board.

Okay, so remember that and let's look at the board.

First, we use ‘a’ or ‘an’ when we’re talking about any one thing.

First, we use 'a' or 'an' when we're talking about any one thing.

For example, let’s say I  say, “A banana is delicious.”

For example, let's say I say, “A banana is delicious.”

Okay, that means all bananas.

Okay, that means all bananas.

Any banana is delicious.

Any banana is delicious.

“A banana is delicious.”

“A banana is delicious.”

Okay, let’s jump over here.

Okay, let's jump over here.

If I’m talking about a specific banana…

If I'm talking about a specific banana…

maybe I have a banana in my hand.

maybe I have a banana in my hand.

It’s specific, not any banana, this one.

It's specific, not any banana, this one.

I have to use ‘the’,

I have to use 'the',

“The banana is old.”

“The banana is old.”

Okay. This one.

ঠিক আছে. এইটা.

I can’t say, “A banana is old.”

I can't say, “A banana is old.”

Then that means all bananas are old.

Then that means all bananas are old.

And that’s not true. Just this one.

And that's not true. Just this one.

So, I say, “The banana is old.”

So, I say, “The banana is old.”

Okay, let’s move over here.

Okay, let's move over here.

We also use ‘a’ or ‘an’ when we’re talking about something for the first time.

We also use 'a' or 'an' when we're talking about something for the first time.

So, I have another example here.

So, I have another example here.

“I watched a movie.”

“I watched a movie.”

Okay.

I’m talking about this movie for the first time, so I have to use “…a movie”.

ঠিক আছে.

I'm talking about this movie for the first time, so I have to use “…a movie”.

But, if I want to talk about this movie again,

But, if I want to talk about this movie again,

for the second time, or the  third time or fourth, fifth…

for the second time, or the third time or fourth, fifth…

it doesn’t matter.

it doesn't matter.

I have to use ‘the’.

I have to use 'the'.

“The movie was fun.”

“The movie was fun.”

I’m talking about this one. The specific.

I'm talking about this one. The specific.

“The movie was fun.”

“The movie was fun.”

I can’t say, “A movie was fun.”

I can't say, “A movie was fun.”

That means all movies are fun.

That means all movies are fun.

That’s not true.

এটা সত্যি না.

“The movie was fun.”

“The movie was fun.”

Okay, and I also use ‘the’

Okay, and I also use 'the'

when I’m talking about a noun  where there’s only one and only.

when I'm talking about a noun where there's only one and only.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

For example, there’s only one sun.

For example, there's only one sun.

Okay, when I look at the  sky, there’s only one sun.

Okay, when I look at the sky, there's only one sun.

So, I say, “The sun.”

So, I say, “The sun.”

“The sun is hot.”

“The sun is hot.”

I cannot say, “A sun.”

I cannot say, “A sun.”

That’s wrong.

That's wrong.

When there’s one and only, we say, “The sun.”

When there's one and only, we say, “The sun.”

Okay.

Let’s look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে.

Let's look at some more examples.

The first example says, “A lion is dangerous.”

The first example says, “A lion is dangerous.”

I have to use ‘a’ because I’m  talking about any one lion.

I have to use 'a' because I'm talking about any one lion.

Any lion is dangerous.

Any lion is dangerous.

All lions are dangerous.

All lions are dangerous.

So, I use ‘a’.

So, I use 'a'.

The next sentence says, “It’s a dog.”

The next sentence says, “It's a dog.”

I’m talking about this dog for the first time, so I use ‘a’.

I'm talking about this dog for the first time, so I use 'a'.

Now, I’m talking about this  dog for the second time.

Now, I'm talking about this dog for the second time.

So, I say, “The dog is cute.”

So, I say, “The dog is cute.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Here’s a similar example.

Here's a similar example.

“It’s an ant.”

“It's an ant.”

Well, I used ‘an’ because we have ‘ant’, which start with a vowel.

Well, I used 'an' because we have 'ant', which start with a vowel.

And I’m talking about this ant for the first time.

And I'm talking about this ant for the first time.

“It’s an ant.”

“It's an ant.”

Now, I’m talking about this ant again.

Now, I'm talking about this ant again.

“The ant is small.”

“The ant is small.”

“The ant…”, this one, “…is small.”

“The ant…”, this one, “…is small.”

Okay, and the last one.

Okay, and the last one.

“It’s the moon.”

“It's the moon.”

I have to say, “the moon”  because there’s only one moon.

I have to say, “the moon” because there's only one moon.

I cannot say, “a moon”.

I cannot say, “a moon”.

“It’s the moon.

“It's the moon.

The moon…”, only one, “…is round.”

The moon…”, only one, “…is round.”

Okay.

Let’s look at some more examples.

ঠিক আছে.

Let's look at some more examples.

Okay, we have some more examples,

Okay, we have some more examples,

but this time I want you to think about  whether we should put ‘a’, ‘an’ or ‘the’.

but this time I want you to think about whether we should put 'a', 'an' or 'the'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, “I see ____ desk and ___ chair.”

So, “I see ____ desk and ___ chair.”

We don’t know which desk and chair.

We don't know which desk and chair.

And it’s the first time I’m talking about them.

And it's the first time I'm talking about them.

So, we have to put ‘a’.

So, we have to put 'a'.

“I see a desk and a chair.”

“I see a desk and a chair.”

The next one.

The next one.

“I see ____ octopus.”

“I see ____ octopus.”

Okay, this is the same.

Okay, this is the same.

It’s the first time I’m  talking about this octopus.

It's the first time I'm talking about this octopus.

So, do I put ‘a’ or ‘an’?

So, do I put 'a' or 'an'?

Well here we have the vowel ‘o’.

Well here we have the vowel 'o'.

So we have to put “‘an’ octopus”.

So we have to put “'an' octopus”.

“I see an octopus.”

“I see an octopus.”

Okay, the next one.

ঠিক আছে, পরেরটা।

“It’s ___ pen.”

“It's ___ pen.”

Okay, it’s the same.

Okay, it's the same.

It’s the first time, so I say, “a pen”.

It's the first time, so I say, “a pen”.

Now, I’m talking about the  pen for the second time.

Now, I'm talking about the pen for the second time.

So I say, “The pen is red.”

So I say, “The pen is red.”

Okay, I’m talking about this one.

Okay, I'm talking about this one.

So I say, “the”.

So I say, “the”.

Okay, similarly…

Okay, similarly…

“She is ____ girl.”

“She is ____ girl.”

What do I say?

What do I say?

“a girl.”

“a girl.”

We’re talking about her for the first time.

We're talking about her for the first time.

Okay.

And now we’re talking about this girl again, for the second time.

ঠিক আছে.

And now we're talking about this girl again, for the second time.

So, I have to say, “The girl is pretty.”

So, I have to say, “The girl is pretty.”

And the last example.

And the last example.

“I can see ___ sky.”

“I can see ___ sky.”

Now, we only have one sky.

Now, we only have one sky.

Right…

So, if there’s only one and only, we have to put the article ‘the’.

Right…

So, if there's only one and only, we have to put the article 'the'.

“I can see the sky.”

“I can see the sky.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So in this video, we talked about the articles ‘a’, ‘an’ and ‘the’.

So in this video, we talked about the articles 'a', 'an' and 'the'.

I hope you understand, and  I’ll see you in the next video.

I hope you understand, and I'll see you in the next video.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to talk about the prepositions: in, on and under.

In this video, we're going to talk about the prepositions: in, on and under.

Now, we use prepositions to  show ‘where’ something is.

Now, we use prepositions to show 'where' something is.

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Okay, now in this picture, we have a cat.

Okay, now in this picture, we have a cat.

Okay, and we’re talking about this specific cat, so we have to say, “the cat”.

Okay, and we're talking about this specific cat, so we have to say, “the cat”.

Okay. “…is in the box.”

ঠিক আছে. “…is in the box.”

Okay.

The preposition is ‘in’.

ঠিক আছে.

The preposition is 'in'.

“He’s ‘in’ the box.” “…’in’ the box.”

“He's 'in' the box.” “…'in' the box.”

Okay.

And the next one.

ঠিক আছে.

And the next one.

“The cat is on…”

“The cat is on…”

The preposition ‘on’… “the chair”.

The preposition 'on'… “the chair”.

“He’s on the chair.”

“He's on the chair.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And the next one.

And the next one.

“The cat is ‘under’…

“The cat is 'under'…

’under’ the table.”

'under' the table.”

“…’under’ the table.”

“…'under' the table.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s look at the next one.

Let's look at the next one.

Now we have plural nouns.

Now we have plural nouns.

“The apples ‘are’…”

“The apples 'are'…”

Okay. “…in the box.”

Okay. “…in the box.”

Again, the apples are “…’in’ the box.”

Again, the apples are “…'in' the box.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Next, “The apples are ‘on’ the chair.”

Next, “The apples are 'on' the chair.”

And last.

এবং শেষে.

“The apples are ‘under’….’under’ the table.”

“The apples are 'under'….'under' the table.”

Okay, let’s look at some more examples.

Okay, let's look at some more examples.

Okay, let’s look at some pictures to help us understand the prepositions:

Okay, let's look at some pictures to help us understand the prepositions:

in, on, and under.

in, on, and under.

I’m going to ask you some questions.

I'm going to ask you some questions.

I want you to think about  which one you should use.

I want you to think about which one you should use.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Where is the dog?”

“Where is the dog?”

“Where is the dog?”

“Where is the dog?”

“The dog is ‘in’ the doghouse.

“The dog is 'in' the doghouse.

You should use the preposition ‘in’.

You should use the preposition 'in'.

“The dog is ‘in’ the doghouse.

“The dog is 'in' the doghouse.

“Where is the man?”

“Where is the man?”

“Where is the man?”

“Where is the man?”

“The man is ‘under’ the umbrella.”

“The man is 'under' the umbrella.”

“The man is ‘under’ the umbrella.”

“The man is 'under' the umbrella.”

And last.

এবং শেষে.

“Where are the girls?”

“Where are the girls?”

“Where are the girls?”

“Where are the girls?”

“The girls are ‘on’ the bridge.”

“The girls are 'on' the bridge.”

“The girls are ‘on’ the bridge.”

“The girls are 'on' the bridge.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s look at some more examples.

Let's look at some more examples.

Now, we’re going to practice asking and answering questions using: in, on and under.

Now, we're going to practice asking and answering questions using: in, on and under.

First, let’s take a look at this picture.

First, let's take a look at this picture.

Here we have a rabbit, a chair  and one, two, three snakes.

Here we have a rabbit, a chair and one, two, three snakes.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, I will ask a question using in, on or under.

So, I will ask a question using in, on or under.

I want you to think.

I want you to think.

Is the answer, “Yes, it is.”

Is the answer, “Yes, it is.”

or “No, it isn’t.”

or “No, it isn't.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s start with the rabbit.

Let's start with the rabbit.

“Is the rabbit under the chair?”

“Is the rabbit under the chair?”

“No, it isn’t.”

“No, it isn't.”

“Is the rabbit in the chair?”

“Is the rabbit in the chair?”

“No, it isn’t.”

“No, it isn't.”

“Is the rabbit on the chair?” “…on the chair?”

“Is the rabbit on the chair?” “…on the chair?”

“Yes, it is.”

“Yes, it is.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, we’re going to move on to the snakes.

Now, we're going to move on to the snakes.

Now, there are…there are more than one, right, so it’s plural, so we say,

Now, there are…there are more than one, right, so it's plural, so we say,

“Are the snakes…” with an ‘s’.

“Are the snakes…” with an 's'.

Okay.

So again, think.

ঠিক আছে.

So again, think.

Is the answer, “Yes, they are.”

Is the answer, “Yes, they are.”

or “No, they aren’t.”

or “No, they aren't.”

“Are the snakes in the chair?”

“Are the snakes in the chair?”

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

“Are the snakes on the chair?”

“Are the snakes on the chair?”

“No, they aren’t.”

"না, তারা নয়।"

“Are the snakes under the chair?”

“Are the snakes under the chair?”

“Yes, they are.”

"হ্যা তারা."

Okay, how did you do?

Okay, how did you do?

I hope you guys understand how to use the 

I hope you guys understand how to use the

prepositions; in, on and under  after watching this video.

prepositions; in, on and under after watching this video.

Thanks for joining and I’ll see you next time.

Thanks for joining and I'll see you next time.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going  to talk about adjectives.

In this video, we're going to talk about adjectives.

Now, we use adjectives to  describe nouns or things.

Now, we use adjectives to describe nouns or things.

Okay, we can describe its size, its color, its shape or other things like that.

Okay, we can describe its size, its color, its shape or other things like that.

Okay.

So let’s take a look at the board.

ঠিক আছে.

তো চলুন বোর্ড দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first noun we’re going to use is ‘marker’.

The first noun we're going to use is 'marker'.

“It’s a marker.”

“It's a marker.”

Now, I want to use an adjective  to describe the color.

Now, I want to use an adjective to describe the color.

I'm going to say, “It’s a ‘black’ marker.”

I'm going to say, “It's a 'black' marker.”

‘Black’ is the adjective.

'Black' is the adjective.

Now notice, I have to put the adjective after the article ‘a’, but before the noun ‘marker’.

Now notice, I have to put the adjective after the article 'a', but before the noun 'marker'.

“It’s a black marker.”

“It's a black marker.”

Now, I can use another  adjective to describe its size.

Now, I can use another adjective to describe its size.

“It’s a long marker.”

“It's a long marker.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s try the next one.

এর পরেরটি চেষ্টা করা যাক।

Here we have a bird.

Here we have a bird.

So, “It’s a bird.”

So, “It's a bird.”

Okay.

I want to use another adjective  to describe the color.

ঠিক আছে.

I want to use another adjective to describe the color.

So, I’m going to say, “It’s a blue bird.”

So, I'm going to say, “It's a blue bird.”

Again, you have to put the adjective after the article, before the noun.

Again, you have to put the adjective after the article, before the noun.

I can also describe its size.

I can also describe its size.

“It’s a small bird.”

“It's a small bird.”

‘Small’ is another adjective.

'Small' is another adjective.

Now, at the last part, we have some apples.

Now, at the last part, we have some apples.

Three apples.

Three apples.

Okay, remember, when we have more than one noun, it’s called a plural noun.

Okay, remember, when we have more than one noun, it's called a plural noun.

So, we have to say, “They’re apples.”, with an ‘s’.

So, we have to say, “They're apples.”, with an 's'.

“They’re apples.”

I want to use the adjective ‘red’ to describe the color of these apples.

“They're apples.”

I want to use the adjective 'red' to describe the color of these apples.

So, I’m going to say, “They’re red apples.”

So, I'm going to say, “They're red apples.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Here, there’s no article.

Here, there's no article.

There’s no ‘a’.

There's no 'a'.

That’s because there’s more than one.

That's because there's more than one.

“They’re red apples.”

“They're red apples.”

So, I just have to put the adjective before the noun that it’s describing.

So, I just have to put the adjective before the noun that it's describing.

“They’re red apples.”

“They're red apples.”

Okay, let’s move on to some more examples.

Okay, let's move on to some more examples.

Okay. Now we’re going to  practice asking and answering 

ঠিক আছে. Now we're going to practice asking and answering

questions using adjectives.

questions using adjectives.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, we have a man here.

So, we have a man here.

I want to ask, “Is he a small man?”

I want to ask, “Is he a small man?”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We have the adjective ‘small’.

We have the adjective 'small'.

Notice, even in a question,

Notice, even in a question,

we have to put the adjective after  the article and before the noun.

we have to put the adjective after the article and before the noun.

“Is he a small man?”

“Is he a small man?”

Well, let’s take a look at this picture.

Well, let's take a look at this picture.

The answer is, “No, he’s a _____ man.”

The answer is, “No, he's a _____ man.”

We need another adjective.

We need another adjective.

He’s not a small man.

He's not a small man.

So, we have to say “No, he’s a…

So, we have to say “No, he's a…

big man.”

big man.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We’re going to use the adjective ‘big’.

We're going to use the adjective 'big'.

Okay, let’s look at the next one.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরেরটি দেখি।

“Is it a _____ table?”

“Is it a _____ table?”

The answer is “Yes, it is.”

The answer is “Yes, it is.”

We need an adjective to describe color, shape or size or something.

We need an adjective to describe color, shape or size or something.

Well, we can’t really describe the color.

Well, we can't really describe the color.

So, I think we should try the shape.

So, I think we should try the shape.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Well, “Is it a….

Well, “Is it a….

round table?”

round table?”

And the answer is “Yes, it is.”

And the answer is “Yes, it is.”

Okay, and last, we have two dresses.

Okay, and last, we have two dresses.

Okay. So that means the noun is plural.

ঠিক আছে. So that means the noun is plural.

In that case, for the  questions, we begin with ‘are’.

In that case, for the questions, we begin with 'are'.

“Are they red dresses?”

“Are they red dresses?”

Okay, the adjective is ‘red’.

Okay, the adjective is 'red'.

But, “Are they red dresses?”

But, “Are they red dresses?”

“No, they’re…

“No, they're…

blue dresses.”

blue dresses.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“No, they’re…blue dresses.”

“No, they're…blue dresses.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, in this video, we learned about adjectives.

So, in this video, we learned about adjectives.

I hope you guys understand.

I hope you guys understand.

And I’ll see you in the next video.

And I'll see you in the next video.

Bye.

বিদায়।

This is a check-up video for articles,  prepositions, and adjectives.

This is a check-up video for articles, prepositions, and adjectives.

I’ve written some sentences on the board.

I've written some sentences on the board.

Let’s try to finish them together.

Let's try to finish them together.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The first sentence says, “It’s __ ___umbrella.”

The first sentence says, “It's __ ___umbrella.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We have the noun.

We have the noun.

We need an article and an  adjective to describe the umbrella.

We need an article and an adjective to describe the umbrella.

Okay.

So here it is.

ঠিক আছে.

So here it is.

Let’s describe the color.

Let's describe the color.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We would say ‘black’.

We would say 'black'.

Remember, the adjective comes before the noun.

Remember, the adjective comes before the noun.

Now we need an article.

Now we need an article.

And the correct article is ‘a’.

And the correct article is 'a'.

“It’s a black umbrella.”

“It's a black umbrella.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Next, “It’s ___ ___ ___.”

Next, “It's ___ ___ ___.”

We have three blanks.

We have three blanks.

Here, we have the noun ‘ant’.

Here, we have the noun 'ant'.

So, we’re going to put that at the end.

So, we're going to put that at the end.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Let’s use the adjective ugly.

Let's use the adjective ugly.

Okay.

Remember, again, the adjective  comes before the noun.

ঠিক আছে.

Remember, again, the adjective comes before the noun.

“…ugly ant.”

“…ugly ant.”

“It’s __ ugly ant.”

“It's __ ugly ant.”

We need an article.

We need an article.

Should we use ‘a’ or ‘an’?

Should we use 'a' or 'an'?

Well, ‘ugly’ starts with the vowel ‘u’, so we have to say ‘an’.

Well, 'ugly' starts with the vowel 'u', so we have to say 'an'.

“It’s an ugly ant.”

“It's an ugly ant.”

Next.

পরবর্তী.

“It’s __ __ __.”

“It's __ __ __.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We have the noun ‘car’.

We have the noun 'car'.

So, we put that at the end.

So, we put that at the end.

Again, let’s use an adjective  that describes the color.

Again, let's use an adjective that describes the color.

Let’s use ‘blue’.

Let's use 'blue'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

What article should we use?

What article should we use?

We have to say “a”.

We have to say “a”.

“It’s a blue car.”

“It's a blue car.”

Okay, and last.

Okay, and last.

“I __ ___ nice girl.”

“I __ ___ nice girl.”

That’s me.

That's me.

We have the noun ‘girl’…and the adjective ‘nice’.

We have the noun 'girl'…and the adjective 'nice'.

So, we need the article.

So, we need the article.

We’re going to say “a”.

We're going to say “a”.

Now, we’re missing one more thing.

Now, we're missing one more thing.

We need the ‘be’ verb ‘am’.

We need the 'be' verb 'am'.

“I am a nice girl.”

“I am a nice girl.”

Okay, let’s move on to the next part.

ঠিক আছে, এর পরবর্তী অংশে যাওয়া যাক।

Okay, let’s continue with the checkup.

Okay, let's continue with the checkup.

Here’s a picture.

Here's a picture.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Look at it carefully.

Look at it carefully.

“What is it?”

“What is it?”

“What is it?”

“What is it?”

“It’s __ banana.”

“It's __ banana.”

We need an article here.

We need an article here.

And it’s the first time I’m talking about this, so we’re going to say “a”.

And it's the first time I'm talking about this, so we're going to say “a”.

“It’s a banana.”

“It's a banana.”

“Where is ___ banana?”

“Where is ___ banana?”

Now, you know, I’m talking about this one.

Now, you know, I'm talking about this one.

It’s specific.

It's specific.

So, I’m going to use the article ‘the’.

So, I'm going to use the article 'the'.

“Where is the banana?”

“Where is the banana?”

Okay. And now, let’s think about the preposition.

ঠিক আছে. And now, let's think about the preposition.

“It’s __ the chair.”

“It's __ the chair.”

We need to use the preposition ‘on’.

We need to use the preposition 'on'.

“It’s on the chair.”

“It's on the chair.”

Okay.

Let’s move on.

ঠিক আছে.

চল এগোই.

“What are they?”

“What are they?”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“They’re ____ oranges.”

“They're ____ oranges.”

Okay.

We have more than one.

ঠিক আছে.

We have more than one.

That’s why we said, “They are…they’re” and “oranges” …with an ‘s’.

That's why we said, “They are…they're” and “oranges” …with an 's'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Can we use ‘the’?

Can we use 'the'?

No, you don’t know what oranges I’m talking about because it’s the first time I said

No, you don't know what oranges I'm talking about because it's the first time I said

anything about them.

anything about them.

Then, can I use ‘a’ or ‘an’?

Then, can I use 'a' or 'an'?

No, ‘a’ or ‘an’ is used for any one thing.

No, 'a' or 'an' is used for any one thing.

So here we do not need any article.

So here we do not need any article.

“They’re oranges.”

“They're oranges.”

“What are they?”

“They’re oranges.”

“What are they?”

“They're oranges.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Where __ __ oranges?”

“Where __ __ oranges?”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, again, you know I’m talking about these specific oranges, so we use ‘the’.

Now, again, you know I'm talking about these specific oranges, so we use 'the'.

“Where __ the oranges?”

“Where __ the oranges?”

Okay, remember, when you ask a question with plural, you need ‘are’.

Okay, remember, when you ask a question with plural, you need 'are'.

“Where are the oranges?”

“Where are the oranges?”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, let’s think about the preposition.

Now, let's think about the preposition.

“They’re ___ the chair.”

“They're ___ the chair.”

Okay.

The preposition we need is ‘under’.

ঠিক আছে.

The preposition we need is 'under'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

They’re not ‘on’, “they’re ‘under’ the chair.”

They're not 'on', “they're 'under' the chair.”

Okay, let’s move on to the last part.

Okay, let's move on to the last part.

Okay, let’s continue with the checkup.

Okay, let's continue with the checkup.

Now, we have two short stories here.

Now, we have two short stories here.

You have to help me find the mistakes.

You have to help me find the mistakes.

The first sentence says, “It’s snake.”

The first sentence says, “It's snake.”

Well, we’re missing an article.

Well, we're missing an article.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And that article is ‘a’.

And that article is 'a'.

“It’s a snake.”

“It's a snake.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“It’s blue a snake.”

“It's blue a snake.”

Can you find the mistake?

আপনি ভুল খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Remember, the adjective ‘blue’ has to go between the article and the noun.

Remember, the adjective 'blue' has to go between the article and the noun.

So, we have to move the article to the front.

So, we have to move the article to the front.

“It’s a blue snake.”

“It's a blue snake.”

That is the correct answer.

That is the correct answer.

“It’s a blue snake.”

“It's a blue snake.”

Okay, the next one.

ঠিক আছে, পরেরটা।

“The snake under the box.”

“The snake under the box.”

It sounds right.

It sounds right.

“The snake under the box.”,

“The snake under the box.”,

but we forgot the ‘be’ verb.

but we forgot the 'be' verb.

“The snake is under the box.”

“The snake is under the box.”

Okay, let’s move on to the next story.

Okay, let's move on to the next story.

“It’s a octopus.”

“It's a octopus.”

Okay, we have an article, but octopus starts with the vowel ‘o’.

Okay, we have an article, but octopus starts with the vowel 'o'.

So, we have to use ‘an’.

So, we have to use 'an'.

“It’s an octopus.”

“It's an octopus.”

“An octopus is big.”

“An octopus is big.”

Hmmm…

Hmmm…

This one’s a little bit hard.

This one's a little bit hard.

But remember, we’re talking about the same octopus.

But remember, we're talking about the same octopus.

So now, this octopus is specific.

So now, this octopus is specific.

So, we have to change the article ‘an’ to ‘the’.

So, we have to change the article 'an' to 'the'.

“The octopus is big.”

“The octopus is big.”

The octopus from the first sentence.

The octopus from the first sentence.

Last, “The octopus are under the chair.”

Last, “The octopus are under the chair.”

What’s the mistake?

What's the mistake?

“The octopus…”

“The octopus…”

There’s only one.

There's only one.

So, we don’t use ‘are’, we have to say “is”.

So, we don't use 'are', we have to say “is”.

“The octopus is under the chair.”

“The octopus is under the chair.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So that was our checkup for articles,  prepositions and adjectives.

So that was our checkup for articles, prepositions and adjectives.

I hope you guys understand better and I’ll see you in the next video.

I hope you guys understand better and I'll see you in the next video.

Thank you.

Bye.

ধন্যবাদ.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going  to learn ‘have’ and ‘has’.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমরা 'have' এবং 'has' শিখতে যাচ্ছি।

Now we use ‘have’ or ‘has’ to show possession.

এখন আমরা দখল দেখানোর জন্য 'have' বা 'has' ব্যবহার করি।

To show something belongs to you.

কিছু দেখানো আপনার অন্তর্গত.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

When you’re talking about ‘you’, or me, we say, “I have…”

When you're talking about 'you', or me, we say, “I have…”

Okay.

Okay.

If something belongs to a boy or man, we say, “He has…”

If something belongs to a boy or man, we say, “He has…”

For a girl or a woman.

For a girl or a woman.

“She has…”

"তার আছে..."

For an animal or thing.

কোনো প্রাণী বা জিনিসের জন্য।

“It has…”

"এটা আছে..."

For you, “You have…”

আপনার জন্য, "আপনার আছে..."

For us.

আমাদের জন্য।

Me and some other people.

আমি এবং আরো কিছু মানুষ.

We say, “We have…”

We say, “We have…”

Okay, and some other people.

Okay, and some other people.

“They have…”

“They have…”

Okay.

Okay.

This is very easy, you just have to remember it.

This is very easy, you just have to remember it.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s practice with these pictures.

So, let's practice with these pictures.

Here we have a rabbit…

Here we have a rabbit…

and a carrot.

and a carrot.

So, which one do we have to use?

So, which one do we have to use?

Well, a rabbit is an animal.

ঠিক আছে, একটি খরগোশ একটি প্রাণী।

So, we have to use ‘it’.

So, we have to use 'it'.

“It has a carrot.”

"এতে একটি গাজর আছে।"

Again, “It has a carrot.”

আবার, "এতে একটি গাজর আছে।"

Now, in this picture, we have two ants.

এখন, এই ছবিতে, আমরা দুটি পিঁপড়া আছে.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, for two things we have to use ‘they’.

So, for two things we have to use 'they'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, here are two ants and an apple.

So, here are two ants and an apple.

So, we’re going to say, “They have an apple.”

সুতরাং, আমরা বলতে যাচ্ছি, "তাদের একটি আপেল আছে।"

“They have an apple.”

"তাদের একটি আপেল আছে।"

Okay, let’s move on to some more practice.

Okay, let's move on to some more practice.

Let’s do some practice together.

Let's do some practice together.

You have to think about if we should use ‘have’ or ‘has’ in the blanks.

আমাদের খালি জায়গায় 'have' বা 'has' ব্যবহার করা উচিত কিনা তা আপনাকে ভাবতে হবে।

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s look at the first one.

So, let's look at the first one.

“The girl ‘blank’ long hair.”

"মেয়েটি 'খালি' লম্বা চুল।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now, ‘the girl’.

Now, 'the girl'.

We can we use instead of the girl?

We can we use instead of the girl?

We can say “she”.

আমরা বলতে পারি "সে"।

“She” then what do we say?

"সে" তাহলে আমরা কি বলব?

“Has.”

"হয়েছে।"

“She has long hair.”

"তার লম্বা চুল আছে।"

Or…

“The girl has long hair.”

অথবা...

"মেয়েটির চুল লম্বা।"

It’s the same.

এটা একই.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

The next one.

The next one.

“The boys…”

"ছেলে..."

Now, there’s an ‘s’ here.

এখন, এখানে একটি 's' আছে।

That means there’s more than one boy.

তার মানে একাধিক ছেলে আছে।

When we have more than one thing, what do we use?

যখন আমাদের একাধিক জিনিস থাকে, তখন আমরা কী ব্যবহার করব?

“They.”

"তারা।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“They…”

“They…”

Do we say ‘have’ or ‘has’?

Do we say 'have' or 'has'?

We have to say “have”.

আমাদের বলতে হবে "হয়েছে"।

“They have caps.”

"তাদের ক্যাপ আছে।"

Or…

অথবা...

“The boys have caps.”

"ছেলেদের ক্যাপ আছে।"

Okay, the next one’s easier.

Okay, the next one's easier.

“I…”

"আমি..."

When we have ‘I’, we say “have”.

যখন আমাদের 'আমি' থাকে, তখন আমরা বলি "have"।

“I have a friend.”

"আমার একজন বন্ধু আছে."

Okay, the next one is also easy.

Okay, the next one is also easy.

“He…”

"সে..."

“He ‘blank’ an umbrella.”

"সে একটি ছাতা 'খালি'।"

What do we have to use?

আমরা কি ব্যবহার করতে হবে?

“Has.”

"হয়েছে।"

“He has an umbrella.”

"তার একটা ছাতা আছে।"

Okay, the next one says, “The dog ‘blank’ a bone.”

Okay, the next one says, “The dog 'blank' a bone.”

“The dog…”

"কুকুর..."

What do we use for animals?

আমরা পশুদের জন্য কি ব্যবহার করি?

“It.”

"এটা।"

“It…

“It…

has a bone.”

has a bone.”

Or… “The dog has a bone.”

Or… “The dog has a bone.”

And last.

এবং শেষে.

“My mother and I ‘blank’ a car.”

"আমার মা এবং আমি একটি গাড়ি 'খালি' করি।"

Okay, this one’s tricky.

Okay, this one's tricky.

“My mother and I…”

"আমার মা এবং আমি..."

We have to say “we”.

আমাদের বলতে হবে "আমরা"।

“We…have…a car.”

"আমাদের...একটি গাড়ি আছে।"

“My mother and I have a car.”

"আমার মা এবং আমার একটি গাড়ি আছে।"

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, I hope you understand how to use ‘have’ and ‘has’.

So, I hope you understand how to use 'have' and 'has'.

And I’ll see you in the next video.

And I'll see you in the next video.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to learn negatives with ‘have’ and ‘has’.

In this video, we're going to learn negatives with 'have' and 'has'.

Now this also pretty easy.

Now this also pretty easy.

You just have to remember everything that I wrote.

You just have to remember everything that I wrote.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, let’s take a look at the board.

সুতরাং, এর বোর্ড কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Okay, first, for ‘I’, we use, “I don’t have…”

Okay, first, for 'I', we use, “I don't have…”

Remember, ‘don’t’ is a contraction for ‘do not’.

Remember, 'don't' is a contraction for 'do not'.

“I don’t have…”

“I don't have…”

For ‘he, ‘she’ and ‘it’, we use ‘doesn’t have’.

For 'he, 'she' and 'it', we use 'doesn't have'.

‘Doesn’t’ is a contraction for ‘does not’.

'Doesn't' is a contraction for 'does not'.

“He doesn’t have…”

“He doesn't have…”

“She doesn’t have…”

“She doesn't have…”

“It doesn’t have…”

“It doesn't have…”

Now on the bottom.

Now on the bottom.

For ‘you’, ‘we’, ‘they’, it’s the same as ‘I’.

For 'you', 'we', 'they', it's the same as 'I'.

We use ‘don’t have’.

We use 'don't have'.

“You don’t have…”

“You don't have…”

“We don’t have…” and “They don’t have…”

“We don't have…” and “They don't have…”

So, let’s look at these pictures.

So, let's look at these pictures.

Remember, we have a rabbit and a carrot.

Remember, we have a rabbit and a carrot.

So, we said, “It has a carrot.”

So, we said, “It has a carrot.”

Okay, but, we’re doing  negatives, so we have to say,

Okay, but, we're doing negatives, so we have to say,

“It doesn’t have a cake.”

“It doesn't have a cake.”

“It doesn’t have a cake.”

“It doesn't have a cake.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Now here, we have the ants and an apple.

Now here, we have the ants and an apple.

So, we said, “They have an apple.”

So, we said, “They have an apple.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

But for this banana here, we have to say, “They don’t have a banana.”

But for this banana here, we have to say, “They don't have a banana.”

“They don’t have a banana.”

“They don't have a banana.”

Okay, let’s move on to some more practice.

Okay, let's move on to some more practice.

Now let’s try this practice with the negatives ‘doesn’t have’ and ‘don’t have’ together.

Now let's try this practice with the negatives 'doesn't have' and 'don't have' together.

Now this is a little easy because we know that the second word is have.

Now this is a little easy because we know that the second word is have.

All you have to think is should  we use ‘doesn’t’ or ‘don’t’.

All you have to think is should we use 'doesn't' or 'don't'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So, I’m just going to put ‘have’ her first.

So, I'm just going to put 'have' her first.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“She ‘blank’ have short hair.”

“She 'blank' have short hair.”

Should we use ‘don’t’ or ‘doesn’t’?

Should we use 'don't' or 'doesn't'?

If you remember, for ‘she’, we use ‘doesn’t’.

If you remember, for 'she', we use 'doesn't'.

“She doesn’t have short hair.”

“She doesn't have short hair.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

And again, I’m going to put ‘have’ first.

And again, I'm going to put 'have' first.

This is easy.

This is easy.

‘He’ and ‘she’ we both use ‘doesn’t’.

'He' and 'she' we both use 'doesn't'.

“He doesn’t have an umbrella.”

“He doesn't have an umbrella.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

How about for ‘I’?

How about for 'I'?

“I doesn’t have….”

“I doesn't have….”

Or “I don’t have…”?

Or “I don't have…”?

The correct answer is ‘don’t’.

The correct answer is 'don't'.

“I don’t have a wife.”

“I don't have a wife.”

“People…”

“People…”

Remember, if we have more than one person, animal and thing, we have to think of ‘they’.

Remember, if we have more than one person, animal and thing, we have to think of 'they'.

For ‘they’, do we use ‘don’t’ or ‘doesn’t’?

For 'they', do we use 'don't' or 'doesn't'?

Do you remember?

Do you remember?

The correct answer is ‘don’t’.

The correct answer is 'don't'.

“People don’t have manners.”

“People don't have manners.”

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

Next.

পরবর্তী.

“We…”

“We…”

“We ‘blank’ have money.”

“We 'blank' have money.”

Should we put ‘doesn’t’ or ‘don’t’?

Should we put 'doesn't' or 'don't'?

The correct answer is ‘don’t’.

The correct answer is 'don't'.

“We don’t have money.”

“We don't have money.”

Okay, and the last one.

Okay, and the last one.

“A snake…”

“A snake…”

A snake is an animal.

A snake is an animal.

What do we use for an animal?

What do we use for an animal?

“It.”

"এটা।"

“It…”

“It…”

What should we put here?

What should we put here?

“It…doesn’t…have legs.”

“It…doesn't…have legs.”

Okay, so that was our practice the negatives ‘don’t have’ and ‘doesn’t have’.

Okay, so that was our practice the negatives 'don't have' and 'doesn't have'.

I hope you understand, and I’ll see you in the next video.

I hope you understand, and I'll see you in the next video.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, we’re going to learn how to ask questions using ‘have’.

In this video, we're going to learn how to ask questions using 'have'.

Okay, let’s look at the board.

Okay, let's look at the board.

When we are talking about ‘he’, ‘she’ or ‘it’,

When we are talking about 'he', 'she' or 'it',

the question always begins with ‘does’.

the question always begins with 'does'.

After the pronoun, we have ‘have’.

After the pronoun, we have 'have'.

So, we say, “Does he have…”

So, we say, “Does he have…”

“Does she have…”

“Does she have…”

“Does it have…”

“Does it have…”

Now, let’s practice with this question and let’s look at the two answers.

Now, let's practice with this question and let's look at the two answers.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

“Does he have a friend?”

“Does he have a friend?”

If the answer is ‘yes’, we say “yes”,

If the answer is 'yes', we say “yes”,

in the blank, we match… this has to be the same.

in the blank, we match… this has to be the same.

“Yes, he does.”

“Yes, he does.”

If the answer is ‘no’.

If the answer is 'no'.

“No, he doesn’t.”

“No, he doesn't.”

“Does he have a friend?”

“Does he have a friend?”

“Yes, she does.”

“Yes, she does.”

“No, she doesn’t.”

“No, she doesn't.”

“Does it have a friend?”

“Does it have a friend?”

“Yes, it does.”

“Yes, it does.”

“No, it doesn’t.”

“No, it doesn't.”

Okay, so remember ‘does…have’.

Okay, so remember 'does…have'.

Now, when we use ‘you’, ‘we’, ‘they’, we use ‘do’ in the front.

Now, when we use 'you', 'we', 'they', we use 'do' in the front.

And ‘have’ after.

And 'have' after.

“Do you have a friend?”

“Do you have a friend?”

“Do we have a friend?”

“Do we have a friend?”

“Do they have a friend?”

“Do they have a friend?”

Okay.

And again, we have two answers.

ঠিক আছে.

And again, we have two answers.

We finish with ‘do’ or ‘don’t’.

We finish with 'do' or 'don't'.

So, “Do you have a friend?”

So, “Do you have a friend?”

“Yes, I do.”

“Yes, I do.”

Right, the question is asking ‘you’, so, you say “I do.”

Right, the question is asking 'you', so, you say “I do.”

Or, “No, I don’t.”

Or, “No, I don't.”

“Do we have a friend?”

“Do we have a friend?”

“Yes, we do.”

“Yes, we do.”

Or, “No, we don’t.”

Or, “No, we don't.”

And last.

এবং শেষে.

“Do they have a friend?”

“Do they have a friend?”

“Yes, they do.”

“Yes, they do.”

“No, they don’t.”

“No, they don't.”

Okay, let’s move on to some more practice.

Okay, let's move on to some more practice.

Alright, let’s try this practice together.

Alright, let's try this practice together.

I know it looks hard, but I’m going to help you.

I know it looks hard, but I'm going to help you.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

So let’s look at the first practice.

So let's look at the first practice.

It’s a question.

It's a question.

Okay, so remember when we ask a question, we begin with ‘do’ or ‘does’.

Okay, so remember when we ask a question, we begin with 'do' or 'does'.

Okay.

ঠিক আছে.

We have ‘she’.

We have 'she'.

Well, remember for all questions we use ‘have’.

Well, remember for all questions we use 'have'.

In the front, should we use ‘does’ or ‘do’?

In the front, should we use 'does' or 'do'?

The answer is ‘does’.

The answer is 'does'.

“Does she have a dress?”

“Does she have a dress?”

When we answer, “Yes…”

When we answer, “Yes…”

What do we put here?

What do we put here?

Remember, we put the pronoun ‘she’.

Remember, we put the pronoun 'she'.

And the answer ‘does’.

And the answer 'does'.

“Yes, she does.”

“Yes, she does.”

The next one.

The next one.

We have ‘they’.

We have 'they'.

Okay, ‘have’ is again the same.

Okay, 'have' is again the same.

“…have a bicycle?”

“…have a bicycle?”

Okay, what goes in the front?

Okay, what goes in the front?

For ‘they’, we use ‘do’.

For 'they', we use 'do'.

“Do they have a bicycle?”

“Do they have a bicycle?”

This time the answer is negative.

This time the answer is negative.

“No, they….”

“No, they….”

What do we put here?

What do we put here?

It doesn’t make sense to say, “do”.

It doesn't make sense to say, “do”.

Right?

“No, they do.”

ঠিক?

“No, they do.”

That’s wrong.

That's wrong.

It’s a negative.

It's a negative.

We have to say, “No, they don’t.”

We have to say, “No, they don't.”

“No, they do not.”

“No, they do not.”

Okay, and again, we have ‘have’ over here.

Okay, and again, we have 'have' over here.

“It…”

“It…”

Which one, ‘do’ or ‘does’?

Which one, 'do' or 'does'?

The answer is ‘does’.

The answer is 'does'.

“Does it have a ball?”

“Does it have a ball?”

Again, the answer is negative.

Again, the answer is negative.

“No, it…does not.”

“No, it…does not.”

or the contraction, “No, it doesn’t.”

or the contraction, “No, it doesn't.”

Okay.

So that was our practice for asking questions with ‘have’.

ঠিক আছে.

So that was our practice for asking questions with 'have'.

I hope you understand and I’ll  see you in the next video. 

I hope you understand and I'll see you in the next video.

This is a checkup video for 'have', 'has', 'don't have', 'doesn't have'

This is a checkup video for 'have', 'has', 'don't have', 'doesn't have'

and questions with 'have'.

and questions with 'have'.

Let's take a look at the board.

Let's take a look at the board.

Here, we have a picture of a dog and a ball.

Here, we have a picture of a dog and a ball.

And this ball belongs to this dog.

And this ball belongs to this dog.

So let's make a sentence about this picture.

So let's make a sentence about this picture.

Ok...

The dog is an animal.

Ok...

The dog is an animal.

So, we have to use 'it'.

So, we have to use 'it'.

Ok...

Ok...

With 'it', do we use 'have' or 'has'?

With 'it', do we use 'have' or 'has'?

We have to use 'has'.

We have to use 'has'.

"It has a ball."

"It has a ball."

Now, there's a hat, but it says "no".

Now, there's a hat, but it says "no".

It's negative.

It's negative.

So, "It..."

So, "It..."

Remember, for negative, we always use 'have'.

Remember, for negative, we always use 'have'.

But what goes in the front?

But what goes in the front?

'Doesn't' or 'don't'?

'Doesn't' or 'don't'?

For 'it', we say "doesn't".

For 'it', we say "doesn't".

"It doesn't have a hat."

"It doesn't have a hat."

Next, we have a question.

Next, we have a question.

We use 'have'.

We use 'have'.

Remember, we have to put the pronoun over here.

Remember, we have to put the pronoun over here.

The same one.

The same one.

And we put 'does' or 'do' in the front.

And we put 'does' or 'do' in the front.

What do you think?

আপনি কি মনে করেন?

We have to say, "does".

We have to say, "does".

"Does it have a ball?"

"Does it have a ball?"

Well, "Does it have a ball?"

Well, "Does it have a ball?"

"Yes, it does."

"Yes, it does."

Let's move on to the next part.

Let's move on to the next part.

Here we have two people.

Here we have two people.

So, we're going to say "they".

So, we're going to say "they".

And a car...that belongs to them.

And a car...that belongs to them.

For 'they', we have to say "have".

For 'they', we have to say "have".

"They have a car."

"They have a car."

Here, there's a bus.

Here, there's a bus.

But, again, it says, "no".

But, again, it says, "no".

Negative.

Negative.

"They 'blank' 'blank' a bus."

"They 'blank' 'blank' a bus."

Again, for negative, we say "have".

Again, for negative, we say "have".

'Doesn't have' or 'don't have'?

'Doesn't have' or 'don't have'?

Which one is it?

এটা কোনটা?

For 'don't'...uhh for 'they', we say,

For 'don't'...uhh for 'they', we say,

"They don't have a bus."

"They don't have a bus."

Ok, and we have a question.

Ok, and we have a question.

Well, again, we have to put the same pronoun.

Well, again, we have to put the same pronoun.

How about in the front?

How about in the front?

'Do' or 'does'?

'Do' or 'does'?

For 'they', we put 'do'.

For 'they', we put 'do'.

"Do they have a bus?"

"Do they have a bus?"

"Do they have a bus?"

"Do they have a bus?"

"No, they don't."

"No, they don't."

Ok, let's move on to some more practice.

ঠিক আছে, আসুন আরও কিছু অনুশীলনে এগিয়ে যাই।

Ok, now for this practice, we have to find the mistakes in these sentences.

Ok, now for this practice, we have to find the mistakes in these sentences.

What's wrong with them?

তাদের কি দোষ?

Ok...

Ok...

So, let's look at the first one.

So, let's look at the first one.

"They has two watches."

"They has two watches."

Hmmmm.

হুমমম।

Remember, for 'they', we have  to use 'have', not 'has'.

Remember, for 'they', we have to use 'have', not 'has'.

"They have two watches."

"They have two watches."

The next one is a question.

The next one is a question.

"Does they have three watches?"

"Does they have three watches?"

Ok...

Ok...

Remember, when we start a question, we have to use 'do' or 'does'.

Remember, when we start a question, we have to use 'do' or 'does'.

Here we have 'does'.

Here we have 'does'.

But remember, for 'they', we begin with 'do'.

But remember, for 'they', we begin with 'do'.

"Do they have three watches?"

"Do they have three watches?"

And in the answer...

And in the answer...

"No, we don't."

"No, we don't."

What's wrong with this answer?

What's wrong with this answer?

Remember, the pronoun has to match.

Remember, the pronoun has to match.

It has to be the same.

It has to be the same.

"Do they have three watches?"

"Do they have three watches?"

"No, they don't."

"No, they don't."

Let's look at these.

Let's look at these.

"She have a dress."

"She have a dress."

Remember, for 'she', we use 'has'.

Remember, for 'she', we use 'has'.

"She has a dress."

"She has a dress."

How about in the question?

How about in the question?

"Do she have a hat?"

"Do she have a hat?"

Remember, we begin with 'do' or 'does', but for 'she', we should begin with 'does'.

Remember, we begin with 'do' or 'does', but for 'she', we should begin with 'does'.

"Does she have a hat?"

"Does she have a hat?"

And the answer.

And the answer.

"No, she do."

"No, she do."

Hmmm.

হুমম।

'No' means it's negative.

'No' means it's negative.

So, we need a negative here.

So, we need a negative here.

Is it 'don't' or 'doesn't'?

Is it 'don't' or 'doesn't'?

"No, she..

"No, she..

doesn't." is the correct answer.

doesn't." is the correct answer.

Okay.

So that was our checkup.

ঠিক আছে.

So that was our checkup.

I hope you understand better.

I hope you understand better.

And I'll see you in the next video.

And I'll see you in the next video.

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I’m Esther. Welcome to  

আমি ইস্টার। Welcome to

my English grammar course on the tenses. I’m going to teach you how to use the twelve  

my English grammar course on the tenses. আমি আপনাকে শেখাতে যাচ্ছি কিভাবে

tenses in the past, present, and future. It’s a great course, and there’s a lot of  

অতীত, বর্তমান এবং ভবিষ্যতে বারোটি কাল ব্যবহার করতে হয়। এটি একটি দুর্দান্ত কোর্স, এবং অনেক

important information. So keep watching.

গুরুত্বপূর্ণ তথ্য রয়েছে৷ তাই দেখতে থাকুন।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

My name is Esther.

আমার নাম ইস্টার।

I'm so excited to teach you the present simple tense in today's video.

আজকের ভিডিওতে আপনাকে বর্তমান সরল কাল শেখাতে আমি খুবই উত্তেজিত।

Now this lesson can be a little difficult,

এখন এই পাঠটি একটু কঠিন হতে পারে,

so I'll do my best to keep it easy and fun for you.

তাই আমি এটিকে আপনার জন্য সহজ এবং মজাদার রাখার জন্য যথাসাধ্য চেষ্টা করব।

My goal is for you to understand how and when to use this grammar by the end of the video.

ভিডিওর শেষ নাগাদ আপনি কীভাবে এবং কখন এই ব্যাকরণটি ব্যবহার করবেন তা বোঝার জন্য আমার লক্ষ্য।

Let's get started.

চল শুরু করি.

Let's start with the first usage for the present simple tense.

বর্তমান সরল কালের প্রথম ব্যবহার দিয়ে শুরু করা যাক।

The first usage is pretty easy.

প্রথম ব্যবহার বেশ সহজ.

We use it to talk about facts, truths, and generalizations.

আমরা তথ্য, সত্য এবং সাধারণীকরণ সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে এটি ব্যবহার করি।

Let's look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখি।

‘The Sun is bright.’

'সূর্য উজ্জ্বল.'

Now that's a fact.

এখন এটি একটি সত্য.

It doesn't change.

এটা পরিবর্তন হয় না.

Everybody knows that the Sun is bright.

সবাই জানে যে সূর্য উজ্জ্বল।

It was bright yesterday.

এটা গতকাল উজ্জ্বল ছিল.

It's bright today.

এটা আজ উজ্জ্বল.

And it will be bright tomorrow.

এবং এটি আগামীকাল উজ্জ্বল হবে।

That makes it a fact.

যে এটি একটি বাস্তবতা করে তোলে.

‘Pigs don't fly.’

'শুয়োর উড়ে না।'

That's also a fact.

এটাও একটা বাস্তবতা।

Everybody knows that pigs don't fly.

সবাই জানে শূকর উড়ে যায় না।

‘Cats are better than dogs.’

'কুকুরের চেয়ে বিড়াল ভালো।'

Now this you may not agree with.

এখন এটি আপনি একমত নাও হতে পারে.

This is my truth.

এই আমার সত্য.

I'm making a generalization about cats and dogs in this example.

আমি এই উদাহরণে বিড়াল এবং কুকুর সম্পর্কে একটি সাধারণীকরণ করছি।

And finally, ‘It's cold in winter.’

এবং পরিশেষে, 'শীতকালে ঠান্ডা।'

This really depends on where you live, but for a lot of people, or let's say for

এটি সত্যিই আপনি কোথায় থাকেন তার উপর নির্ভর করে, তবে অনেক লোকের জন্য, বা বলা যাক,

most people, it is cold in the winter,

বেশিরভাগ লোকের জন্য শীতকালে ঠান্ডা থাকে,

so that's the truth for some people.

তাই কিছু লোকের জন্য এটি সত্য।

Now let's look back and see what verb I used in the present simple tense.

এখন ফিরে দেখা যাক এবং বর্তমান সরল কালে আমি কোন ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করেছি।

For the first sentence, we have ‘is’.

প্রথম বাক্যের জন্য, আমাদের আছে 'is'।

I use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’ to talk about the Sun.

আমি সূর্য সম্পর্কে কথা বলার জন্য 'be' ক্রিয়া 'is' ব্যবহার করি।

In the next sentence, I use the negative of do - ‘do not’

পরের বাক্যে, আমি do - 'dont'-এর নেতিবাচক ব্যবহার করি

And you'll notice I use the contraction and put these two words together to make it ‘don't’.

এবং আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন যে আমি সংকোচন ব্যবহার করেছি এবং এই দুটি শব্দকে একত্রে 'করতে হবে না'।

‘Cats are better than dogs.’

'কুকুরের চেয়ে বিড়াল ভালো।'

I use the ‘be’ verb "are" to talk about cats because ‘cats’ is plural.

আমি বিড়াল সম্পর্কে কথা বলার জন্য 'be' ক্রিয়া "are" ব্যবহার করি কারণ 'বিড়াল' বহুবচন।

And finally, it's cold and winter.

এবং অবশেষে, এটি ঠান্ডা এবং শীতকাল।

Here I use the ‘be’ verb "is" again,

এখানে আমি আবার 'be' ক্রিয়া "is" ব্যবহার করেছি,

but I use the contraction to combine ‘it’ and ‘is’

কিন্তু আমি 'it' এবং 'is' কে যুক্ত করতে সংকোচন ব্যবহার করেছি এবং

and made ‘it’s’.

'it's' করেছি।

Let's move on to the next usage.

এর পরবর্তী ব্যবহারে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

We also use the present simple tense to talk about habits and routines.

আমরা অভ্যাস এবং রুটিন সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি।

So things and actions that happen regularly.

তাই জিনিস এবং কর্ম যা নিয়মিত ঘটে.

Let’s look at the examples.

আসুন উদাহরণগুলি দেখি।

‘I always eat lunch at noon.’

'আমি সবসময় দুপুরের খাবার খাই।'

You'll notice I use the adverb ‘always’ because I'm talking about something that I

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমি 'সর্বদা' ক্রিয়া বিশেষণটি ব্যবহার করি কারণ আমি এমন কিছুর কথা বলছি যা আমি

do regularly.

নিয়মিত করি।

What is that?

এটা কি?

‘Eat lunch at noon.’

'দুপুরে লাঞ্চ খাও।'

So I use the present simple tense.

তাই আমি বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি।

And here I use the verb ‘eat’.

এবং এখানে আমি 'খাওয়া' ক্রিয়াটি ব্যবহার করি।

‘I eat…’

'আমি খাই...'

The second example says you play games every day.

দ্বিতীয় উদাহরণটি বলে যে আপনি প্রতিদিন গেম খেলেন।

Do you see the clue that helps you know that this is something that happens regularly?

আপনি কি এমন ক্লু দেখতে পাচ্ছেন যা আপনাকে জানতে সাহায্য করে যে এটি এমন কিছু যা নিয়মিত ঘটে?

It's ‘every day’.

এটা 'প্রতিদিন'।

So it's something that happens as a routine or a habit,

সুতরাং এটি এমন কিছু যা একটি রুটিন বা অভ্যাস হিসাবে ঘটে,

so you play games.

তাই আপনি গেম খেলুন।

The verb here is ‘play’.

এখানে ক্রিয়াপদ হল 'খেলা'।

‘You play…’

'তুমি খেলো...'

The next example says ‘Seth starts work at 9:00 a.m. daily.’

পরের উদাহরণ বলে 'শেঠ প্রতিদিন সকাল ৯টায় কাজ শুরু করে।'

Again this is something that happens regularly.

আবার এটি এমন কিছু যা নিয়মিত ঘটে।

‘Seth goes to work at 9:00 a.m.’ every day.

'শেঠ প্রতিদিন সকাল ৯টায় কাজে যায়'।

Now you'll notice I put a blue line under the ‘s’ in ‘starts’.

এখন আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমি 'শুরু'-এ 's' এর নিচে একটি নীল রেখা রেখেছি।

Can you figure out why?

আপনি কেন বুঝতে পারেন?

Well remember that when the subject of a sentence is ‘he’, ‘she’, or ‘it’,

ভাল মনে রাখবেন যে যখন একটি বাক্যের বিষয় 'সে', 'সে', বা 'এটি' হয়,

we need to add an ‘s’ or ‘es’ to the end of the verb in the present simple tense.

আমাদের বর্তমান সরল কালের ক্রিয়াপদের শেষে একটি 's' বা 'es' যোগ করতে হবে।

Seth is a ‘he’, so we need to add an ‘s’.

শেঠ একটি 'সে', তাই আমাদের একটি 's' যোগ করতে হবে।

‘Seth starts work at 9:00 a.m. daily.’

'শেঠ প্রতিদিন সকাল ৯টায় কাজ শুরু করে।'

And the last example: ‘They study English every Monday.’

এবং শেষ উদাহরণ: 'তারা প্রতি সোমবার ইংরেজি অধ্যয়ন করে।'

Again, ‘every Monday’ means that they do it regularly,

আবার, 'প্রতি সোমবার' মানে তারা এটা নিয়মিত করে,

and that's why we use the present simple tense.

আর এজন্যই আমরা বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি।

‘They study…’.

'তারা পড়াশোনা করে...'

So as a review, remember we use the present simple tense

তাই একটি পর্যালোচনা হিসাবে, মনে রাখবেন আমরা

to talk about habits and routines that happen regularly.

নিয়মিত ঘটতে থাকা অভ্যাস এবং রুটিন সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি

Let's move on.

। চল এগোই.

We also use the present simple tense with non-continuous verbs.

আমরা অ-নিরবিচ্ছিন্ন ক্রিয়াপদের সাথে বর্তমান সরল কালও ব্যবহার করি।

These are verbs that we  don't use in the continuous 

এগুলি এমন ক্রিয়া যা আমরা ক্রমাগত

form,

even if they're happening right now.

আকারে ব্যবহার করি না,

এমনকি যদি সেগুলি এখনই ঘটছে।

They're also called stative verbs.

এগুলিকে স্থিতিশীল ক্রিয়াও বলা হয়।

These are connected with thoughts, opinions, feelings, emotions, and our five senses.

এগুলি চিন্তা, মতামত, অনুভূতি, আবেগ এবং আমাদের পাঁচটি ইন্দ্রিয়ের সাথে যুক্ত।

Let's look at these examples.

আসুন এই উদাহরণ তাকান.

‘I love my mom.’

'আমি আমার মাকে ভালবাসি.'

The verb here is ‘love’.

এখানে ক্রিয়াপদ হল 'প্রেম'।

That's an emotion, so I use the present simple tense.

এটি একটি আবেগ, তাই আমি বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি।

‘It smells good.’

'গোন্ধ্টা ভালো.'

‘Smell’ is one of the five senses, so I use the present simple tense.

'গন্ধ' পাঁচটি ইন্দ্রিয়ের একটি, তাই আমি বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি।

You'll notice I underlined the ‘s’ because remember the subject is ‘it’.

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমি 's' আন্ডারলাইন করেছি কারণ মনে রাখবেন বিষয় হল 'এটি'।

‘Kelly feels happy.’

'কেলি খুশি লাগছে।'

This is talking about a feeling.

এটা একটা অনুভূতির কথা বলছে।

Again the subject here is ‘Kelly’ which is a ‘she’,

আবার এখানে বিষয় হল 'কেলি' যা একটি 'সে',

so I added an ‘s’ to the verb.

তাই আমি ক্রিয়াপদে একটি 's' যোগ করেছি।

And finally, ‘They need help.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'তাদের সাহায্য দরকার।'

We don't say, ‘they are needing help’ even though it's happening right now.

আমরা বলি না, 'তাদের সাহায্য দরকার' যদিও এটি এখনই ঘটছে।

‘Need’ is non-continuous, so we say, ‘they need help’,

'প্রয়োজন' অবিচ্ছিন্ন, তাই আমরা বলি, 'তাদের সাহায্যের প্রয়োজন',

so remember you also use the present simple tense with non-continuous verbs,

তাই মনে রাখবেন আপনি চিন্তা, মতামত, অনুভূতি, আবেগ এবং আমাদের পাঁচটি ইন্দ্রিয়ের সাথে সংযুক্ত

connected with thoughts, opinions, feelings, emotions, and our five senses.

অবিচ্ছিন্ন ক্রিয়াপদের সাথে বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করুন । চল এগোই.

Let's move on.

অদূর ভবিষ্যতে

Speakers occasionally use the present simple tense to talk about something that will happen

ঘটবে এমন কিছু সম্পর্কে কথা বলার জন্য বক্তারা মাঝে মাঝে বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করেন

in the near future.

।

Now this can be a little confusing, but we're not using the future tense,

এখন এটি একটু বিভ্রান্তিকর হতে পারে, কিন্তু আমরা ভবিষ্যত কাল ব্যবহার করছি না,

we're using the present simple tense.

আমরা বর্তমান সাধারণ কাল ব্যবহার করছি।

It's possible to do that and it's actually common for people to do that.

এটি করা সম্ভব এবং এটি মানুষের পক্ষে এটি করা সাধারণ।

Again, for something that will happen in the near future.

আবার, অদূর ভবিষ্যতে ঘটবে এমন কিছুর জন্য।

Let's look at the examples.

আসুন উদাহরণগুলি দেখি।

‘I have class at 6 p.m.’

'আমি 6 pm ক্লাস আছে'

‘6 p.m.’ that's pretty soon, so I can say,

'6 pm' এটি খুব শীঘ্রই, তাই আমি বলতে পারি,

'I have class.'

'আমার ক্লাস আছে।'

- the present simple tense.

- সাধারন বর্তমান কাল.

‘Lisa arrives on Sunday.’

'লিসা রবিবার আসবে।'

Again the near future, ‘Sunday’.

আবার অদূর ভবিষ্যতে 'রবিবার'।

So I use the present simple tense.

তাই আমি বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করি।

I added an ‘s’ at the end of arrive, because Lisa, the subject, is a ‘she’.

আমি পৌঁছানোর শেষে একটি 's' যোগ করেছি, কারণ লিসা, বিষয়, একটি 'সে'।

‘We start work soon.’

'আমরা শীঘ্রই কাজ শুরু করব।'

Again, the near future, ‘soon’,

আবার, নিকট ভবিষ্যত, 'শীঘ্রই',

so I use the present simple verb ‘start’.

তাই আমি বর্তমান সরল ক্রিয়া 'শুরু' ব্যবহার করি।

And finally, ‘My students come tomorrow.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'আমার ছাত্ররা আগামীকাল আসবে।'

This is something that will happen in the near future,

এটি এমন কিছু যা অদূর ভবিষ্যতে ঘটবে,

so I use the verb ‘come’.

তাই আমি 'আসা' ক্রিয়াটি ব্যবহার করি।

So remember it is possible, and it is common to use the present simple tense

তাই মনে রাখবেন এটি সম্ভব, এবং

to talk about something that will happen in the near future.

নিকট ভবিষ্যতে ঘটবে এমন কিছু সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে বর্তমান সরল কাল ব্যবহার করা সাধারণ।

Let's go to the next usage.

এর পরবর্তী ব্যবহারে যান.

Let's talk about a possible negative usage for the present simple tense,

চলুন বর্তমান সরল কালের জন্য একটি সম্ভাব্য নেতিবাচক ব্যবহার সম্পর্কে কথা বলি,

and that is ‘do not’ and ‘does not’.

এবং সেটি হল 'do not' এবং 'does not'।

The first example says, ‘Mike eats bread.’

প্রথম উদাহরণ বলে, 'মাইক রুটি খায়।'

I put an ‘s’ at the end of ‘eat’ because the subject is Mike which is a ‘he’.

আমি 'খাওয়া' এর শেষে একটি 'এস' রাখলাম কারণ বিষয় হল মাইক যা 'সে'।

Now that's not a negative statement.

এখন এটি একটি নেতিবাচক বিবৃতি না.

What happens when I want to turn it into a negative statement?

যখন আমি এটিকে নেতিবাচক বিবৃতিতে পরিণত করতে চাই তখন কী হবে?

Well I change it like this - ‘Mike doesn't eat bread.’

আচ্ছা আমি এভাবে পরিবর্তন করি - 'মাইক রুটি খায় না।'

So you'll notice that I didn't move the ‘s’ here, okay.

তাই আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন যে আমি এখানে 's' সরাননি, ঠিক আছে।

Instead I added ‘doesn't’.

পরিবর্তে আমি 'না' যোগ করেছি।

I took ‘does’ and ‘not’ and I turned it into a contraction by combining the two

আমি 'করছে' এবং 'না' নিয়েছি এবং আমি দুটিকে একত্রিত করে

and making it ‘doesn't’.

এটিকে 'করছে না' করে সংকোচনে পরিণত করেছি।

So if the subject is ‘he’, ‘she’, or ‘it’,

তাই যদি বিষয় 'সে', 'সে', বা 'এটি' হয়,

we use ‘does not’ or ‘doesn't’ to make it negative.

আমরা এটিকে নেতিবাচক করতে 'না করে' বা 'না করে' ব্যবহার করি।

‘You swim well.’

'তুমি ভালো সাঁতার কাটো।'

In this case, I don't need to put an ‘s’ at the end of ‘swim’ because the subject

এই ক্ষেত্রে, আমার 'সাঁতার' এর শেষে 'স' দেওয়ার দরকার নেই কারণ

is ‘you’.

বিষয়টি 'তুমি'।

If I want to make this sentence negative, I use ‘don't’.

যদি আমি এই বাক্যটিকে নেতিবাচক করতে চাই, আমি 'না' ব্যবহার করি।

‘You don't swim well.’

'তুমি ভালো সাঁতার পারো না।'

I use the contraction for ‘do’ and ‘not’.

আমি 'করুন' এবং 'না'-এর জন্য সংকোচন ব্যবহার করি।

I combine them to make ‘don't’,

আমি এগুলিকে 'করতে না' করতে একত্রিত করি,

so if the subject is ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’, or ‘they’,

তাই যদি বিষয় 'আমি', 'তুমি', 'আমরা', বা 'তারা' হয়,

we use ‘do not’ or ‘don't’.

আমরা 'করব না' বা 'করব না' ব্যবহার করি।

So to review ‘do not’ and ‘does not’ or ‘don't’ and ‘doesn't’

তাই 'করো না' এবং 'না হয়' বা 'না' এবং 'না হয়' পর্যালোচনা করা বর্তমান সাধারণ

is a possible usage for the negative for present simple

কালের জন্য নেতিবাচকের একটি সম্ভাব্য ব্যবহার

tense.

।

Let's continue on.

চলুন চালিয়ে যান.

Now I'll talk about one possible question form for the present simple tense

এখন আমি বর্তমান সরল সময়ের জন্য একটি সম্ভাব্য প্রশ্ন ফর্ম সম্পর্কে কথা বলব

and that is by using ‘do’ or ‘does’.

এবং তা হল 'do' বা 'does' ব্যবহার করে।

So let's look at the example, ‘They live here.’

সুতরাং আসুন উদাহরণটি দেখি, 'তারা এখানে থাকে।'

That's not a question, right?

এটা একটা প্রশ্ন না, তাই না?

'They live here’

'তারা এখানে থাকে'

In order to turn it into a question, it's really simple.

এটিকে একটি প্রশ্নে পরিণত করার জন্য, এটি সত্যিই সহজ।

All I have to do is add ‘do’ to the beginning and add a question mark at the end.

আমাকে যা করতে হবে তা হল শুরুতে 'do' যোগ করতে হবে এবং শেষে একটি প্রশ্ন চিহ্ন যোগ করতে হবে।

‘Do they live here?’

'তারা কি এখানে থাকে?'

So if the subject is ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’, or ‘they’,

তাই যদি বিষয় 'আমি', 'তুমি', 'আমরা', বা 'তারা' হয়,

simply add ‘do’ to the beginning of the question.

তাহলে প্রশ্নের শুরুতে 'করুন' যোগ করুন।

How about this one, ‘He plays soccer.’

এটা কেমন, 'সে ফুটবল খেলে।'

In this statement, the subject is ‘he’ and that's why you should know by now,

এই বিবৃতিতে, বিষয় হল 'তিনি' এবং সেজন্য আপনার এতক্ষণে জেনে নেওয়া উচিত,

I have an ‘s’ at the end of ‘play’.

আমার 'খেলা' শেষে একটি 'স' আছে।

However, to turn this into a question, I add ‘does’ at the beginning.

যাইহোক, এটিকে একটি প্রশ্নে পরিণত করতে, আমি শুরুতে 'করতে' যোগ করি।

‘Does he play soccer?’

'সে কি ফুটবল খেলে?'

What you'll notice here is that I no longer have the ‘s’ at the end of play.

আপনি এখানে যা লক্ষ্য করবেন তা হল খেলার শেষে আমার আর 's' নেই।

Instead I just used ‘does’ at the beginning,

পরিবর্তে আমি শুরুতে শুধু 'does' ব্যবহার করেছি,

so for ‘he’, ‘she’, or ‘it’, put ‘does’ at the beginning,

তাই 'he', 'she', or 'it'-এর জন্য, শুরুতে 'does' লিখুন,

and don't worry about putting an ‘s’ or ‘es’ at the end of the verb.

এবং 's' বা 'es' বসানোর বিষয়ে চিন্তা করবেন না ক্রিয়াপদের শেষ।

So to review, one possible way of forming a question for the present simple tense is

তাই পর্যালোচনা করার জন্য, বর্তমান সরল কালের জন্য একটি প্রশ্ন গঠনের একটি সম্ভাব্য উপায় হল

using ‘do’ or ‘does’ at the beginning.

শুরুতে 'do' বা 'does' ব্যবহার করা।

Alright let's move on.

ঠিক আছে চলুন চলুন.

Let's start with the first checkup.

প্রথম চেকআপ দিয়ে শুরু করা যাক।

In this checkup, I want you to focus on the ‘be’ verbs.

এই চেকআপে, আমি চাই আপনি 'হও' ক্রিয়াপদের উপর ফোকাস করুন।

Remember ‘be’ verbs, in the present simple tense, can be ‘is’, ‘am’, or ‘are’.

মনে রাখবেন 'be' ক্রিয়াপদ, বর্তমান সরল কালের মধ্যে, 'is', 'am', বা 'are' হতে পারে।

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘She _ blank _ at school.’

তাতে লেখা আছে, 'সে _ খালি _ স্কুলে।'

The subject of this sentence is ‘she’.

এই বাক্যের বিষয় 'সে'।

What ‘be’ verb do we use for ‘she’?

'সে'-এর জন্য আমরা কী 'বে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি?

The correct answer is ‘is’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'হয়'।

Now if you were thinking of the negative, the

এখন আপনি যদি নেতিবাচক চিন্তা করছেন,

correct answer would be ‘she isn't’

সঠিক উত্তর হবে 'সে নয়'

or ‘she is not’.

বা 'সে নয়'।

That's correct as well.

এটাও ঠিক।

And if we want to use a contraction for ‘she is’, we can say ‘she's at school’

এবং যদি আমরা 'সে ইজ' এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন ব্যবহার করতে চাই, আমরা বলতে পারি 'সে স্কুলে আছে'

For the next one, it says, ‘They _ blank _ twenty years old.’

পরেরটির জন্য, এটি বলে, 'তারা _ ফাঁকা _ বিশ বছর বয়সী।'

The subject of this sentence is ‘they’.

এই বাক্যের বিষয় 'তারা'।

What ‘be’ verb do we use for ‘they’?

আমরা 'তারা'-এর জন্য কী 'বে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি?

The correct answer is ‘are’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'হয়'।

For the negative, you can also use ‘aren't’ or ‘are not’.

নেতিবাচক জন্য, আপনি 'arn't' বা 'are not' ব্যবহার করতে পারেন।

Also if you want to use the contraction for ‘they are’, you can say,

এছাড়াও আপনি যদি 'তারা' এর জন্য সংকোচন ব্যবহার করতে চান তবে আপনি বলতে পারেন,

‘They're 20 years old.’

'তাদের বয়স 20 বছর।'

The next sentence says, ‘His father _ blank_ busy.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'তার বাবা_খালি_ব্যস্ত।'

The subject of this sentence is ‘his father’.

এই বাক্যের বিষয় 'তার পিতা'।

What subject pronoun do we use for ‘his father’?

আমরা 'তার পিতা' জন্য কোন বিষয় সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করি?

The correct answer is ‘he’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'সে'।

Remember for ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, the ‘be’ verb is ‘is’.

'সে', 'সে', 'এটি'-এর জন্য মনে রাখবেন, 'হবে' ক্রিয়া হল 'ইস'।

For the negative, we can say ‘isn't’ or ‘is not’.

নেতিবাচক জন্য, আমরা 'হয় না' বা 'হয় না' বলতে পারি।

And for a contraction, for ‘father’ and ‘is’, we can say, ‘His father's busy.’

এবং সংকোচনের জন্য, 'বাবা' এবং 'হয়'-এর জন্য, আমরা বলতে পারি, 'তার বাবা ব্যস্ত।'

Now I want you to try to find the mistakes in this sentence.

এখন আমি চাই আপনি এই বাক্যটির ভুলগুলো খুঁজে বের করার চেষ্টা করুন।

‘We isn't good friends.’

'আমরা ভালো বন্ধু নই।'

Did you find the mistake?

আপনি কি ভুল খুঁজে পেয়েছেন?

This is the mistake.

এই ভুল।

The subject is ‘we’ and the ‘be’ verb is ‘are’.

বিষয় হল 'আমরা' এবং 'হবে' ক্রিয়া হল 'are'।

Therefore, the correct answer is ‘we are not’,

অতএব, সঠিক উত্তর হল 'আমরা নই',

or the contraction, ‘we aren't good friends.’

বা সংকোচন, 'আমরা ভালো বন্ধু নই।'

The next sentence.

পরের বাক্য।

Can you find the mistake?

আপনি ভুল খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

‘Are John a teacher?’

'জন কি একজন শিক্ষক?'

Think about the subject of this sentence.

এই বাক্যের বিষয় সম্পর্কে চিন্তা করুন.

The subject is ‘John’.

বিষয় 'জন'।

And ‘John’, the subject pronoun is ‘he’.

এবং 'জন', বিষয় সর্বনাম হল 'সে'।

Therefore, we don't use ‘are’, we use ‘is’.

অতএব, আমরা 'are' ব্যবহার করি না, আমরা 'is' ব্যবহার করি।

‘Is John a teacher?’

'জন কি একজন শিক্ষক?'

‘Is John a teacher?’

'জন কি একজন শিক্ষক?'

And finally, ‘It am a puppy.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'এটি একটি কুকুরছানা।'

hmm This one is a big mistake.

হুম এটা একটা বড় ভুল।

The subject here is ‘it’.

এখানে বিষয় হল 'এটি'।

What ‘be’ verb do we use for ‘it’?

আমরা 'এটি' এর জন্য কী 'বে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি?

The correct answer is ‘is’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'হয়'।

So we don't say, ‘It am a puppy,’ we say, ‘It is a puppy.’

তাই আমরা বলি না, 'এটি একটি কুকুরছানা,' আমরা বলি, 'এটি একটি কুকুরছানা।'

Great job guys.

মহান কাজ বলছি.

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

For the next checkup, I want you to think of some other verbs in the present simple

পরবর্তী চেকআপের জন্য, আমি চাই আপনি বর্তমান সরল

tense.

কালের অন্যান্য ক্রিয়াপদের কথা ভাবুন।

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

‘He __ blank __ …’, I want you to think of the verb, ‘like his dinner’.

'তিনি __ ফাঁকা __ …', আমি চাই আপনি ক্রিয়াটি ভাবুন, 'তার রাতের খাবারের মতো'।

What do we do to the verb when the subject is ‘he’, ‘she’, or ‘it’?

আমরা ক্রিয়াপদের কী করব যখন বিষয় 'সে', 'সে', বা 'এটি' হয়?

Remember we add an ‘s’.

মনে রাখবেন আমরা একটি 's' যোগ করি।

‘He likes his dinner.’

'সে তার ডিনার পছন্দ করে।'

For the negative, you can also say, ‘He doesn't like his dinner.’

নেতিবাচক জন্য, আপনি বলতে পারেন, 'তিনি তার ডিনার পছন্দ করেন না।'

The next sentence says, ‘My students __ blank __…’, I want you to think of ‘need’,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'আমার ছাত্ররা __ ফাঁকা __…', আমি চাই আপনি 'প্রয়োজন',

‘…books’.

'...বই' নিয়ে ভাবুন।

What is the subject pronoun for ‘my students’?

'আমার ছাত্রদের' বিষয় সর্বনাম কি?

The correct answer is ‘they’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'তারা'।

If the subject is ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’, or ‘they’, in the present simple tense,

যদি বিষয় 'আমি', 'তুমি', 'আমরা', বা 'তারা' হয়, বর্তমান সরল কালের মধ্যে,

we don't change the verb, we keep it as is.

আমরা ক্রিয়া পরিবর্তন করি না, আমরা এটিকে রাখি।

So the correct answer is, ‘My students need books.’

তাই সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'আমার ছাত্রদের বই দরকার।'

Now for the negative, you can say, ‘My students don't need books.’

এখন নেতিবাচক জন্য, আপনি বলতে পারেন, 'আমার ছাত্রদের বইয়ের প্রয়োজন নেই।'

The next sentence says, ‘I __ blank __…’, think of the verb,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'আমি __ ফাঁকা __…', ক্রিয়াপদটি ভাবুন,

‘…live in London.’

'...লন্ডনে বাস করি।'

What do we do here?

আমরা এখানে কি করব?

Again the subject is ‘I’, therefore we don't change the verb.

আবার বিষয় হল 'আমি', তাই আমরা ক্রিয়া পরিবর্তন করি না।

The correct answer is, ‘I live in London.’

সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'আমি লন্ডনে থাকি।'

What's the negative?

নেতিবাচক কি?

‘I don't live in London.’

'আমি লন্ডনে থাকি না।'

For the next part, I would like for you to try to find the mistake in the sentence.

পরবর্তী অংশের জন্য, আমি চাই আপনি বাক্যটিতে ভুল খুঁজে বের করার চেষ্টা করুন।

‘He doesn't likes math.’

'তিনি গণিত পছন্দ করেন না।'

What's the error here?

এখানে ত্রুটি কি?

Well this is a negative.

ওয়েল এই একটি নেতিবাচক.

‘He doesn't…’, that's correct.

'সে না...', এটা ঠিক।

However, we do not add an ‘s’ when we have ‘doesn't’ in front of ‘it’.

যাইহোক, আমরা একটি 's' যোগ করি না যখন আমাদের 'it'-এর সামনে 'doesn't থাকে।

‘Do he eat candy?’

'সে কি মিছরি খায়?'

Here we have a question.

এখানে আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন আছে.

The subject of the sentence is ‘he’.

বাক্যের বিষয় 'তিনি'।

For ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, when we're making a sentence in the present simple tense,

'সে', 'সে', 'এটি'-এর জন্য, যখন আমরা বর্তমান সরল কালের একটি বাক্য তৈরি করি, তখন আমরা

we use ‘does’ not ‘do’.

'does' ব্যবহার করি না 'do'।

So the correct answer is, ‘Does he eat candy?’

তাই সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'সে কি মিছরি খায়?'

And finally, ‘Sam is play computer games.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'স্যাম কম্পিউটার গেম খেলছে।'

There are two present simple verbs here and we can't have that,

এখানে দুটি সরল ক্রিয়াপদ রয়েছে এবং আমরা তা থাকতে পারি না,

so the correct way to fix this sentence is to get rid of the ‘is’.

তাই এই বাক্যটি ঠিক করার সঠিক উপায় হল 'is' থেকে পরিত্রাণ পাওয়া।

So take that out and say, ‘Sam plays computer games.’

তাই সেটি বের করে নিয়ে বলুন, 'স্যাম কম্পিউটার গেম খেলে।'

Add an ‘s’ because the subject is ‘Sam’ which is a ‘he’.

একটি 's' যোগ করুন কারণ বিষয় হল 'স্যাম' যা একটি 'সে'।

Great job!

দারূন কাজ!

Let's move on to the next practice.

আসুন পরবর্তী অনুশীলনে এগিয়ে যাই।

For this next practice, we're taking a look at routines.

এই পরবর্তী অনুশীলনের জন্য, আমরা রুটিনগুলি দেখে নিচ্ছি।

Remember the present simple tense can be used to describe events that happen regularly.

মনে রাখবেন বর্তমান সাধারণ কালটি নিয়মিত ঘটে যাওয়া ঘটনা বর্ণনা করতে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে।

Let's take a look at the first sentence,

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক,

‘We _ blank _ the bus every day.’

'আমরা প্রতিদিন বাস খালি করি।'

And I want you to use the verb ‘take’.

এবং আমি চাই আপনি 'টাক' ক্রিয়াটি ব্যবহার করুন।

Here we see the clue word ‘every day’ which shows that this is a routine.

এখানে আমরা 'প্রতিদিন' শব্দটি দেখতে পাচ্ছি যা দেখায় যে এটি একটি রুটিন।

The subject of the sentence is ‘we’.

বাক্যের বিষয় 'আমরা'।

In the present simple tense,

বর্তমান সরল কাল,

remember if the subject is ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’, or ‘they’,

মনে রাখবেন যদি বিষয় 'আমি', 'তুমি', 'আমরা', বা 'তারা' হয় তবে

we do not change the verb.

আমরা ক্রিয়া পরিবর্তন করি না।

Therefore the correct answer is, ‘We take the bus every day.’

তাই সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'আমরা প্রতিদিন বাসে উঠি।'

In the second sentence it says, ‘He _ blank _ to school every morning.’

দ্বিতীয় বাক্যে বলা হয়েছে, 'তিনি প্রতিদিন সকালে স্কুলে _ ফাঁকা _।'

Again a routine.

আবার একটা রুটিন।

The subject here is ‘he’.

এখানে বিষয় হল 'সে'।

What do we do if the subject is ‘he’, ‘she’, or ‘it’?

বিষয় 'সে', 'সে', বা 'এটি' হলে আমরা কী করব?

We add ‘s’ or ‘es’ to the verb.

আমরা ক্রিয়ার সাথে 's' বা 'es' যোগ করি।

In this example, the verb is ‘go’, so we have to add ‘es’.

এই উদাহরণে, ক্রিয়াপদটি 'go', তাই আমাদের 'es' যোগ করতে হবে।

‘He goes to school every morning.’

'সে রোজ সকালে স্কুলে যায়।'

In the next sentence, it says, ‘Lizzy not play (in parenthesis) tennis.’

পরের বাক্যে বলা হয়েছে, 'লিজি টেনিস খেলবেন না (বন্ধনীতে)।'

Here I want you to think about the negative form.

এখানে আমি আপনাকে নেতিবাচক ফর্ম সম্পর্কে চিন্তা করতে চাই.

Lizzy is a ‘she’.

লিজি একজন 'সে'।

The subject pronoun is ‘she’ so what do we do for the negative?

বিষয় সর্বনাম 'সে' তাই আমরা নেতিবাচক জন্য কি করব?

We say ‘does not’ or the contraction ‘doesn't play tennis’.

আমরা বলি 'না হয়' বা সংকোচন 'টেনিস খেলি না'।

We do not add an ‘s’ or ‘es’ to the end of the verb.

আমরা ক্রিয়ার শেষে 's' বা 'es' যোগ করি না।

Instead we say ‘doesn't’ or ‘does not’.

পরিবর্তে আমরা বলি 'না করে' বা 'না করে'।

Now I want you to find a mistake in the next sentence.

এখন আমি চাই আপনি পরবর্তী বাক্যে একটি ভুল খুঁজে বের করুন।

‘They watches TV at night.’

'তারা রাতে টিভি দেখে।'

Can you figure out what's wrong with the sentence?

আপনি কি বাক্যে ভুল বুঝতে পারেন?

The subject is ‘they’.

বিষয় 'তারা'।

Therefore, remember, we do not change the verb.

অতএব, মনে রাখবেন, আমরা ক্রিয়া পরিবর্তন করি না।

We say ‘watch’.

আমরা বলি 'ঘড়ি'।

‘They watch TV at night’.

'তারা রাতে টিভি দেখে'।

In the next sentence, or question, it says, ‘Does he plays soccer every week?’

পরের বাক্যে, বা প্রশ্নে, এটি বলে, 'তিনি কি প্রতি সপ্তাহে ফুটবল খেলেন?'

The subject of the sentence is ‘he’.

বাক্যের বিষয় 'তিনি'।

To make a sentence, putting ‘does’ at the beginning is okay,

একটি বাক্য তৈরি করতে, শুরুতে 'does' বসানো ঠিক আছে,

However, we don't put an ‘s’ at the end of ‘play’.

তবে, আমরা 'play'-এর শেষে 's' রাখি না।

Therefore, the correct answer is to simply say,

অতএব, সঠিক উত্তরটি হল সহজভাবে বলা,

‘Does he play soccer every week?’

'সে কি প্রতি সপ্তাহে ফুটবল খেলে?'

And finally, ‘He always forget his book.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'সে সবসময় তার বই ভুলে যায়।'

In this case, the subject is ‘he’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে, বিষয় 'তিনি'।

Remember, again, for he/she/it we add 's' or 'es' to the end of the verb.

আবার মনে রাখবেন, he/she/it এর জন্য আমরা ক্রিয়ার শেষে 's' বা 'es' যোগ করি।

What's the verb in the sentence?

বাক্যে ক্রিয়াপদ কি?

It's ‘forget’.

এটা 'ভুলে যাওয়া'।

Therefore we have to say, ‘He always forgets his book.’

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে, 'তিনি সর্বদা তাঁর বই ভুলে যান।'

Great job.

দারূন কাজ.

Let's move on to the next practice.

আসুন পরবর্তী অনুশীলনে এগিয়ে যাই।

In this checkup, we'll take a look at how the present simple tense can be used to describe

এই চেকআপে, আমরা ভবিষ্যতের ঘটনা বর্ণনা করতে বর্তমান সরল কাল কীভাবে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে তা

future events.

দেখব।

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘The airplane _ blank _ tonight.’

তাতে লেখা, 'বিমান _ ফাঁকা_ আজ রাতে।'

And we're looking at the verb ‘leave’.

এবং আমরা 'ছাড়' ক্রিয়াটি দেখছি।

What is the subject of the sentence?

বাক্যের বিষয়বস্তু কী?

The correct answer is ‘airplane’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'বিমান'।

What subject pronoun do we use for ‘airplane’?

আমরা 'বিমান' এর জন্য কোন বিষয়ের সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করি?

It's ‘it’.

এটাই সেটা'.

Remember in the present simple tense, for ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, we add an ‘s’

বর্তমান সরল কাল মনে রাখবেন, 'সে', 'সে', '

or ‘es’ to the verb.

এটি'-এর জন্য আমরা ক্রিয়াপদে একটি 's' বা 'es' যোগ করি।

The verb here is ‘leave’ so we simply add an ‘s’.

এখানে ক্রিয়াপদটি 'leave' তাই আমরা শুধু একটি 's' যোগ করি।

The correct answer is, ‘The airplane leaves tonight.’

সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'আজ রাতে বিমান ছাড়ে।'

In the second sentence, it says, ‘Does the movie _blank_ soon?’

দ্বিতীয় বাক্যে, এটা বলে, 'চলচ্চিত্রটি কি শীঘ্রই _blank_?'

And we're using the verb ‘start’.

এবং আমরা 'শুরু' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করছি।

What is the subject of this sentence?

এই বাক্যটির বিষয় কী?

It’s ‘movie’.

এটা 'মুভি'।

And what subject pronoun do we use for movie?

এবং আমরা সিনেমার জন্য কোন বিষয়ের সর্বনাম ব্যবহার করি?

It’s ‘it’.

এটাই সেটা'.

So it's like saying, ‘Does it _ blank _ soon?’

তাই এটা বলার মত, 'এটা কি শীঘ্রই ফাঁকা হয়ে যাবে?'

Well this is a question, so we already have the correct word in the front - ‘does’.

ওয়েল এটি একটি প্রশ্ন, তাই আমরা ইতিমধ্যে সামনে সঠিক শব্দ আছে - 'does'.

For he/she/it, when we're asking a question, we use ‘does’.

তিনি/সে/এর জন্য, যখন আমরা একটি প্রশ্ন জিজ্ঞাসা করি, আমরা 'করতে' ব্যবহার করি।

Now all we have to do is use the same verb in its base form,

এখন আমাদের যা করতে হবে তা হল একই ক্রিয়াপদটি বেস ফর্মে ব্যবহার করা,

so ‘Does the movie start soon?’

তাই 'সিনেমাটি কি শীঘ্রই শুরু হবে?'

We do not add an ‘s’ or ‘es’ here.

আমরা এখানে 's' বা 'es' যোগ করি না।

Finally, it says, ‘Viki _ blank _ tomorrow.’

সবশেষে বলা হয়েছে, 'ভিকি _ খালি _ আগামীকাল।'

The subject of the sentence is ‘Vicki’.

বাক্যের বিষয় 'ভিকি'।

‘Vicki’ is a girl so the subject pronoun is ‘she’.

'ভিকি' একটি মেয়ে তাই বিষয় সর্বনাম 'সে'।

You'll remember now that for… in this case, we put ‘works’.

আপনি এখন মনে রাখবেন যে... এই ক্ষেত্রে, আমরা 'কাজ' রাখি।

w-o-r-k-s ‘works’.

কাজ 'কাজ'।

‘Vicki works tomorrow.’

'ভিকি কাল কাজ করবে।'

Now let's find the mistakes in the sentence below.

এবার নিচের বাক্যের ভুলগুলো খুঁজে বের করা যাক।

‘He do leave at 3:30 p.m.’

'সে বিকাল সাড়ে ৩টায় চলে যায়'

Actually there's only one mistake.

আসলে একটাই ভুল।

Can you find it?

তুমি কি এটা খুজে দিতে পার?

‘He do leave at 3:30 p.m.’

'তিনি বিকাল 3:30 টায় চলে যান'

We do not need the ‘do’ here.

আমাদের এখানে 'ডু' করার দরকার নেই।

We only use ‘do’ in a question or in the negative form.

আমরা শুধুমাত্র একটি প্রশ্ন বা নেতিবাচক আকারে 'do' ব্যবহার করি।

But also the subject is ‘he’, so we would use ‘does’.

কিন্তু বিষয় 'তিনি', তাই আমরা 'করতে' ব্যবহার করব।

Either way we don't need this here.

যেভাবেই হোক আমাদের এখানে এর দরকার নেই।

Well now we have the verb ‘leave’ with the subject ‘he’.

আচ্ছা এখন আমাদের কাছে ক্রিয়াপদ আছে 'leave' বিষয়ের সাথে 'he'।

Do you know what to do?

তুমি কি জান কি করতে হবে?

We simply change this to ‘leaves’.

আমরা কেবল এটিকে 'পাতা' এ পরিবর্তন করি।

Just like we did in the first sentence.

ঠিক যেমন আমরা প্রথম বাক্যে করেছি।

‘He leaves at 3:30 p.m.’

'তিনি বিকাল 3:30 টায় চলে যান'

In the next sentence, ‘They don't start school today.’

পরের বাক্যে, 'তারা আজ স্কুল শুরু করবে না।'

We have a negative sentence.

আমরা একটি নেতিবাচক বাক্য আছে.

‘They don't…’, that's correct.

'তারা করে না...', এটা ঠিক।

‘…do not’ is correct.

'...করবেন না' সঠিক।

For subject pronoun ‘they’.

বিষয় সর্বনামের জন্য 'তারা'।

However, in the negative form, we don't have to change the main verb at all.

যাইহোক, নেতিবাচক আকারে, আমাদের মূল ক্রিয়াটি পরিবর্তন করতে হবে না।

Therefore, all we will do is say, ‘They don't start school today.’

অতএব, আমরা যা করব তা হল, 'তারা আজ স্কুল শুরু করবে না।'

No ‘s’.

না 'স'।

Finally, ‘Does we eat at noon?’

অবশেষে, 'আমরা কি দুপুরে খাই?'

Take a look.

দেখা যাক.

What is the subject or subject pronoun in the sentence?

বাক্যে বিষয় বা বিষয় সর্বনাম কী?

The correct answer is ‘we’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'আমরা'।

Think about the question form.

প্রশ্ন ফর্ম সম্পর্কে চিন্তা করুন.

Do we say ‘do’ or ‘does’ in the question form for the subject pronoun ‘we’?

আমরা কি 'আমরা' বিষয়ের সর্বনামের জন্য প্রশ্ন আকারে 'করতে' বা 'করতে' বলি?

The correct answer is ‘do’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'করুন'।

We say ‘do’.

আমরা বলি 'কর'।

So the correct way to say this sentence or question is,

তাই এই বাক্য বা প্রশ্নটি বলার সঠিক উপায় হল,

‘Do we eat at noon?’

'আমরা কি দুপুরে খাই?'

Great job guys.

মহান কাজ বলছি.

You're done with the practice.

আপনি অনুশীলন শেষ.

Thank you for your hard work.

আপনার কঠোর পরিশ্রমের জন্য আপনাকে ধন্যবাদ.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Good job guys.

ভালো করেছো বন্ধুরা.

You put in a lot of practice today.

আপনি আজ অনেক অনুশীলন করা.

The present simple tense is not easy, and I'm really happy to see how hard you guys

বর্তমান সরল কাল সহজ নয়, এবং আপনি এটা আয়ত্ত করার জন্য কতটা পরিশ্রম করেছেন তা দেখে আমি সত্যিই খুশি

worked on mastering it.

।

Be sure to check out my other videos and thank you for watching this video.

আমার অন্যান্য ভিডিওগুলি দেখতে ভুলবেন না এবং এই ভিডিওটি দেখার জন্য আপনাকে ধন্যবাদ।

I'll see you next time.

আমি পরের বার দেখা হবে.

Bye.

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody. I'm Esther.

সবাই কেমন আছেন. আমি ইস্টার।

I'm so excited to be teaching you the  present continuous tense in this video.

এই ভিডিওতে আপনাকে বর্তমান একটানা কাল শেখাতে পেরে আমি খুবই উত্তেজিত।

This tense is used to describe: an action that's happening right now,

এই কালটি বর্ণনা করতে ব্যবহৃত হয়: একটি ক্রিয়া যা এই মুহূর্তে ঘটছে,

a longer action in progress , and something happening in the near future.

একটি দীর্ঘ ক্রিয়া চলছে, এবং নিকট ভবিষ্যতে কিছু ঘটছে।

There's a lot to learn, but don't worry I'll guide you through it.

অনেক কিছু শেখার আছে, কিন্তু চিন্তা করবেন না আমি এর মাধ্যমে আপনাকে গাইড করব।

Let's get started.

চল শুরু করি.

The present continuous tense is used to talk  about actions that are happening right now.

বর্তমান অবিচ্ছিন্ন কালটি বর্তমানে ঘটছে এমন কর্ম সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে ব্যবহৃত হয়।

For example,

উদাহরণস্বরূপ,

‘I'm teaching English’ and ‘You are studying English.’

'আমি ইংরেজি শেখাচ্ছি' এবং 'আপনি ইংরেজি শিখছেন।'

Let's take a look at some more examples.

আসুন আরও কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first sentence says, ‘He is watching a movie’.

প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে, 'তিনি একটি সিনেমা দেখছেন'।

We start with the subject and a ‘be’ verb.

আমরা বিষয় এবং একটি 'হও' ক্রিয়া দিয়ে শুরু করি।

In this case, the subject is ‘he’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে, বিষয় 'তিনি'।

For ‘he’ / ‘she’ and ‘it’,  we use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

'he'/'she' এবং 'it'-এর জন্য আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া 'is' ব্যবহার করি।

Then you'll notice I added an ‘-ing’  to the end of the verb ‘watch’.

তারপর আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমি 'ঘড়ি' ক্রিয়ার শেষে একটি '-ing' যোগ করেছি।

‘He is watching a movie.’

'সে একটা সিনেমা দেখছে।'

The next sentence says, ‘Tim is playing a computer game.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'টিম একটি কম্পিউটার গেম খেলছে।'

He's doing that right now.

সে এখন সেটাই করছে।

Tim is a ‘he’, therefore, again  we use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

Tim হল 'he', তাই আমরা আবার 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি 'is'।

And again you'll notice I added  ‘-ing’ to the end of the verb.

এবং আবার আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমি ক্রিয়ার শেষে '-ing' যোগ করেছি।

The next sentence says,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে,

‘The machine is making a noise.’

'যন্ত্রটি শব্দ করছে।'

Now pay attention to the subject, ‘the machine’.

এখন বিষয়ের দিকে মনোযোগ দিন, 'যন্ত্র'।

What is the proper pronoun?

সঠিক সর্বনাম কি?

The answer is ‘it’, therefore  we use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

উত্তর হল 'এটি', তাই আমরা 'হবে' ক্রিয়া 'is' ব্যবহার করি।

‘The machine is making a noise.’

'যন্ত্রটা আওয়াজ করছে।'

We can also say, ‘It is making a noise’. Or the contraction, ‘It's making a noise’.

আমরা এটাও বলতে পারি, 'এটা একটা আওয়াজ করছে'। অথবা সংকোচন, 'এটা একটা শব্দ করছে'।

And finally, ‘Tom and Ben are speaking English’.

এবং অবশেষে, 'টম এবং বেন ইংরেজিতে কথা বলছেন'।

In this case, you'll notice  that we use the ‘be’ verb ‘are’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে, আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন যে আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি 'are'।

Can you figure out why?

আপনি কেন বুঝতে পারেন?

That's because Tom and Ben - the subject pronoun for these two is ‘they’.

এর কারণ টম এবং বেন - এই দুজনের বিষয় সর্বনাম হল 'তারা'।

‘They are speaking English.’

'তারা ইংরেজি বলছে।'

Let's move on to the next usage.

এর পরবর্তী ব্যবহারে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

The present continuous tense is also used to describe a longer action in progress.

বর্তমান অবিচ্ছিন্ন কালটিও একটি দীর্ঘ ক্রিয়াকলাপের অগ্রগতি বর্ণনা করতে ব্যবহৃত হয়।

Even though you might not be  doing the action right now.

যদিও আপনি এই মুহূর্তে কাজটি করছেন না।

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first sentence says,

প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে,

‘I'm reading an interesting book these days.’

'আমি আজকাল একটি আকর্ষণীয় বই পড়ছি।'

In this case, the subject is  ‘I’, so the ‘be’ verb is ‘am’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে, বিষয় 'আমি', তাই 'হবে' ক্রিয়াটি 'আমি'।

In this example, we use the contraction  ‘I'm’ by putting ‘I’ and ‘am’ together.

এই উদাহরণে, আমরা 'আমি' এবং 'আমি' একসাথে রেখে সংকোচন 'আমি' ব্যবহার করি।

Again, you'll notice there's  an ‘-ing’ after the verb.

আবার, আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন ক্রিয়াটির পরে একটি '-ing' আছে।

The next sentence says,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে,

‘You are studying to become an English teacher.’

'আপনি ইংরেজি শিক্ষক হওয়ার জন্য পড়াশোনা করছেন।'

The subject here is ‘you’,

এখানে বিষয় হল 'তুমি',

therefore the ‘be’ verb is ‘are’.

তাই 'বে' ক্রিয়া হল 'are'।

Next, ‘Steven is preparing for the IELTS exam.’

পরবর্তী, 'স্টিভেন IELTS পরীক্ষার জন্য প্রস্তুতি নিচ্ছেন।'

The subject here is ‘Steven’ which is a ‘he’,

এখানে বিষয় হল 'স্টিভেন' যা একটি 'হি',

therefore we use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

তাই আমরা 'হবে' ক্রিয়া 'is' ব্যবহার করি।

And finally, ‘John and June are working at a company.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'জন এবং জুন একটি কোম্পানিতে কাজ করছে।'

If you look at the subject ‘John and June’, the pronoun for that is ‘they’.

আপনি যদি 'জন এবং জুন' বিষয়ের দিকে তাকান তবে এর সর্বনামটি 'তারা'।

That's why we use the ‘be’ verb ‘are’.

তাই আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি 'are'।

‘They are working at a company.’

'ওরা একটা কোম্পানিতে কাজ করছে।'

Let's move on to the next usage.

এর পরবর্তী ব্যবহারে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

The present continuous is also used  to talk about near future plans.

বর্তমান ধারাবাহিকটি নিকট ভবিষ্যতের পরিকল্পনা সম্পর্কে কথা বলতেও ব্যবহৃত হয়।

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

‘She is meeting some friends tonight.’

'সে আজ রাতে কিছু বন্ধুদের সাথে দেখা করছে।'

That's going to happen in the near future.

যে অদূর ভবিষ্যতে ঘটতে যাচ্ছে.

You'll notice that we have 'she', so the ‘be’ verb is ‘is’.

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন যে আমাদের 'সে' আছে, তাই 'হওয়া' ক্রিয়াটি 'হয়'।

And then we added an ‘-ing’ to the end of the verb ‘meet’.

এবং তারপর আমরা 'meet' ক্রিয়ার শেষে একটি '-ing' যোগ করেছি।

The next example says, ‘We are going on vacation in July.’

পরবর্তী উদাহরণ বলে, 'আমরা জুলাই মাসে ছুটিতে যাচ্ছি।'

The subject here is ‘we’, therefore we use the ‘be’ verb ‘are’.

এখানে বিষয় হল 'we', তাই আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি 'are'।

We can also use a contraction and say, ‘We're going on vacation in July.’

আমরা একটি সংকোচনও ব্যবহার করতে পারি এবং বলতে পারি, 'আমরা জুলাই মাসে ছুটিতে যাচ্ছি।'

Again, another near future plan.

আবার, আরেকটি নিকট ভবিষ্যতের পরিকল্পনা।

The next example says,

পরবর্তী উদাহরণ বলে,

‘David is learning to drive tomorrow.’

'ডেভিড আগামীকাল গাড়ি চালানো শিখছে।'

‘tomorrow’ is the near future.

'আগামীকাল' হল নিকট ভবিষ্যৎ।

‘David’ is the subject.

'ডেভিড' বিষয়।

‘David’ is a ‘he’, so we use ‘is’.

'ডেভিড' হল 'সে', তাই আমরা 'হয়' ব্যবহার করি।

And lastly, ‘Vicki and I are teaching English next week.’

এবং সবশেষে, 'ভিকি এবং আমি আগামী সপ্তাহে ইংরেজি পড়াচ্ছি।'

‘Vicky and I’… If we think about the subject pronoun is ‘we’.

'ভিকি এবং আমি'… যদি আমরা বিষয়ের কথা চিন্তা করি তাহলে সর্বনামটি হল 'আমরা'।

That's why we used ‘are’. ‘We are teaching.’

তাই আমরা 'are' ব্যবহার করেছি। 'আমরা শিক্ষা দিচ্ছি।'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's talk about the negative  form of the present continuous tense.

এখন চলুন বর্তমান ধারাবাহিক কালের ঋণাত্মক রূপ সম্পর্কে কথা বলা যাক।

I have some examples here.

আমি এখানে কিছু উদাহরণ আছে.

These two examples are for actions that are happening right now, or longer actions.

এই দুটি উদাহরণ এই মুহূর্তে ঘটছে যে কর্মের জন্য, বা দীর্ঘ কর্মের জন্য.

These last two are for near future plans.

এই শেষ দুটি নিকট ভবিষ্যতের পরিকল্পনার জন্য।

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

The first sentence says, ‘I am not having fun.’

প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে, 'আমি মজা করছি না।'

Now that's not true for me because I am having fun,

এখন এটা আমার জন্য সত্য নয় কারণ আমি মজা করছি,

but in this example I am not having fun.

কিন্তু এই উদাহরণে আমি মজা করছি না।

You'll notice that the word ‘not’ goes  between the ‘be’ verb and the ‘verb -ing’.

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন যে 'not' শব্দটি 'be' ক্রিয়া এবং 'verb -ing'-এর মধ্যে যায়।

In the second example it says, ‘Jane isn't doing her homework.’

দ্বিতীয় উদাহরণে বলা হয়েছে, 'জেন তার বাড়ির কাজ করছে না।'

Here we use the contraction ‘isn't’ for ‘is not’,

এখানে আমরা 'is not'-এর জন্য 'isn't' সংকোচন ব্যবহার করি,

so just like the first sentence, we put ‘not’ between ‘is’ and ‘verb -ing’.

তাই প্রথম বাক্যটির মতোই আমরা 'is' এবং 'verb -ing'-এর মধ্যে 'not' রাখি।

The next sentence says, ‘You're not seeing him tonight.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'আপনি আজ রাতে তাকে দেখছেন না।'

Here we have a contraction for ‘you are’.

এখানে 'তুমি আছো' এর জন্য আমাদের একটি সংকোচন রয়েছে।

‘You're not seeing him tonight.’

'আপনি আজ রাতে তাকে দেখতে পাচ্ছেন না।'

And finally, ‘We are not running tomorrow morning.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'আমরা কাল সকালে দৌড়াচ্ছি না।'

Here we have the subject ‘we’, therefore, we use the ‘be’ verb ‘are’.

এখানে আমাদের সাবজেক্ট আছে 'we', তাই আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি 'are'।

Don’t forget to add a ‘not’ after that to make it negative.

এটিকে নেতিবাচক করতে এর পরে একটি 'না' যোগ করতে ভুলবেন না।

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's talk about how to form ‘be’ verb  questions in the present continuous tense.

এখন চলুন বর্তমান ধারাবাহিক কালে 'be' ক্রিয়াপদ প্রশ্ন কীভাবে গঠন করা যায় সে সম্পর্কে কথা বলা যাক।

The first example here says,

এখানে প্রথম উদাহরণ বলে,

‘Is he waiting for you?’

'সে কি তোমার জন্য অপেক্ষা করছে?'

or ‘Is he waiting for you?’

অথবা 'সে কি তোমার জন্য অপেক্ষা করছে?'

We start with the ‘be’ verb.

আমরা 'হতে' ক্রিয়া দিয়ে শুরু করি।

Take a look at the subject though.

যদিও বিষয়টি দেখে নিন।

The subject is ‘he’ and that's why we start with the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

বিষয় হল 'সে' এবং সেজন্য আমরা 'হতে' ক্রিয়া 'is' দিয়ে শুরু করি।

‘Is he waiting for you?’

'সে কি তোমার জন্য অপেক্ষা করছে?'

You can answer, ‘Yes, he is.’ or ‘No he isn't.’

আপনি উত্তর দিতে পারেন, 'হ্যাঁ, তিনি।' অথবা 'না সে নয়।'

The second sentence says,

দ্বিতীয় বাক্যটি বলে,

‘Are you coming to class?’

'আপনি কি ক্লাসে আসছেন?'

The subject here is ‘you’ and  that's why we start with ‘are’.

এখানে সাবজেক্ট হল 'তুমি' আর সেজন্য আমরা 'are' দিয়ে শুরু করি।

‘Are you coming to class?’

'ক্লাসে আসছেন?'

You can answer, ‘Yes I am.’ or ‘No, I'm not.’

আপনি উত্তর দিতে পারেন, 'হ্যাঁ আমি।' অথবা 'না, আমি নই।'

The next question says, ‘Is he preparing to study in Canada?’

পরের প্রশ্ন বলে, 'তিনি কি কানাডায় পড়ার প্রস্তুতি নিচ্ছেন?'

The subject is ‘he’, and so we start with ‘is’.

বিষয় হল 'সে', এবং তাই আমরা 'হয়' দিয়ে শুরু করি।

The answer can be, ‘Yes, he is.’ or it can also be ‘No, he isn't.’

উত্তর হতে পারে, 'হ্যাঁ, তিনি।' অথবা এটাও হতে পারে 'না, সে নয়।'

Finally the last question says, ‘Are they going out tonight?’

অবশেষে শেষ প্রশ্ন বলে, 'তারা কি আজ রাতে বাইরে যাচ্ছে?'

The subject here is ‘they’, and so we start with ‘are’.

এখানে বিষয় হল 'তারা', এবং তাই আমরা 'আরে' দিয়ে শুরু করি।

The answer can be ‘Yes, they are.’ or ‘No, they aren't.’

উত্তর হতে পারে 'হ্যাঁ, তারা।' অথবা 'না, তারা নয়।'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's talk about the WH question  form for the present continuous tense.

এখন বর্তমান ধারাবাহিক কালের জন্য WH প্রশ্ন ফর্ম সম্পর্কে কথা বলা যাক।

I have some examples here

আমার এখানে কিছু উদাহরণ আছে

and you'll notice that we start with the WH questions:

এবং আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন যে আমরা WH প্রশ্ন দিয়ে শুরু করি:

what, where, when, who, why, and how.

কি, কোথায়, কখন, কে, কেন এবং কিভাবে।

What comes after?

পরে কি আসে?

You'll notice it's the ‘be’ verbs: ‘are’, ‘is’, and if the subject is ‘I’, ‘am’.

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন এটি 'হবে' ক্রিয়া: 'are', 'is', এবং বিষয় যদি হয় 'I', 'am'।

So after that you have the subject and then the verb -ing.

সুতরাং এর পরে আপনার কাছে subject এবং তারপর verb -ing আছে।

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘What are you doing?’

'তুমি কি করছো?'

I'm asking about right now.

আমি এখন সম্পর্কে জিজ্ঞাসা করছি.

For example, ‘I'm teaching English.’

যেমন, 'আমি ইংরেজি শেখাচ্ছি।'

‘Where are you going?’ ‘I'm going to the store.’

'আপনি কোথায় যাচ্ছেন?' 'আমি দোকানে যাচ্ছি.'

‘When is it starting?’ ‘It's starting at 3.’

'কবে থেকে শুরু হচ্ছে?' 'এটা শুরু হচ্ছে ৩টায়।'

I can be talking about a movie a show anything can be ‘it’.

আমি একটি চলচ্চিত্র সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে পারি একটি শো যেকোন কিছু হতে পারে 'এটি'।

‘Who is she talking to?’ ‘She's talking to Bob.’

'সে কার সাথে কথা বলছে?' 'সে ববের সাথে কথা বলছে।'

‘Why is she crying?’ ‘She's crying because she's sad.’

'সে কাঁদছে কেন?' 'সে কাঁদছে কারণ সে দুঃখিত।'

And finally, ‘How is it going?’ ‘It's going well.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'কেমন চলছে?' 'এটা ভাল যাচ্ছে.'

For this checkup of the present continuous tense,

বর্তমান একটানা কালের এই চেকআপের জন্য,

we'll look at how this tense can be used to  describe an action that's happening right now.

আমরা দেখব কিভাবে এই কালটি এখন ঘটছে এমন একটি ক্রিয়া বর্ণনা করতে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে।

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘You -blank- learning English.’

'তুমি খালি- ইংরেজি শিখছ।'

Remember for this tense, we start  with the subject and the ‘be’ verb

এই সময়ের জন্য মনে রাখবেন, আমরা subject এবং 'be' ক্রিয়া

and then the verb ‘-ing’.

এবং তারপর ক্রিয়াটি '-ing' দিয়ে শুরু করি।

We already have the verb ‘-ing’ here, so we need the ‘be’ verb.

আমাদের এখানে ইতিমধ্যেই '-ing' ক্রিয়া আছে, তাই আমাদের 'be' ক্রিয়া প্রয়োজন।

The subject in the first sentence is ‘you’.

প্রথম বাক্যটির বিষয় হল 'তুমি'।

For ‘you’, ‘we’, and ‘they’,  we use the ‘be’ verb - ‘are’,

'আপনি', 'আমরা', এবং 'তারা'-এর জন্য, আমরা 'হও' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি - 'আরে',

so the correct answer is,

তাই সঠিক উত্তর হল,

‘You are learning English’ right now.

'আপনি এখন ইংরেজি শিখছেন'।

The next sentence says,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে,

‘She _blank_ not watching TV.’

'সে _blank_ টিভি দেখছে না।'

This is the negative form of  the present continuous tense.

এটি বর্তমান অবিচ্ছিন্ন কালের নেতিবাচক রূপ।

We have the word ‘not’ before the verb ‘-ing’,

আমাদের '-ing' ক্রিয়াপদের আগে 'not' শব্দটি আছে,

However, we're missing the ‘be’ verb again.

যাইহোক, আমরা আবার 'be' ক্রিয়াটি মিস করছি।

What is the be verb to use  if the subject is ‘she’?

সাবজেক্ট 'সে' হলে be ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করতে হবে কি?

the correct answer is ‘is’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'হয়'।

‘She is not watching TV.’

'সে টিভি দেখছে না।'

This one says, ‘I _blank_ studying now.’

এই একজন বলছে, 'আমি এখন পড়াশোনা করছি।'

The subject here is ‘I’.

এখানে বিষয় হল 'আমি'।

Again think of the ‘be’ verb that goes before the subject ‘I’.

আবার 'হতে' ক্রিয়াটির কথা ভাবুন যা 'আমি' এর আগে যায়।

The ‘be’ verb is ‘am’.

'হবে' ক্রিয়া হল 'আমি'।

‘I am studying now.’

'আমি এখন পড়ছি.'

We can also use a contraction and say, ‘I'm studying now’

আমরা একটি সংকোচনও ব্যবহার করতে পারি এবং বলতে পারি, 'আমি এখন অধ্যয়ন করছি'

If we wanted to turn this into the negative form,

যদি আমরা এটিকে নেতিবাচক আকারে পরিণত করতে চাই তবে আমরা

we can also say, ‘I'm not studying now.’

বলতে পারি, 'আমি এখন পড়াশোনা করছি না।'

Now, take a look at the next  sentence and find the mistake.

এখন, পরবর্তী বাক্যটি দেখুন এবং ভুলটি সন্ধান করুন।

‘Layla is watch a movie.’

'লায়লা একটা সিনেমা দেখছে।'

Here we have the subject and the subject pronoun for Layla would be ‘she’.

এখানে আমাদের কাছে বিষয় আছে এবং লায়লার বিষয় সর্বনাম হবে 'সে'।

We have the correct ‘be’ verb - ‘is’,

আমাদের সঠিক 'বে' ক্রিয়া আছে - 'is',

However, you'll notice we forgot  the ‘-ing’ at the end of the verb.

যাইহোক, আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমরা ক্রিয়ার শেষে '-ing' ভুলে গেছি।

We need to say, ‘watching’.

আমাদের বলতে হবে, 'দেখছি'।

‘Layla is watching a movie.’

'লায়লা সিনেমা দেখছে।'

The next sentence says,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে,

‘They playing soccer now.’

'তারা এখন ফুটবল খেলছে।'

What's missing?

কি অনুপস্থিত?

If you got it the correct answer is we need the ‘be’ verb – ‘are’

যদি আপনি এটি পেয়ে থাকেন তাহলে সঠিক উত্তর হল আমাদের 'হবে' ক্রিয়া- 'আরে' প্রয়োজন

because the subject is ‘they’.

কারণ বিষয় হল 'তারা'।

‘They are playing soccer now.’

'ওরা এখন ফুটবল খেলছে।'

And finally, ‘What do you do?’

এবং অবশেষে, 'তুমি কি কর?'

If you want to ask somebody  what they're doing right now,

আপনি যদি কাউকে জিজ্ঞাসা করতে চান যে তারা এই মুহূর্তে কী করছে,

you say, 'what’... and the ‘be’ verb – ‘are... you.. doing?’

আপনি বলবেন, 'কী'... এবং 'হও' ক্রিয়া - 'আচ্ছা... আপনি.. করছেন?'

‘What are you doing?’

'তুমি কি করছো?'

Let's move on to the next practice.

আসুন পরবর্তী অনুশীলনে এগিয়ে যাই।

For this checkup we'll talk about the present continuous tense

এই চেকআপের জন্য আমরা বর্তমান অবিচ্ছিন্ন কাল সম্পর্কে কথা বলব

and how it can be used to describe an action that started in the past and continues today.

এবং এটি অতীতে শুরু হওয়া এবং আজ চলতে থাকা একটি ক্রিয়া বর্ণনা করতে কীভাবে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে।

It's a longer action.

এটি একটি দীর্ঘ কর্ম.

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘He _blank_ studying economics.’

'তিনি অর্থনীতিতে পড়েন।'

Remember for this tense, we take the  subject, a ‘be’ verb, and then verb ‘-ing’.

মনে রাখবেন এই কালের জন্য, আমরা সাবজেক্টটি নিই, একটি 'বে' ক্রিয়া, এবং তারপর ক্রিয়া '-ing'।

Here we already have the verb ‘-ing’, ‘studying’.

এখানে আমাদের ইতিমধ্যেই '-ing', 'studying' ক্রিয়া আছে।

So what are we missing?

তাই আমরা কি অনুপস্থিত?

The ‘be’ verb.

'হও' ক্রিয়া।

The correct ‘be’ verb for  the subject ‘he’ is ‘is’.

'সে' বিষয়ের জন্য সঠিক 'হবে' ক্রিয়া হল 'is'।

So, ‘He is studying economics.’

তাই, 'তিনি অর্থনীতি নিয়ে পড়াশোনা করছেন।'

The next sentence says, ‘They're _blank_ for the fight.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'তারা লড়াইয়ের জন্য _blank_'

The verb we want to use is ‘train’.

আমরা যে ক্রিয়াপদটি ব্যবহার করতে চাই তা হল 'ট্রেন'।

Now we already have the 'be' verb here.

এখন আমাদের এখানে 'হবে' ক্রিয়া আছে।

It's in the contraction ‘there’  because it's ‘they are’.

এটি 'সেখানে' সংকোচনের মধ্যে রয়েছে কারণ এটি 'তারা'।

All we have to do now is add ‘-ing’ to the verb.

আমাদের এখন যা করতে হবে তা হল ক্রিয়ার সাথে '-ing' যোগ করা।

‘They're training for the fight these days.’

'তারা আজকাল লড়াইয়ের জন্য প্রশিক্ষণ নিচ্ছে।'

And ‘We _blank_ teaching at the school.’

এবং 'আমরা _খালি_ স্কুলে পড়াই।'

Again we're missing the ‘be’ verb.

আবার আমরা 'হতে' ক্রিয়াটি হারিয়ে ফেলছি।

What is the ‘be’ verb for ‘we’?

'আমরা'-এর 'হও' ক্রিয়া কী?

The correct answer is ‘are’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'হয়'।

‘We are teaching at the school.’

'আমরা স্কুলে পড়াচ্ছি।'

Now let's look for the  mistakes in the next sentence.

এবার পরের বাক্যে ভুলগুলো খোঁজা যাক।

‘Ben is study to become a doctor.’

'বেন ডাক্তার হওয়ার জন্য পড়াশোনা করছেন।'

Can you find the error?

আপনি ত্রুটি খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

Well we have the subject and we have the proper ‘be verb’.

আচ্ছা আমাদের সাবজেক্ট আছে এবং আমাদের সঠিক 'be verb' আছে।

What we're missing is the ‘-ing’ at the end of ‘study’.

আমরা যা অনুপস্থিত করছি তা হল 'অধ্যয়ন' শেষে '-ing'।

The correct answer is, ‘Ben is studying to become a doctor’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'বেন ডাক্তার হওয়ার জন্য পড়াশোনা করছে'।

Let's look at the next sentence.

এর পরের বাক্য তাকান.

‘I don't reading that book.’

'আমি সেই বই পড়ি না।'

hmm

‘I don't reading that book.’

hmm 'I don't reading that book.'

To form the negative in the present continuous, we don't use ‘do’ or ‘does’

বর্তমান ক্রমাগত নেতিবাচক গঠন করতে, আমরা 'করুন' বা 'করতে' ব্যবহার করি না

We use the ‘be’ verb. What is the be verb for ‘I’?

আমরা 'হবে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি। 'আমি'-এর be ক্রিয়া কী?

The correct answer is ‘am’.

সঠিক উত্তর হল 'আমি'।

‘I am not reading that book.’

'আমি সেই বই পড়ি না।'

There is no contraction for ‘am not’.

'আমি নেই' এর জন্য কোন সংকোচন নেই।

Finally, ‘They are to learn English.’

অবশেষে, 'তারা ইংরেজি শিখবে।'

We have the subject and we have the correct ‘be’ verb,

আমাদের সাবজেক্ট আছে এবং আমাদের সঠিক 'বে' ক্রিয়া আছে,

but remember we need verb ‘-ing’.

তবে মনে রাখবেন আমাদের '-ing' ক্রিয়া দরকার।

Therefore, the correct answer is,

অতএব, সঠিক উত্তর হল,

‘They are learning English.’

'তারা ইংরেজি শিখছে।'

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

For this checkup we'll take a look at how the present continuous tense

এই চেকআপের জন্য আমরা ভবিষ্যৎ পরিকল্পনা সম্পর্কে কথা বলার জন্য

can be used to talk about future plans.

বর্তমান ধারাবাহিক কাল কীভাবে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে তা দেখব ।

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

The first sentence says, ‘They're play a game tonight.’

প্রথম বাক্যটি বলে, 'তারা আজ রাতে একটি খেলা খেলছে।'

The verb we want to use is ‘play’.

আমরা যে ক্রিয়াটি ব্যবহার করতে চাই তা হল 'খেলা'।

Remember we start with the subject  and here we have it, ‘they’.

মনে রাখবেন আমরা বিষয় দিয়ে শুরু করি এবং এখানে আমাদের এটি আছে, 'তারা'।

Then we have the ‘be’ verb.

তারপর আমরা 'be' ক্রিয়া আছে.

In this case we used a contraction  for ‘they are – ‘they’re’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে আমরা 'তারা আছে - 'তারা' এর জন্য একটি সংকোচন ব্যবহার করেছি।

That's correct.

এটাই সঠিক.

After that we have to add ‘-ing’ to the end of the verb,

এর পরে আমাদের ক্রিয়ার শেষে '-ing' যোগ করতে হবে,

so the correct answer is, ‘They're playing a game tonight.’

তাই সঠিক উত্তর হল, 'তারা আজ রাতে একটি খেলা খেলছে।'

The next sentence says, 'We _blank_ not studying tomorrow.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'আমরা আগামীকাল পড়াশোনা করব না।'

Looks good but there's a word that's missing.

ভালো লাগছে কিন্তু একটা শব্দ নেই যা নেই।

This is the negative form because we have ‘not’.

এই নেতিবাচক ফর্ম কারণ আমরা 'না' আছে.

We simply need the ‘be’ verb for ‘we’.

আমাদের কেবল 'আমরা' এর জন্য 'হও' ক্রিয়াটি প্রয়োজন।

The correct ‘be’ verb is ‘are’. ‘We are not studying tomorrow.’

সঠিক 'be' ক্রিয়া হল 'are'। 'আমরা কাল পড়াশুনা করছি না।'

The next sentence says, ‘Lynn is _blank_ out tonight.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'লিন আজ রাতে _blank_ আউট।'

and we want to use the verb ‘go’.

এবং আমরা 'go' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করতে চাই।

Remember 'Lynn' and then the ‘be’ verb – ‘is’.

'লিন' মনে রাখবেন এবং তারপরে 'হও' ক্রিয়া - 'হয়'।

That's correct. All we have to do is add ‘-ing’.

এটাই সঠিক. আমাদের যা করতে হবে তা হল '-ing' যোগ করা।

‘Lynn is going out tonight.’

'লিন আজ রাতে বাইরে যাচ্ছে।'

To make this negative you can say,

এই নেতিবাচক করতে আপনি বলতে পারেন,

‘Lynn is not going out tonight.’ or ‘Lynn isn't going out tonight.’

'লিন আজ রাতে বাইরে যাচ্ছে না।' অথবা 'লিন আজ রাতে বাইরে যাচ্ছে না।'

The next sentence says, ‘Laura isn't study this evening.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'লরা আজ সন্ধ্যায় পড়াশোনা করছে না।'

Can you find the mistake?

আপনি ভুল খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

Remember we have to add  ‘-ing’ to the end of the verb,

মনে রাখবেন আমাদের ক্রিয়ার শেষে '-ing' যোগ করতে হবে,

so we need to say,

তাই আমাদের বলতে হবে,

‘Laura isn't studying this evening.’

'লরা আজ সন্ধ্যায় পড়াশোনা করছে না।'

The next sentence says,

পরের বাক্যটি বলে,

‘My sons will playing chess later.’

'আমার ছেলেরা পরে দাবা খেলবে।'

We are talking about a future plan,

আমরা একটি ভবিষ্যত পরিকল্পনার কথা বলছি,

so you might be tempted to use ‘well’ or ‘will’, I'm sorry.

তাই আপনি 'ভাল' বা 'ইচ্ছা' ব্যবহার করতে প্রলুব্ধ হতে পারেন, আমি দুঃখিত।

However, instead of saying ‘will’, we use the ‘be’ verb.

যাইহোক, 'ইচ্ছা' বলার পরিবর্তে, আমরা 'হবে' ক্রিয়া ব্যবহার করি।

‘My sons are playing chess later.’

'আমার ছেলেরা পরে দাবা খেলছে।'

And finally, ‘She's not to eating dinner tonight.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'সে আজ রাতে ডিনার খাবে না।'

There's an extra word in here that we don't need.

এখানে একটি অতিরিক্ত শব্দ আছে যা আমাদের প্রয়োজন নেই।

What is it?

এটা কি?

It's ‘to’.

এটা 'থেকে'।

Remember, subject - ‘be’ verb, not verb ‘-ing’.

মনে রাখবেন, subject - 'be' verb, not verb '-ing'.

We do not need ‘to’ in this sentence.

এই বাক্যে আমাদের 'to' দরকার নেই।

All right well that's the end of this checkup.

ঠিক আছে ঠিক আছে যে এই চেকআপ শেষ.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Good job, everyone.

ভাল কাজ, সবাই.

You just completed the lesson  on the present continuous tense.

আপনি এইমাত্র বর্তমান ধারাবাহিক কালের পাঠটি সম্পূর্ণ করেছেন।

This tense is not easy but you did a great job.

এই কাল সহজ নয় কিন্তু আপনি একটি দুর্দান্ত কাজ করেছেন।

And keep watching to learn more.

এবং আরও জানতে দেখতে থাকুন।

I know English can be difficult but with practice and effort you will improve.

আমি জানি ইংরেজি কঠিন হতে পারে কিন্তু অনুশীলন এবং প্রচেষ্টার মাধ্যমে আপনি উন্নতি করবেন।

I promise.

আমি কথা দিচ্ছি।

See you in the next video.

পরের ভিডিওতে দেখা হবে।

Hi, everyone.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I'm Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video, I'm going to introduce the present perfect tense.

এই ভিডিওতে, আমি বর্তমান পারফেক্ট কালের পরিচয় দিতে যাচ্ছি।

This tense can be used to talk about an action that happened in the past,

এই কালটি অতীতে ঘটে যাওয়া একটি ক্রিয়া সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে,

but when it happened is not very important or it’s unknown.

তবে কখন এটি ঘটেছিল তা খুব গুরুত্বপূর্ণ নয় বা এটি অজানা।

It can also be used to talk about an action that started in the past and continues in

এটি একটি ক্রিয়া সম্পর্কে কথা বলতেও ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে যা অতীতে শুরু হয়েছিল এবং

the present.

বর্তমানে অব্যাহত রয়েছে।

We really want to emphasize how long that action has been happening.

আমরা সত্যিই জোর দিতে চাই যে কতদিন ধরে এই কর্মটি ঘটছে।

And finally, we use this tense to talk about a recent action.

এবং পরিশেষে, আমরা একটি সাম্প্রতিক কর্ম সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে এই কাল ব্যবহার করি।

There's a lot to learn and a lot of important information, so keep watching.

অনেক কিছু শেখার আছে এবং অনেক গুরুত্বপূর্ণ তথ্য আছে, তাই দেখতে থাকুন।

Let's talk about one usage of the present perfect tense.

বর্তমান নিখুঁত কালের একটি ব্যবহার সম্পর্কে কথা বলা যাক।

This tense can be used to talk about an action that happened in the past.

এই কালটি অতীতে ঘটে যাওয়া একটি ক্রিয়া সম্পর্কে কথা বলতে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে।

But when it happened is not important or not known.

কিন্তু কখন ঘটেছে তা গুরুত্বপূর্ণ বা জানা যায়নি।

However, this action is  important to the conversation 

যাইহোক, এই পদক্ষেপটি এখনই কথোপকথনের জন্য গুরুত্বপূর্ণ

right now.

।

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first one says, ‘I have been to Canada.’

প্রথমজন বলে, 'আমি কানাডায় গিয়েছি।'

What we do here is we start with the subject, ‘I’.

আমরা এখানে যা করি তা হল আমরা বিষয় দিয়ে শুরু করি, 'আমি'।

For ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’, and ‘they’, we follow with ‘have’.

'আমি', 'তুমি', 'আমরা' এবং 'তারা'-এর জন্য আমরা 'have' দিয়ে অনুসরণ করি।

After that we use the past participle of the verb.

এর পরে আমরা ক্রিয়ার past participle ব্যবহার করি।

In this case, the verb is ‘be’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে, ক্রিয়াপদ 'হবে'।

And so the past participle is ‘been’.

আর তাই অতীত কৃষ্টি হল 'হয়েছে'।

‘I have been to Canada.’

'আমি কানাডা গিয়েছি।'

The next sentence says, ‘My cousins have seen the movie.’

পরের বাক্যটি বলে, 'আমার কাজিনরা সিনেমাটি দেখেছে।'

My cousins is a ‘they’.

আমার কাজিনরা একজন 'তারা'।

And so again, we follow with ‘have’.

এবং তাই আবার, আমরা 'have' দিয়ে অনুসরণ করি।

And the past participle of see is ‘seen’.

এবং দেখার অতীত কণা হল 'দেখা'।

‘They have seen the movie.’

'ওরা সিনেমাটা দেখেছে।'

Or ‘My cousins have seen the movie.’

অথবা 'আমার কাজিনরা সিনেমাটি দেখেছে।'

The next example says, ‘Chad has gone home.’

পরবর্তী উদাহরণ বলে, 'চাদ বাড়ি চলে গেছে।'

Chad is a ‘he’.

চাদ একজন 'সে'।

For ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, we follow with ‘has’.

'সে', 'সে', 'এটি'-এর জন্য আমরা 'has' দিয়ে অনুসরণ করি।

Then, the past participle ‘gone’ is for the verb ‘go’.

তারপর, past participle 'gone' ক্রিয়াপদ 'go' এর জন্য।

‘Chad has gone home.’

'চাদ বাড়ি গেছে।'

And finally, ‘My phone has been fixed.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'আমার ফোন ঠিক করা হয়েছে।'

My phone is an ‘it’.

আমার ফোন একটি 'এটি'.

Therefore, I use ‘has’.

অতএব, আমি 'has' ব্যবহার করি।

And then I need the past participle of ‘be’ – ‘been’.

এবং তারপর আমার 'be' - 'been'-এর অতীত কণা দরকার।

‘My phone has been fixed.’

'আমার ফোন ঠিক করা হয়েছে।'

Let's move on to the next usage.

এর পরবর্তী ব্যবহারে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

The present perfect tense is also used to describe an action that started in the past

বর্তমান নিখুঁত কাল এমন একটি ক্রিয়া বর্ণনা করতেও ব্যবহৃত হয় যা অতীতে শুরু হয়েছিল

and continues in the present.

এবং বর্তমানে অব্যাহত রয়েছে।

‘for’ and since’ are common expressions used with the present perfect tense.

'for' এবং since' বর্তমান নিখুঁত কালের সাথে ব্যবহৃত সাধারণ রাশি।

Let's take a look at these examples.

আসুন এই উদাহরণগুলি কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

‘I have worked there since 2002.’

'আমি 2002 সাল থেকে সেখানে কাজ করছি।'

You'll notice we start with the subject.

আপনি লক্ষ্য করবেন আমরা বিষয় দিয়ে শুরু করি।

If it's ‘I’, ‘you’ or ‘we’, we have ‘have’.

যদি এটি 'আমি', 'তুমি' বা 'আমরা' হয়, তাহলে আমাদের ' আছে'।

Then the past participle of the verb.

তারপর ক্রিয়াটির past participle.

In this case - ‘worked’.

এই ক্ষেত্রে - 'কাজ'।

What you'll notice here is that we also have ‘since 2002’.

আপনি এখানে যা লক্ষ্য করবেন তা হল আমাদের কাছে '2002 সাল থেকে' রয়েছে।

This shows when the action started, so with the expression ‘since’, you need to use

এটি দেখায় কখন ক্রিয়া শুরু হয়েছে, তাই 'যখন থেকে' অভিব্যক্তির সাথে, আপনাকে

a specific point in time.

নির্দিষ্ট সময়ে একটি নির্দিষ্ট বিন্দু ব্যবহার করতে হবে।

The next example does the same thing.

পরবর্তী উদাহরণ একই জিনিস করে।

‘You have had a car since last year.’

'গত বছর থেকে তোমার একটা গাড়ি আছে।'

Again, we use ‘since’, so we have a specific point in time - ‘last year’.

আবার, আমরা 'sence' ব্যবহার করি, তাই আমাদের একটি নির্দিষ্ট সময় আছে - 'গত বছর'।

Take a look at the next example.

পরবর্তী উদাহরণে তাকান।

‘Anna has liked him for weeks.’

'আনা কয়েক সপ্তাহ ধরে তাকে পছন্দ করেছে।'

In this case the subject is ‘Anna’.

এক্ষেত্রে বিষয় 'আন্না'।

Which is a ‘she’, and so we use ‘has’.

যা একটি 'সে', এবং তাই আমরা 'has' ব্যবহার করি।

Then the past participle ‘liked’.

তারপর অতীত কণা 'লাইক'।

However, at the end of the sentence, we see ‘for weeks’.

যাইহোক, বাক্যের শেষে, আমরা 'সপ্তাহের জন্য' দেখতে পাই।

Not ‘since weeks’.

'সপ্তাহ থেকে' নয়।

When we use ‘for’, we talk about the duration.

যখন আমরা 'for' ব্যবহার করি, আমরা সময়কাল সম্পর্কে কথা বলি।

We explain how long this action has been true.

আমরা ব্যাখ্যা করি কতদিন ধরে এই ক্রিয়াটি সত্য হয়েছে।

And finally, ‘We have eaten lunch here for 3 months.’

এবং অবশেষে, 'আমরা এখানে 3 মাস ধরে দুপুরের খাবার খেয়েছি।'

Again, the sentence ends with ‘for 3 months’.

আবার, '3 মাসের জন্য' দিয়ে সাজা শেষ হয়।

So we show the duration.

তাই আমরা সময়কাল দেখান.

Let's move on to the next usage.

এর পরবর্তী ব্যবহারে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

In addition, the present perfect tense can be used to describe an action that recently

উপরন্তু, বর্তমান নিখুঁত কাল এমন একটি ক্রিয়া বর্ণনা করতে ব্যবহার করা যেতে পারে যা সম্প্রতি

stopped.

বন্ধ হয়ে গেছে।

Let’s take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘I have just been to the doctor,’

'আমি সবেমাত্র ডাক্তারের কাছে গিয়েছি,'

So just like for all the other usages, we start with the subject,

তাই অন্যান্য সমস্ত ব্যবহারের মতোই, আমরা বিষয় দিয়ে শুরু করি,

‘have’ or ‘has’, and the past participle.

'have' বা 'has', এবং past participle.

But you'll notice here, I used the word ‘just’ between ‘have’ and the verb.

But you'll notice here, I used the word 'just' between 'have' and the verb.

‘I have just been to the doctor.’

'I have just been to the doctor.'

This shows that it happened very recently.

This shows that it happened very recently.

The next example says, ‘James has just seen his new baby.’

The next example says, 'James has just seen his new baby.'

Again, just goes in between ‘have’ or ‘has’ and the verb.

Again, just goes in between 'have' or 'has' and the verb.

Take a look at the next example.

পরবর্তী উদাহরণে তাকান।

It says, ‘She has already been to China.’

It says, 'She has already been to China.'

‘already’ is another word you can use to show that this action recently happened.

'already' is another word you can use to show that this action recently happened.

However, ‘already’ can also be moved to the end of the sentence.

However, 'already' can also be moved to the end of the sentence.

So it's perfectly fine to say, ‘She has been to China already.’

So it's perfectly fine to say, 'She has been to China already.'

And in the last example, ‘We have recently visited Tom.’

And in the last example, 'We have recently visited Tom.'

Again, you can put this word between ‘have’ or ‘has’ and the verb.

Again, you can put this word between 'have' or 'has' and the verb.

Or you can also put it at the end of the sentence.

Or you can also put it at the end of the sentence.

‘We have visited Tom recently.’

'We have visited Tom recently.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's take a look at the negative form of the present perfect tense.

Let's take a look at the negative form of the present perfect tense.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

The first one says, ‘I have not been to Europe.’

The first one says, 'I have not been to Europe.'

What you'll notice in the first sentence is that we simply put a 'not' between ‘have’

What you'll notice in the first sentence is that we simply put a 'not' between 'have'

and ‘been’.

and 'been'.

‘I have not been to Europe.’

'I have not been to Europe.'

You can also use a contraction and say ‘I haven't been to Europe.’

You can also use a contraction and say 'I haven't been to Europe.'

The next sentence says, ‘It has not rained for 3 months.’

The next sentence says, 'It has not rained for 3 months.'

Again, we put the ‘not’ between the ‘has’ and the verb.

Again, we put the 'not' between the 'has' and the verb.

‘It has not rained for 3 months.’

'It has not rained for 3 months.'

Here we have a time expression to show the duration.

Here we have a time expression to show the duration.

The next example says, ‘Teddy hasn't driven for 2 years.’

The next example says, 'Teddy hasn't driven for 2 years.'

We used the contraction here for ‘has’ and ‘not’ – ‘hasn't’.

We used the contraction here for 'has' and 'not' – 'hasn't'.

And then we use the time expression ‘for 2 years’ at the end of the sentence.

And then we use the time expression 'for 2 years' at the end of the sentence.

And finally, the last sentence says, ‘My sons haven't played soccer since 2010.’

And finally, the last sentence says, 'My sons haven't played soccer since 2010.'

We see another contraction here for ‘have not’ – ‘haven't’.

We see another contraction here for 'have not' – 'haven't'.

‘My sons haven't played soccer since 2010.’

'My sons haven't played soccer since 2010.'

This time expression uses ‘since’.

This time expression uses 'since'.

And so we mention a specific point and time.

And so we mention a specific point and time.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's take a look at the ‘have’ or ‘has’ question form of the present perfect

Now let's take a look at the 'have' or 'has' question form of the present perfect

tense.

tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

The first sentence says, ‘Mike has eaten lunch.’

The first sentence says, 'Mike has eaten lunch.'

That is a statement.

That is a statement.

Now to turn it into a question, it's quite easy.

Now to turn it into a question, it's quite easy.

All you have to do is put ‘has’ at the beginning.

All you have to do is put 'has' at the beginning.

Then you follow with the subject and then the past participle.

Then you follow with the subject and then the past participle.

You'll notice that the placement of the past participle doesn't change.

You'll notice that the placement of the past participle doesn't change.

We've simply changed the order of the first 2 words.

We've simply changed the order of the first 2 words.

‘Has Mike eaten lunch?’

'Has Mike eaten lunch?'

‘Has Mike eaten lunch?’

'Has Mike eaten lunch?'

And you can answer by saying ‘Yes, he has.’ or ‘No, he hasn't.’

And you can answer by saying 'Yes, he has.' or 'No, he hasn't.'

The next sentence says, ‘They have watched the video.’

The next sentence says, 'They have watched the video.'

This is a statement.

This is a statement.

If we want to turn it into a question, again, we change the order of the first two words.

If we want to turn it into a question, again, we change the order of the first two words.

‘Have they…?’

'Have they…?'

And the past participle verb stays in the same place.

And the past participle verb stays in the same place.

‘Have they watched the video?’

'Have they watched the video?'

‘Have they watched the video?’

'Have they watched the video?'

You can answer this question by saying, ‘Yes, they have.’

You can answer this question by saying, 'Yes, they have.'

or ‘No, they haven't.’

or 'No, they haven't.'

Good job, guys.

ভালো করেছো বন্ধুরা.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, I'll briefly introduce how to ask WH questions in the present perfect tense.

Now, I'll briefly introduce how to ask WH questions in the present perfect tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

I have ‘where’, ‘what’, ‘who’, and ‘how’.

I have 'where', 'what', 'who', and 'how'.

These go at the beginning of the question.

These go at the beginning of the question.

Let's take a look at the first example.

Let's take a look at the first example.

‘Where has Tim been?’

'Where has Tim been?'

You'll notice we followed the WH word with ‘has’ or ‘have’.

You'll notice we followed the WH word with 'has' or 'have'.

In this case, I used ‘has’ because the subject is ‘Tim’, and Tim is a ‘he’.

In this case, I used 'has' because the subject is 'Tim', and Tim is a 'he'.

And then we followed that with the past participle of the verb.

And then we followed that with the past participle of the verb.

‘Where has Tim been?’

'Where has Tim been?'

And I can answer by saying, ‘Tim has been home.’

And I can answer by saying, 'Tim has been home.'

or ‘Tim has been on vacation.’

or 'Tim has been on vacation.'

Something like that.

Something like that.

The next question says, what countries have you visited?

The next question says, what countries have you visited?

I can answer by saying, ‘I have visited China.’

I can answer by saying, 'I have visited China.'

or ‘I have visited Mexico.’

or 'I have visited Mexico.'

You can also use the contraction ‘I’ve’.

You can also use the contraction 'I've'.

‘I've visited China.’

'I've visited China.'

The next question says, ‘Who has she talked to?’

The next question says, 'Who has she talked to?'

You can answer by saying, ‘She has talked to her mom.’ or ‘She has talked to her

You can answer by saying, 'She has talked to her mom.' or 'She has talked to her

teacher.’

teacher.'

The next question says, ‘How long have you been married?’

The next question says, 'How long have you been married?'

‘I've been married for 3 years.’

'I've been married for 3 years.'

That's one answer that you can give.

That's one answer that you can give.

Great job, everybody.

Great job, everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

For this checkup, we'll take a look at the present perfect tense.

For this checkup, we'll take a look at the present perfect tense.

Which describes an action that happened at

Which describes an action that happened at

an unknown or indefinite time in the past.

an unknown or indefinite time in the past.

Let's look at the first sentence.

Let's look at the first sentence.

‘She _blank_ read that book.’

'She _blank_ read that book.'

The subject in this sentence is ‘she’.

The subject in this sentence is 'she'.

For he/she/it, in this tense we say, ‘has’.

For he/she/it, in this tense we say, 'has'.

‘She has’.

'She has'.

Now, take a look at the verb.

Now, take a look at the verb.

It looks like ‘read’.

It looks like 'read'.

But remember we need to use the past participle of the verb.

But remember we need to use the past participle of the verb.

So It's actually ‘read’.

So It's actually 'read'.

‘read’ and ‘read’ are spelled the same.

'read' and 'read' are spelled the same.

‘She has read that book.’

'She has read that book.'

The second sentence says, ‘They _blank_ visit China.’

The second sentence says, 'They _blank_ visit China.'

‘visit’ is the verb that you want to use here.

'visit' is the verb that you want to use here.

For ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’ and ‘they’, we use ‘have’.

For 'I', 'you', 'we' and 'they', we use 'have'.

Not ‘has’.

Not 'has'.

‘They have’

'They have'

Now, what's the past participle of visit?

Now, what's the past participle of visit?

The answer is ‘visited’.

The answer is 'visited'.

‘They have visited China.’

'They have visited China.'

Next, ‘We _blank_ see that concert.’

Next, 'We _blank_ see that concert.'

Again, for ‘I’, ‘you’, we’ and ‘they’ – we use ‘have’.

Again, for 'I', 'you', we' and 'they' – we use 'have'.

‘We have’.

'We have'.

Now, the past participle of ‘see’ is 'seen'.

Now, the past participle of 'see' is 'seen'.

‘We have seen that concert.’

'We have seen that concert.'

Now, let's look for the mistake in the next sentence.

Now, let's look for the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Rick have been to Cuba.’

'Rick have been to Cuba.'

Take a look at the subject, ‘Rick’.

Take a look at the subject, 'Rick'.

Rick is a ‘he’.

Rick is a 'he'.

So instead of ‘have’, we need to change this to ‘has’.

So instead of 'have', we need to change this to 'has'.

‘Rick has been to Cuba.’

'Rick has been to Cuba.'

‘Sally and I hasn't finished work.’

'Sally and I hasn't finished work.'

The subject in this sentence is ‘Sally’ and ‘I’.

The subject in this sentence is 'Sally' and 'I'.

The pronoun for that is ‘we’.

The pronoun for that is 'we'.

‘We hasn't finished work.’

'We hasn't finished work.'

That still sounds weird, right?

That still sounds weird, right?

We have to change this to ‘have not’ or the contraction ‘haven't’.

We have to change this to 'have not' or the contraction 'haven't'.

And finally, ‘I did go to the doctor.’

And finally, 'I did go to the doctor.'

Now this sentence makes sense, but it's not the present perfect tense.

Now this sentence makes sense, but it's not the present perfect tense.

We have to change it.

We have to change it.

Remember, we use ‘have’ for the subject, ‘I’.

Remember, we use 'have' for the subject, 'I'.

But we're not done.

But we're not done.

What is the past participle of ‘go’?

What is the past participle of 'go'?

It is ‘gone’.

It is 'gone'.

‘I have gone to the doctor.’

'I have gone to the doctor.'

Great job.

দারূন কাজ.

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

In this checkup, we'll talk about the present perfect tense

In this checkup, we'll talk about the present perfect tense

and how it can be used to describe an action that started in the past and is still true

and how it can be used to describe an action that started in the past and is still true

today.

today.

The first sentence says, ‘I _blank_ known Carly since 1994.’

The first sentence says, 'I _blank_ known Carly since 1994.'

The subject is ‘I’.

The subject is 'I'.

And we already have the past participle of the verb, ‘know’.

And we already have the past participle of the verb, 'know'.

Which is ‘known’.

Which is 'known'.

What are we missing?

What are we missing?

The correct answer is ‘have’.

The correct answer is 'have'.

For ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’ and ‘they’, we use ‘have’ after the subject.

For 'I', 'you', 'we' and 'they', we use 'have' after the subject.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘He has been here _blank_ 2 p.m.’

'He has been here _blank_ 2 pm'

Now the first part is all there.

Now the first part is all there.

‘He has been’.

'He has been'.

However, remember that for the present perfect tense,

However, remember that for the present perfect tense,

we use ‘for’ or ‘since’ to talk about how long that action has been true.

we use 'for' or 'since' to talk about how long that action has been true.

In this case, we use ‘since’.

In this case, we use 'since'.

Because 2 p.m. is a specific period in time.

Because 2 pm is a specific period in time.

Next it says, ‘She _blank_ liked Tom since June.’

Next it says, 'She _blank_ liked Tom since June.'

The subject is ‘she’.

The subject is 'she'.

And we have the past participle of the verb ‘like’, which is 'liked'.

And we have the past participle of the verb 'like', which is 'liked'.

What are we missing?

What are we missing?

Again, we need ‘have’ or ‘has’.

Again, we need 'have' or 'has'.

Because the subject is ‘she’...

Because the subject is 'she'...

Can you figure out which one you need?

Can you figure out which one you need?

The correct answer is ‘has’.

The correct answer is 'has'.

‘She has liked Tom since June.’

'She has liked Tom since June.'

Now, I want you to find a mistake in the next sentence.

Now, I want you to find a mistake in the next sentence.

‘I have worked here six months ago.’

'I have worked here six months ago.'

Can you find a mistake here?

Can you find a mistake here?

‘I have worked’ - that's correct.

'I have worked' - that's correct.

However, in the present perfect tense, we don't use ‘ago’.

However, in the present perfect tense, we don't use 'ago'.

This is talking about more the past.

This is talking about more the past.

We want to talk about ‘since’ or ‘for’ instead.

We want to talk about 'since' or 'for' instead.

Now ‘six months’ is not a specific time.

Now 'six months' is not a specific time.

So we don't use ‘since’.

So we don't use 'since'.

Instead, we talk about the duration.

Instead, we talk about the duration.

So we need ‘for’.

So we need 'for'.

We'll say, ‘I have worked here for six months.’

We'll say, 'I have worked here for six months.'

Let's take a look at the next sentence.

Let's take a look at the next sentence.

‘Jen have a cold for two weeks.’

'Jen have a cold for two weeks.'

At first glance, this doesn't seem that wrong.

At first glance, this doesn't seem that wrong.

But remember, Jen is a ‘she’.

But remember, Jen is a 'she'.

So we need ‘has’.

So we need 'has'.

‘Jen has’.

'Jen has'.

But wait a minute, ‘Jen has have a cold’?

But wait a minute, 'Jen has have a cold'?

That's not right either.

That's not right either.

We need the past participle of ‘have’.

We need the past participle of 'have'.

What is the past participle?

What is the past participle?

The correct answer is ‘had’.

The correct answer is 'had'.

‘Jen has had a cold for two weeks.’

'Jen has had a cold for two weeks.'

And finally, ‘We haven't went home since Friday.’

And finally, 'We haven't went home since Friday.'

This one is a little tricky.

This one is a little tricky.

The subject is ‘we’.

The subject is 'we'.

‘We have... have not’.

'We have... have not'.

That's correct.

এটাই সঠিক.

The contraction is ‘haven't’.

The contraction is 'haven't'.

‘We haven't’.

'We haven't'.

Now the problem is, we have this verb ‘went’.

Now the problem is, we have this verb 'went'.

That's in the past simple tense.

That's in the past simple tense.

We need the past participle of ‘go’.

We need the past participle of 'go'.

The correct answer is ‘gone’.

The correct answer is 'gone'.

‘We haven't gone home since Friday.’

'We haven't gone home since Friday.'

Good job, guys.

ভালো করেছো বন্ধুরা.

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

In this checkup, we'll take a look at the present perfect tense.

In this checkup, we'll take a look at the present perfect tense.

And how it is used to describe an action that finished recently.

And how it is used to describe an action that finished recently.

We'll be focusing on the words, ‘just’, ‘already’ and ‘recently’ to show this.

We'll be focusing on the words, 'just', 'already' and 'recently' to show this.

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘She has just _blank_ that book.’

'She has just _blank_ that book.'

And we're using the verb, ‘read’.

And we're using the verb, 'read'.

Remember, we take the subject, ‘she’.

Remember, we take the subject, 'she'.

And for ‘he’, ‘she’ and ‘it’, we say ‘has’.

And for 'he', 'she' and 'it', we say 'has'.

So that's correct.

So that's correct.

Now we need the past participle of ‘read’.

Now we need the past participle of 'read'.

And that is ‘read’.

And that is 'read'.

‘She has just read that book.’

'She has just read that book.'

You'll notice I use the word, ‘just’ right before the past participle.

You'll notice I use the word, 'just' right before the past participle.

Next it says, ‘They have already’ and the verb is ‘wake up’.

Next it says, 'They have already' and the verb is 'wake up'.

If the subject is ‘he’, ‘she’, or ‘it’, we use ‘has’.

If the subject is 'he', 'she', or 'it', we use 'has'.

But if the subject is ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’ or ‘they’, we use ‘have’.

But if the subject is 'I', 'you', 'we' or 'they', we use 'have'.

So that's correct.

So that's correct.

‘They have’.

'They have'.

Also we have the word ‘already’ here to show that it happened recently

Also we have the word 'already' here to show that it happened recently

or that it finished recently.

or that it finished recently.

Now the verb is ‘wake up’.

Now the verb is 'wake up'.

We need the past participle of ‘wake up’,

We need the past participle of 'wake up',

and that is ‘woken up’.

and that is 'woken up'.

So the answer is,

So the answer is,

‘They have already woken up.’

'They have already woken up.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘We have recently _blank_ work.’

'We have recently _blank_ work.'

And the verb is ‘finish’.

And the verb is 'finish'.

‘We have’, that's correct.

'We have', that's correct.

And we have the word 'recently' to show when the action finished.

And we have the word 'recently' to show when the action finished.

And now we need to find the past participle of the verb ‘finish’.

And now we need to find the past participle of the verb 'finish'.

The correct answer is.

The correct answer is.

‘We have recently finished, -ed, work.’

'We have recently finished, -ed, work.'

Now try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Morty has eaten just.’

'Morty has eaten just.'

This sounds a little strange, right?

This sounds a little strange, right?

That's because ‘just’ needs to come before the verb.

That's because 'just' needs to come before the verb.

Therefore, the answer is ‘Morty has just eaten.’

Therefore, the answer is 'Morty has just eaten.'

The next sentence says, ‘Karen has recently be sick.’

The next sentence says, 'Karen has recently be sick.'

Karen is a ‘she’.

Karen is a 'she'.

So ‘has’ is correct.

So 'has' is correct.

And there we have ‘recently’.

And there we have 'recently'.

Now we need the past participle of the verb.

Now we need the past participle of the verb.

‘be’ is our verb and the past participle of ‘be’ is ‘been’.

'be' is our verb and the past participle of 'be' is 'been'.

‘Karen has recently been sick.’

'Karen has recently been sick.'

And finally, ‘I have gone already to the dentist.’

And finally, 'I have gone already to the dentist.'

This is similar to another question we looked at just before.

This is similar to another question we looked at just before.

‘I have gone already to the dentist.’

'I have gone already to the dentist.'

The placement of ‘already’ is a little awkward.

The placement of 'already' is a little awkward.

So we can say, ‘I have already gone.’

So we can say, 'I have already gone.'

So we can put ‘already’ before the verb,

So we can put 'already' before the verb,

‘I have already gone to the dentist’

'I have already gone to the dentist'

Or we can put this at the end,

Or we can put this at the end,

‘I have gone to the dentist already.’

'I have gone to the dentist already.'

Both of those are correct.

Both of those are correct.

Now, good job.

Now, good job.

That is the end of the checkup.

That is the end of the checkup.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Excellent job, everyone.

Excellent job, everyone.

You just learned about the present perfect tense.

You just learned about the present perfect tense.

There was a lot to learn, but you did a wonderful job.

There was a lot to learn, but you did a wonderful job.

Keep studying English.

Keep studying English.

I know that It's hard, but you will get better with time, effort and practice.

I know that It's hard, but you will get better with time, effort and practice.

I'll see you in the next video.

পরের ভিডিওতে দেখা হবে।

Hi, everyone.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

Welcome to the video.

Welcome to the video.

In this video, I’ll introduce the Present Perfect Continuous English Tense.

In this video, I'll introduce the Present Perfect Continuous English Tense.

This tense can be used to talk about an action

This tense can be used to talk about an action

that started in the past and continues in the present.

that started in the past and continues in the present.

It can also be used to talk about an action that hasn't happened recently.

It can also be used to talk about an action that hasn't happened recently.

And finally, it can also be used to talk about an action that recently stopped.

And finally, it can also be used to talk about an action that recently stopped.

There's a lot to learn, so keep watching.

There's a lot to learn, so keep watching.

You can use the present perfect continuous tense

You can use the present perfect continuous tense

to talk about an action that started in the past and continues in the present.

to talk about an action that started in the past and continues in the present.

We want to emphasize duration

We want to emphasize duration

and you can do that by using ‘for’ or ‘since’ in your sentence.

and you can do that by using 'for' or 'since' in your sentence.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘Charles has been studying English for an hour.’

'Charles has been studying English for an hour.'

Take a look at the subject, ‘Charles’.

Take a look at the subject, 'Charles'.

The subject pronoun for Charles is ‘he’.

The subject pronoun for Charles is 'he'.

And that's why we say ‘has’.

And that's why we say 'has'.

After that, we add ‘been’ and then verb ‘-ing’.

After that, we add 'been' and then verb '-ing'.

In this case, ‘studying.’

In this case, 'studying.'

You'll also notice that at the end of the sentence we have for an hour.

You'll also notice that at the end of the sentence we have for an hour.

That shows how long this  action has been happening.

That shows how long this action has been happening.

When you use ‘for’, you emphasize the duration. ‘for an hour’.

When you use 'for', you emphasize the duration. 'for an hour'.

‘Charles has been studying English for an hour.’

'Charles has been studying English for an hour.'

Let's take a look at the next sentence.

Let's take a look at the next sentence.

‘Lily has been playing the piano for 2 years.’

'Lily has been playing the piano for 2 years.'

In this case, Lily is a ‘she’ and that's why, again, we say ‘has’.

In this case, Lily is a 'she' and that's why, again, we say 'has'.

You'll notice again, we have ‘been’ and then verb ‘-ing’.

You'll notice again, we have 'been' and then verb '-ing'.

In this case, ‘playing’.

In this case, 'playing'.

At the end of this sentence, we also used ‘for’.

At the end of this sentence, we also used 'for'.

and then ‘two years’.

and then 'two years'.

So again, we're showing how long this has been happening.

So again, we're showing how long this has been happening.

The next sentence is a little different.

The next sentence is a little different.

‘It has been growing since June.’

'It has been growing since June.'

So it can be something like a plant.

So it can be something like a plant.

The plant or it has been growing since June.

The plant or it has been growing since June.

Here we use ‘since’, not ‘for’.

Here we use 'since', not 'for'.

What's the difference?

What's the difference?

We use a specific point in time with since.

We use a specific point in time with since.

We don't say ‘Since two hours’.

We don't say 'Since two hours'.

No, we say ‘When the action started since June.’

No, we say 'When the action started since June.'

And finally, ‘Dan and I have been working since 6 a.m.’

And finally, 'Dan and I have been working since 6 am'

The subject pronoun for ‘Dan and I’ is ‘We’.

The subject pronoun for 'Dan and I' is 'We'.

Therefore we use ‘have’.

Therefore we use 'have'.

At the end of the sentence, we have ‘since 6 a.m.’

At the end of the sentence, we have 'since 6 am'

Remember that with ‘since’, we talked about a specific point in time when the action

Remember that with 'since', we talked about a specific point in time when the action

started.

started.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

The present perfect continuous can also be used without emphasizing duration.

The present perfect continuous can also be used without emphasizing duration.

In this case, we mean ‘lately’.

In this case, we mean 'lately'.

This action has been happening ‘lately’,

This action has been happening 'lately',

and so we can use the word ‘lately’ or ‘recently’ to explain this.

and so we can use the word 'lately' or 'recently' to explain this.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘You have been missing many classes lately.’

'You have been missing many classes lately.'

You'll notice that at the end of the sentence I use the word ‘lately'

You'll notice that at the end of the sentence I use the word 'lately'

to describe when this action has been happening.

to describe when this action has been happening.

You can also use lately at the beginning of the sentence.

You can also use lately at the beginning of the sentence.

For example, ‘Lately, you have been missing many classes.’

For example, 'Lately, you have been missing many classes.'

The next example says, ‘Recently, Toby has been running every day.’

The next example says, 'Recently, Toby has been running every day.'

In this sentence, we used ‘recently’ at the beginning

In this sentence, we used 'recently' at the beginning

to show when does action has been happening.

to show when does action has been happening.

You can also use ‘recently’ at the end of the sentence.

You can also use 'recently' at the end of the sentence.

‘Toby has been running everyday recently.’

'Toby has been running everyday recently.'

In this example, the subject is Toby and so we use ‘has’ after Toby.

In this example, the subject is Toby and so we use 'has' after Toby.

Because Toby is a ‘he’.

Because Toby is a 'he'.

The next example says, ‘Lately, Dana has been swimming a lot.’

The next example says, 'Lately, Dana has been swimming a lot.'

Again, we use ‘lately’ at the beginning of this sentence,

Again, we use 'lately' at the beginning of this sentence,

but you can also use it at the end.

but you can also use it at the end.

Dana is a ‘she’ and so we followed this subject with ‘has’.

Dana is a 'she' and so we followed this subject with 'has'.

And finally, ‘We've been practicing English together recently.’

And finally, 'We've been practicing English together recently.'

‘We’ is the subject of this sentence and so we use ‘have’.

'We' is the subject of this sentence and so we use 'have'.

Here, we use the contraction ‘We’ve’.

Here, we use the contraction 'We've'.

‘We have’ become ‘We've’.

'We have' become 'We've'.

‘We've been practicing English together recently.’

'We've been practicing English together recently.'

We can put ‘recently’ at the end,

We can put 'recently' at the end,

or we can say ‘Recently we've been practicing English together.’

or we can say 'Recently we've been practicing English together.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

The present perfect continuous tense and also be used to talk about an action that recently

The present perfect continuous tense and also be used to talk about an action that recently

stopped and has a present result.

stopped and has a present result.

Let's take a look at the example.

Let's take a look at the example.

‘I'm tired because I have been running.’

'I'm tired because I have been running.'

The second part of the sentence, ‘I have been running’

The second part of the sentence, 'I have been running'

is using the present perfect continuous tense.

is using the present perfect continuous tense.

This is the action that recently stopped.

This is the action that recently stopped.

And as a result, ‘I'm tired’.

And as a result, 'I'm tired'.

This is the present result.

This is the present result.

What's happening now, because of this.

What's happening now, because of this.

‘I'm tired.’.

'I'm tired.'.

The next example says, ‘The street is wet because it has been raining.’

The next example says, 'The street is wet because it has been raining.'

This is very similar to the first sentence.

This is very similar to the first sentence.

Here, we know that it has been raining.

Here, we know that it has been raining.

And this action recently stopped.

And this action recently stopped.

As a result, in the present, The street is wet.

As a result, in the present, The street is wet.

The street is wet right now because of this action.

The street is wet right now because of this action.

The next example says, ‘You don't understand because you haven't been listening.’

The next example says, 'You don't understand because you haven't been listening.'

You'll notice here that we use the negative.

You'll notice here that we use the negative.

Here's the contractions, ‘haven't’ or ‘have not’

Here's the contractions, 'haven't' or 'have not'

because of this action,  you haven't been listening,

because of this action, you haven't been listening,

now you don't understand.

now you don't understand.

In the last example, we switch the order a little bit.

In the last example, we switch the order a little bit.

‘I've been studying all night.’

'I've been studying all night.'

There is the present perfect continuous tense.

There is the present perfect continuous tense.

This is the action that stopped recently.

This is the action that stopped recently.

And here is the result.

And here is the result.

‘Now, I'm exhausted.’

'Now, I'm exhausted.'

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's take a look at the negative form of the present perfect continuous tense.

Let's take a look at the negative form of the present perfect continuous tense.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘I have not been feeling well these days.’

'I have not been feeling well these days.'

At the end of the sentence we have ‘these days’ to show that this is an action that's

At the end of the sentence we have 'these days' to show that this is an action that's

been happening recently.

been happening recently.

In the negative form, we have to have ‘not’.

In the negative form, we have to have 'not'.

The ‘not’ goes after have or has.

The 'not' goes after have or has.

In this case, the subject is ‘I’, so I use ‘have’.

In this case, the subject is 'I', so I use 'have'.

‘I have not been feeling well these days.’

'I have not been feeling well these days.'

We can also use a contraction ‘haven't’ or ‘have not’.

We can also use a contraction 'haven't' or 'have not'.

‘I haven't been feeling well these days.’

'I haven't been feeling well these days.'

The next sentence says, ‘Sue has not been cooking lately.’

The next sentence says, 'Sue has not been cooking lately.'

We have ‘lately’ at the end of this sentence,

We have 'lately' at the end of this sentence,

We can also put ‘lately’ at the beginning of the sentence.

We can also put 'lately' at the beginning of the sentence.

The important part of this sentence is to put ‘not’ after ‘has’.

The important part of this sentence is to put 'not' after 'has'.

Why did we use ‘has’?

Why did we use 'has'?

Because the subject is ‘Sue’ which is a 'she'.

Because the subject is 'Sue' which is a 'she'.

For ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, we use ‘has’.

For 'he', 'she', 'it', we use 'has'.

Again, we can use a contraction ‘hasn't’ for has not.

Again, we can use a contraction 'hasn't' for has not.

‘Sue hasn't been cooking lately.’

'Sue hasn't been cooking lately.'

The next sentence says, ‘Jeff hasn't been eating healthy food recently.’

The next sentence says, 'Jeff hasn't been eating healthy food recently.'

Again, the ‘recently’ can be used at the beginning or end of this sentence.

Again, the 'recently' can be used at the beginning or end of this sentence.

We have the contestant ‘hasn't’ here for you.

We have the contestant 'hasn't' here for you.

‘hasn't’ is a contraction for ‘has not’.

'hasn't' is a contraction for 'has not'.

We have ‘has’ because the subject is Jeff which is ‘he’.

We have 'has' because the subject is Jeff which is 'he'.

And finally, ‘They haven't been speaking for over a year.’

And finally, 'They haven't been speaking for over a year.'

In this case, ‘for over a year’ shows duration.

In this case, 'for over a year' shows duration.

Remember with ‘for’, you show how long something has been happening.

Remember with 'for', you show how long something has been happening.

In this case, we have a contraction ‘haven't’ or ‘have not’.

In this case, we have a contraction 'haven't' or 'have not'.

Great job, everybody.

Great job, everybody.

let's move on.

let's move on.

Now, let's take a look at how to form the ‘have’ or ‘has’ question

Now, let's take a look at how to form the 'have' or 'has' question

for the present perfect continuous tense.

for the present perfect continuous tense.

The first sentence says, ‘He has been reading for an hour,’

The first sentence says, 'He has been reading for an hour,'

Now, to turn this into a question,

Now, to turn this into a question,

all we have to do is change the order of the first two words.

all we have to do is change the order of the first two words.

So ‘He has’ becomes ‘Has he’.

So 'He has' becomes 'Has he'.

‘Has he been reading for an hour?’

'Has he been reading for an hour?'

You'll notice that the second part of the sentence doesn't change.

You'll notice that the second part of the sentence doesn't change.

‘Has he been reading for an hour?’

'Has he been reading for an hour?'

To answer, you can simply say, ‘Yes, he has.’ or ‘No, he hasn't.’

To answer, you can simply say, 'Yes, he has.' or 'No, he hasn't.'

The next sentence says, ‘They have been sleeping since 8 p.m.’

The next sentence says, 'They have been sleeping since 8 pm'

Again, the second part of the sentence stays the same,

Again, the second part of the sentence stays the same,

and in the beginning, we just switch the first two words.

and in the beginning, we just switch the first two words.

‘They have’ become ‘Have they’.

'They have' become 'Have they'.

‘Have they been sleeping since 8 p.m.?’

'Have they been sleeping since 8 pm?'

To answer, you can say, ‘Yes, they have.’

To answer, you can say, 'Yes, they have.'

or ‘No. they haven't.’

or 'No. they haven't.'

Great job, everybody.

Great job, everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's take a look at how to form WH questions in the present perfect continuous tense.

Now, let's take a look at how to form WH questions in the present perfect continuous tense.

Here, we have some WH question words.

Here, we have some WH question words.

‘what’, ‘where’, ‘why’ and ‘how’.

'what', 'where', 'why' and 'how'.

Let's take a look at the first question.

Let's take a look at the first question.

‘What have you been doing lately?’

'What have you been doing lately?'

I can answer by saying, ‘I have been working.’

I can answer by saying, 'I have been working.'

or ‘I have been studying.’

or 'I have been studying.'

I can also use the contraction ‘I've’.

I can also use the contraction 'I've'.

‘I've been working.’

'I've been working.'

‘I've been studying.’

'I've been studying.'

The next question says, ‘Where have you been traveling?’

The next question says, 'Where have you been traveling?'

‘I have been traveling in Europe.’

'I have been traveling in Europe.'

or ‘I've been traveling in Europe.’

or 'I've been traveling in Europe.'

‘Why has he been feeling sad?’

'Why has he been feeling sad?'

You can answer by saying, ‘He's been feeling sad.’

You can answer by saying, 'He's been feeling sad.'

That's the contraction ‘he has’, he's been feeling sad because his pet died.

That's the contraction 'he has', he's been feeling sad because his pet died.

or ‘He has been feeling sad because he broke up with his girlfriend.’

or 'He has been feeling sad because he broke up with his girlfriend.'

Something like that.

Something like that.

And ‘How has she been doing?’

And 'How has she been doing?'

‘How has she been doing?’

'How has she been doing?'

I can say, ‘She's been doing well.’

I can say, 'She's been doing well.'

‘She's’ is a contraction for ‘she has’.

'She's' is a contraction for 'she has'.

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

In this checkup, we will talk about the present perfect continuous tense.

In this checkup, we will talk about the present perfect continuous tense.

This tense can be used to describe an event

This tense can be used to describe an event

that started in the past and continues in the present.

that started in the past and continues in the present.

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

The first sentence says,

The first sentence says,

‘He has _blank_ all week,’

'He has _blank_ all week,'

And the verb is ‘sleep’.

And the verb is 'sleep'.

For this tense, what we do is we first look at the subject, ‘he’.

For this tense, what we do is we first look at the subject, 'he'.

For ‘he’, ‘she’ and ‘it’, we put ‘has’.

For 'he', 'she' and 'it', we put 'has'.

Then, we add ‘been’. ‘has been’.

Then, we add 'been'. 'has been'.

Finally we add ‘-ing’ to the end.

Finally we add '-ing' to the end.

‘He has been sleeping all week.’

'He has been sleeping all week.'

The next sentence says, ‘You haven't _blank_ for a year.’

The next sentence says, 'You haven't _blank_ for a year.'

and the verb is ‘travel’.

and the verb is 'travel'.

Now, this is the negative form.

Now, this is the negative form.

So you see the contraction - ‘haven't’.

So you see the contraction - 'haven't'.

‘You have not’ or ‘You haven't’.

'You have not' or 'You haven't'.

Again, what we do after that is add ‘been’.

Again, what we do after that is add 'been'.

Then, do you remember what to do?

Then, do you remember what to do?

Add ‘-ing’ to the verb.

Add '-ing' to the verb.

‘You haven't been traveling for a year.’

'You haven't been traveling for a year.'

Next, it says ‘They _blank_ working all day.’

Next, it says 'They _blank_ working all day.'

So the verb ‘-ing’ has already been provided for you.

So the verb '-ing' has already been provided for you.

Now, take a look at the subject.

Now, take a look at the subject.

The subject is ‘they’.

বিষয় 'তারা'।

Should we use ‘have’? or should we use ‘has’?

Should we use 'have'? or should we use 'has'?

The correct answer is ‘have’.

The correct answer is 'have'.

Then what do you put?

Then what do you put?

Remember, we put ‘been’.

Remember, we put 'been'.

‘They have been working all day.’

'They have been working all day.'

Now if you want to make this negative, you can say,

Now if you want to make this negative, you can say,

‘They haven't been working all day.’

'They haven't been working all day.'

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘My friends have been watch TV.’

'My friends have been watch TV.'

‘My friends have been watch TV.’

'My friends have been watch TV.'

What's the mistake?

What's the mistake?

Remember, we need to add ‘-ing’ to the end of the verb.

Remember, we need to add '-ing' to the end of the verb.

So we should say,

So we should say,

‘My friends have been watching TV.’

'My friends have been watching TV.'

Next, ‘Sal did talking for 10 minutes.’

Next, 'Sal did talking for 10 minutes.'

Hmm..

Hmm..

Sal is a ‘he'.

Sal is a 'he'.

And ‘talking’ is already there for you.

And 'talking' is already there for you.

So what's in the middle of those two words is the mistake.

So what's in the middle of those two words is the mistake.

For ‘he’, we use ‘has’.

For 'he', we use 'has'.

So we say ‘has been’.

So we say 'has been'.

‘Sal has been talking for 10 minutes.’

'Sal has been talking for 10 minutes.'

And finally,

And finally,

‘He has been to eat for an hour.’

'He has been to eat for an hour.'

Hmm..

Hmm..

‘He has been’ That's correct.

'He has been' That's correct.

However, in this sentence, the base form of the verb ‘eat’ was used.

However, in this sentence, the base form of the verb 'eat' was used.

Instead, remember we need ‘-ing’.

Instead, remember we need '-ing'.

This is the correct answer.

This is the correct answer.

‘He has been eating for an hour.’

'He has been eating for an hour.'

All right, good job. and let's move on to the next practice.

All right, good job. and let's move on to the next practice.

In this practice, we'll take a look at the present perfect continuous tense,

In this practice, we'll take a look at the present perfect continuous tense,

And see how it expresses an action that has been happening recently or lately.

And see how it expresses an action that has been happening recently or lately.

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘She has _blank_ bad lately.’

'She has _blank_ bad lately.'

And the verb is ‘feel’.

And the verb is 'feel'.

Remember for ‘she’, we use ‘has’.

Remember for 'she', we use 'has'.

Then don't forget we need to have ‘been’.

Then don't forget we need to have 'been'.

‘She has been’

'She has been'

After that, we add ‘-ing’ to the verb.

After that, we add '-ing' to the verb.

The correct sentence is,

The correct sentence is,

‘She has been feeling bad lately.’

'She has been feeling bad lately.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘We haven't _blank_ much recently.’

'We haven't _blank_ much recently.'

And the verb is ‘cook’.

And the verb is 'cook'.

This is a negative sentence.

This is a negative sentence.

So we say, ‘We have not’ or the contraction - ‘haven't’.

So we say, 'We have not' or the contraction - 'haven't'.

‘We haven't’ Don't forget ‘been’, and then verb ‘-ing’.

'We haven't' Don't forget 'been', and then verb '-ing'.

‘We haven't been cooking much recently.’

'We haven't been cooking much recently.'

Finally, we move on, let's try to find the mistake.

Finally, we move on, let's try to find the mistake.

‘We has been riding bikes to school recently.’

'We has been riding bikes to school recently.'

What's the mistake in this sentence?

What's the mistake in this sentence?

The subject here is ‘We’.

The subject here is 'We'.

For ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘we’ and ‘they’, we have to say ‘have been’, not ‘has

For 'I', 'you', 'we' and 'they', we have to say 'have been', not 'has

been’.

been'.

‘We have been riding bikes to school recently.’

'We have been riding bikes to school recently.'

And for the last one,

And for the last one,

‘Jenny lately hasn't been helping me.’

'Jenny lately hasn't been helping me.'

The lately is placed wrong in this sentence.

The lately is placed wrong in this sentence.

We have to say,

We have to say,

‘Lately, Jenny hasn't been helping me.’

'Lately, Jenny hasn't been helping me.'

or we can also say,

or we can also say,

‘Jenny hasn't been helping me lately.’

'Jenny hasn't been helping me lately.'

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

In this checkup, we'll talk about the present perfect continuous tense

In this checkup, we'll talk about the present perfect continuous tense

and how it expresses an action that stopped recently

and how it expresses an action that stopped recently

but has a present result.

but has a present result.

The first sentence says,

The first sentence says,

‘I _blank_ . That's why I'm so sweaty.’

'I _blank_ . That's why I'm so sweaty.'

The verb here is ‘exercise’.

The verb here is 'exercise'.

And the subject is ‘I’.

And the subject is 'I'.

Do we use ‘has’ or ‘have’ for the subject ‘I’?

Do we use 'has' or 'have' for the subject 'I'?

The correct answer is ‘have’.

The correct answer is 'have'.

Then, we put ‘been’ and then verb ‘-ing’.

Then, we put 'been' and then verb '-ing'.

Okay, so the correct answer is,

Okay, so the correct answer is,

‘I have been exercising.

'I have been exercising.

That's why I'm so sweaty.’

That's why I'm so sweaty.'

That's the result.

That's the result.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘I'm covered in flour because I _blank_.’

'I'm covered in flour because I _blank_.'

And the verb is ‘bake’.

And the verb is 'bake'.

Take a look.

দেখা যাক.

I have ‘I'm covered in flour because’

I have 'I'm covered in flour because'

So this first part is the result.

So this first part is the result.

I need to show the action that stopped recently in the present perfect continuous tense.

I need to show the action that stopped recently in the present perfect continuous tense.

Again, the subject is ‘I’.

Again, the subject is 'I'.

So we use ‘have been’.

So we use 'have been'.

Then, all we do is add ‘-ing’ to the end of baking.

Then, all we do is add '-ing' to the end of baking.

‘I have been baking.’

'I have been baking.'

So again,

So again,

‘I'm covered in flour because I have been baking.’

'I'm covered in flour because I have been baking.'

And we can use the contraction and say,

And we can use the contraction and say,

‘I've been baking.’

'I've been baking.'

Now, find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now, find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘She has think a lot, so she has a headache.’

'She has think a lot, so she has a headache.'

Take a look.

দেখা যাক.

The result is that ‘she has a headache.’

The result is that 'she has a headache.'

So we need to use the present perfect continuous for the first part.

So we need to use the present perfect continuous for the first part.

‘She has’ is correct.

'She has' is correct.

What's missing?

কি অনুপস্থিত?

Don't forget the ‘been’.

Don't forget the 'been'.

Also don't forget that we need to add ‘-ing’ to the verb.

Also don't forget that we need to add '-ing' to the verb.

‘She has been thinking a lot, so she has a headache.’

'She has been thinking a lot, so she has a headache.'

Look at the next sentence and find the mistake.

Look at the next sentence and find the mistake.

‘I'm so hungry because I have been diet.’

'I'm so hungry because I have been diet.'

The only mistake here is that someone forgot to put the ‘-ing’ at the end of the verb, ‘diet’.

The only mistake here is that someone forgot to put the '-ing' at the end of the verb, 'diet'.

The correct answer is,

The correct answer is,

‘I'm so hungry because I have been dieting.’

'I'm so hungry because I have been dieting.'

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Thank you so much for watching this  grammar course on the present tense. 

Thank you so much for watching this grammar course on the present tense.

Now, I want you to watch the next  grammar course on the past tense. 

Now, I want you to watch the next grammar course on the past tense.

I’ll see you there.

I'll see you there.

Hi, everyone.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

In this video, I will introduce the past simple English tense.

In this video, I will introduce the past simple English tense.

This grammar tense can help you explain a past general state, action, or habit.

This grammar tense can help you explain a past general state, action, or habit.

There's a lot to learn and it's a very important tense, so keep watching.

There's a lot to learn and it's a very important tense, so keep watching.

In this video, I will talk about the 'be' verb

In this video, I will talk about the 'be' verb

in the past simple tense.

in the past simple tense.

The 'be' verb in the past simple tense can be used to describe a past general state.

The 'be' verb in the past simple tense can be used to describe a past general state.

We use the 'be' verbs, ‘was’ and ‘were’ in this tense.

We use the 'be' verbs, 'was' and 'were' in this tense.

Take a look at the examples.

Take a look at the examples.

‘I was scared.’

'I was scared.'

‘James', or he 'was a teacher.’

'James', or he 'was a teacher.'

‘She was sad.’

'She was sad.'

‘My dog was hungry.’

'My dog was hungry.'

‘My dog’ can be ‘it’.

'My dog' can be 'it'.

So for ‘I’, ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, we use the past tense 'be' verb, ‘was’.

So for 'I', 'he', 'she', 'it', we use the past tense 'be' verb, 'was'.

However, for ‘you’, ‘we’ and ‘they’, we use ‘were’.

However, for 'you', 'we' and 'they', we use 'were'.

‘You were a good student.’

'You were a good student.'

‘Your parents, or they were at the park.’ and ‘We were at home for two hours.’

'Your parents, or they were at the park.' and 'We were at home for two hours.'

In this last sentence, you see that the duration is emphasized.

In this last sentence, you see that the duration is emphasized.

Great job.

দারূন কাজ.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now I will talk about regular verbs in the past simple tense.

Now I will talk about regular verbs in the past simple tense.

Take a look at these examples.

Take a look at these examples.

‘Liam played a game.’

'Liam played a game.'

Liam is a ‘he’,

Liam is a 'he',

but really it doesn't matter for regular verbs in the past simple tense.

but really it doesn't matter for regular verbs in the past simple tense.

Because no matter what the subject is, all we have to do is add ‘d’ or ‘ed’

Because no matter what the subject is, all we have to do is add 'd' or 'ed'

to the end of the verb.

to the end of the verb.

Here the verb is ‘play’, so I added ‘-ed’.

Here the verb is 'play', so I added '-ed'.

‘Liam played a game.’

'Liam played a game.'

‘The car, or it needed gas.’

'The car, or it needed gas.'

The verb here is ‘need’.

The verb here is 'need'.

For the past simple tense, I added ‘-ed’.

For the past simple tense, I added '-ed'.

‘We watched a movie.’

'We watched a movie.'

Again, an ‘ed’ at the of ‘watch’.

Again, an 'ed' at the of 'watch'.

‘You exercised for an hour.’

'You exercised for an hour.'

In this case, the verb is ‘exercise’.

In this case, the verb is 'exercise'.

I only need to add a ‘d’ to make it the past tense.

I only need to add a 'd' to make it the past tense.

And finally, ‘They usually worked after school.’

And finally, 'They usually worked after school.'

The verb is ‘work’.

The verb is 'work'.

And I added an ‘ed’ to make it in the past tense.

And I added an 'ed' to make it in the past tense.

The word ‘usually’ shows that this was a habit.

The word 'usually' shows that this was a habit.

Remember, the past simple tense can be used to show past habits.

Remember, the past simple tense can be used to show past habits.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, I'll talk about irregular verbs in the past simple tense.

Now, I'll talk about irregular verbs in the past simple tense.

Remember, for regular verbs, we only add ‘d’ or ‘ed’ to make a verb into the past tense.

Remember, for regular verbs, we only add 'd' or 'ed' to make a verb into the past tense.

However, for irregular verbs, we have to change the verb in a different way.

However, for irregular verbs, we have to change the verb in a different way.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘I ate with my friend.’

'I ate with my friend.'

The verb here is ‘ate’.

The verb here is 'ate'.

‘ate’ is the past simple tense of ‘eat’.

'ate' is the past simple tense of 'eat'.

The next example says, ‘Nara wrote a story.’

The next example says, 'Nara wrote a story.'

The verb is ‘write’.

The verb is 'write'.

And because it's irregular to change it into the past tense, we change the verb to ‘wrote’.

And because it's irregular to change it into the past tense, we change the verb to 'wrote'.

‘You often came home late.’

'You often came home late.'

The verb here is ‘come’ and it's been changed to ‘came’.

The verb here is 'come' and it's been changed to 'came'.

You'll notice that we had the word ‘often’ to show a habit.

You'll notice that we had the word 'often' to show a habit.

‘We bought a camera.’

'We bought a camera.'

The verb here is ‘buy’ and it's been changed to ‘bought’ to show the past simple tense.

The verb here is 'buy' and it's been changed to 'bought' to show the past simple tense.

And finally, ‘My parents sent me money for a year.’

And finally, 'My parents sent me money for a year.'

Here the verb ‘sent’ is the past tense of ‘send’.

Here the verb 'sent' is the past tense of 'send'.

Here we also see ‘for a year’, this shows duration.

Here we also see 'for a year', this shows duration.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now I will talk about the negative form for the 'be' verb in the past simple tense.

Now I will talk about the negative form for the 'be' verb in the past simple tense.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

The first one says, ‘I was not hungry.’

The first one says, 'I was not hungry.'

For the past simple tense, the negative 'be' verb

For the past simple tense, the negative 'be' verb

I f the subject is ‘I’, ‘he’, ‘she’ or ‘it’, we say ‘was not’.

I f the subject is 'I', 'he', 'she' or 'it', we say 'was not'.

For example, ‘I was not’ or ‘she was not’ or the contraction ‘wasn't’.

For example, 'I was not' or 'she was not' or the contraction 'wasn't'.

‘I wasn't’.

'I wasn't'.

‘She wasn't’.

'She wasn't'.

So let's look again, ‘I was not hungry.’

So let's look again, 'I was not hungry.'

‘She wasn't home today.’

'She wasn't home today.'

Now, if the subject is ‘you’, ‘we’ or ‘they’,

Now, if the subject is 'you', 'we' or 'they',

We say ‘were not’ or the contraction ‘weren't’.

We say 'were not' or the contraction 'weren't'.

‘The children, or they were not quiet.’

'The children, or they were not quiet.'

‘The children were not quiet.’

'The children were not quiet.'

And then, ‘The dog', or it was not, or 'wasn't playful.’

And then, 'The dog', or it was not, or 'wasn't playful.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's talk about how to form the negative in the past simple tense for non-'be' verbs,

Now, let's talk about how to form the negative in the past simple tense for non-'be' verbs,

regular or irregular.

regular or irregular.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘I did not like him.’

'I did not like him.'

What we do for non-'be' verbs is simply put ‘did not’ after the subject.

What we do for non-'be' verbs is simply put 'did not' after the subject.

And you'll notice that for the verb, we don't make any changes.

And you'll notice that for the verb, we don't make any changes.

We keep the base verb.

We keep the base verb.

‘He didn't catch the ball.’

'He didn't catch the ball.'

Again, it's ‘he did not’, but here we used a contraction,

Again, it's 'he did not', but here we used a contraction,

‘He didn't catch the ball.’

'He didn't catch the ball.'

‘They didn't dance.’

'They didn't dance.'

Again, here's the contraction for ‘did not’.

Again, here's the contraction for 'did not'.

And you'll notice that for the verb, we didn't change it at all.

And you'll notice that for the verb, we didn't change it at all.

Here's an irregular verb, and here's a regular verb, we keep them in the base form.

Here's an irregular verb, and here's a regular verb, we keep them in the base form.

And finally, ‘We didn't think about that.’

And finally, 'We didn't think about that.'

Again, we simply say ‘did not’ or ‘didn't’.

Again, we simply say 'did not' or 'didn't'.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now I will introduce two ways to form questions for the past simple tense.

Now I will introduce two ways to form questions for the past simple tense.

Take a look at the first example.

Take a look at the first example.

‘He was angry.’

'He was angry.'

In this first sentence, we see the 'be' verb ‘was’.

In this first sentence, we see the 'be' verb 'was'.

It's quite easy.

It's quite easy.

All you have to do to turn this into a question is switch the order the first two words.

All you have to do to turn this into a question is switch the order the first two words.

‘Was he angry?’

'Was he angry?'

You can answer by saying ‘Yes, he was.’ or ‘No, he wasn't.’

You can answer by saying 'Yes, he was.' or 'No, he wasn't.'

The next sentence also has a 'be' verb.

The next sentence also has a 'be' verb.

‘They were comfortable.’

'They were comfortable.'

So again, switch the first two words.

So again, switch the first two words.

‘Were they comfortable?’

'Were they comfortable?'

The answers can be, ‘Yes, they were.’

The answers can be, 'Yes, they were.'

or ‘No, they weren't.’

or 'No, they weren't.'

However, look at the third sentence.

However, look at the third sentence.

‘Sam lived here.’

'Sam lived here.'

There is no 'be' verb in this sentence.

There is no 'be' verb in this sentence.

Instead, we see the action verb ‘lived’.

Instead, we see the action verb 'lived'.

So what we do is no matter what the subject,

So what we do is no matter what the subject,

we start the question with ‘did’.

we start the question with 'did'.

‘Did Sam live here?’

'Did Sam live here?'

You'll notice that the verb no longer is in the past tense.

You'll notice that the verb no longer is in the past tense.

We use the base form of the verb.

We use the base form of the verb.

‘Did Sam live here?’

'Did Sam live here?'

You can say ‘Yes, he did.’

You can say 'Yes, he did.'

or ‘No, he didn't.’

or 'No, he didn't.'

The last sentence is similar.

The last sentence is similar.

‘They won the contest last year.’

'They won the contest last year.'

The verb here is ‘won’, that's not a 'be' verb.

The verb here is 'won', that's not a 'be' verb.

So again, we start the question with ‘did’ .

So again, we start the question with 'did' .

And then the subject ‘they’, we use the base form of the verb and that's ‘win’.

And then the subject 'they', we use the base form of the verb and that's 'win'.

‘Did they win the contest last year?’

'Did they win the contest last year?'

You can say, ‘Yes, they did.’

You can say, 'Yes, they did.'

or ‘No, they didn't.’

or 'No, they didn't.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now I'll introduce how to create an answer WH questions in the past simple tense.

Now I'll introduce how to create an answer WH questions in the past simple tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

We have some WH words here.

We have some WH words here.

‘What’ ‘When’

'What' 'When'

‘Where’ and ‘Why’

'Where' and 'Why'

You'll notice that after each WH word comes the word ‘did’.

You'll notice that after each WH word comes the word 'did'.

‘What did’ ‘When did’

'What did' 'When did'

‘Where did’ and ‘Why did’.

'Where did' and 'Why did'.

What comes after that the subject and then the base form of the verb.

What comes after that the subject and then the base form of the verb.

So, let's take a look.

So, let's take a look.

‘What did you do last night?’

'What did you do last night?'

‘What did you do last night?’

'What did you do last night?'

I can answer by saying something like, ‘I watched a movie.’

I can answer by saying something like, 'I watched a movie.'

Or ‘I read a book.’

Or 'I read a book.'

You'll notice that the answer is in the past simple tense.

You'll notice that the answer is in the past simple tense.

‘When did you get home last night?’

'When did you get home last night?'

‘I got home at 10 p.m.’

'I got home at 10 pm'

‘Where did they eat lunch?’

'Where did they eat lunch?'

‘They ate lunch at home.’

'They ate lunch at home.'

Again, ‘ate’ is the past tense of ‘eat’.

Again, 'ate' is the past tense of 'eat'.

Answer in the past simple tense.

Answer in the past simple tense.

And finally, ‘Why did the company hire him?’

And finally, 'Why did the company hire him?'

‘The company hired him because he's a hard worker.’

'The company hired him because he's a hard worker.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

In this first checkup, we'll take a look at

In this first checkup, we'll take a look at

practice questions using the 'be' verb in the past simple tense.

practice questions using the 'be' verb in the past simple tense.

Remember the 'be' verbs in the past simple tense are ‘was’ or ‘were’.

Remember the 'be' verbs in the past simple tense are 'was' or 'were'.

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘He __ at work earlier.’

'He __ at work earlier.'

The subject here is ‘we’.

The subject here is 'we'.

So do we use ‘was’ or ‘were’?

So do we use 'was' or 'were'?

The correct answer is ‘was’.

The correct answer is 'was'.

‘He was at work earlier.’

'He was at work earlier.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘We _____ very happy yesterday.’

'We _____ very happy yesterday.'

If the subject is ‘we’, remember the be verb is ‘were’.

If the subject is 'we', remember the be verb is 'were'.

‘We were very happy yesterday.’

'We were very happy yesterday.'

Next, ‘My parents or they __ worried about me.’

Next, 'My parents or they __ worried about me.'

If it's 'they', remember we have to say ‘were’.

If it's 'they', remember we have to say 'were'.

‘My parents were worried about me.’

'My parents were worried about me.'

If I want to use the negative, I can also say ‘My parents weren't worried about me.’

If I want to use the negative, I can also say 'My parents weren't worried about me.'

And that's possible.

And that's possible.

Now I want you to find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now I want you to find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘We wasn't good students.’

'We wasn't good students.'

We wasn't good students.

We wasn't good students.

Can you figure out what's wrong?

Can you figure out what's wrong?

The subject here is ‘we’, so we don't say ‘was not’.

The subject here is 'we', so we don't say 'was not'.

We need to say ‘were not’ or the contraction ‘weren't’.

We need to say 'were not' or the contraction 'weren't'.

‘We weren't good students,’ is the correct answer.

'We weren't good students,' is the correct answer.

The next one says, ‘Were she a teacher?’

The next one says, 'Were she a teacher?'

Now, this is a question so the be verb comes at the beginning.

Now, this is a question so the be verb comes at the beginning.

That's correct, but the subject here is ‘she’.

That's correct, but the subject here is 'she'.

Therefore, we need to start with ‘was’.

Therefore, we need to start with 'was'.

‘Was she a teacher?’

'Was she a teacher?'

And finally,

And finally,

‘They wasn't at school.’

'They wasn't at school.'

The subject is ‘they’, so the answer is

The subject is 'they', so the answer is

‘They weren't at school.’

'They weren't at school.'

You can use the contraction ‘weren't’ or ‘were not’.

You can use the contraction 'weren't' or 'were not'.

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

Now, let's practice regular verbs in the past simple tense.

Now, let's practice regular verbs in the past simple tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

‘He ____ at home.’

'He ____ at home.'

The verb is ‘study’.

The verb is 'study'.

Remember, when changing a regular verb into

Remember, when changing a regular verb into

the past tense, we add ‘d’ or ‘ed’ to the end of the

the past tense, we add 'd' or 'ed' to the end of the

verb.

However, there's a separate rule for words that end in ‘y’.

verb.

However, there's a separate rule for words that end in 'y'.

Such as, ‘study’.

Such as, 'study'.

We drop the ‘y’ and we add ‘ied’.

We drop the 'y' and we add 'ied'.

So the correct answer is,

So the correct answer is,

‘He studied at home.’

'He studied at home.'

The next sentence says, ‘We __ pencils.’

The next sentence says, 'We __ pencils.'

We want to use negative because it says ‘not use’.

We want to use negative because it says 'not use'.

Remember for the negative, we always use ‘did not’, no matter what the subject.

Remember for the negative, we always use 'did not', no matter what the subject.

You can also use the contraction ‘didn't’.

You can also use the contraction 'didn't'.

Now, what do we do to the verb?

Now, what do we do to the verb?

We keep it as ‘is’.

We keep it as 'is'.

We do not change it.

We do not change it.

‘We didn't’ or ‘We did not’ use pencils.

'We didn't' or 'We did not' use pencils.

The next sentence says, ‘His friends or they walk to the gym.’

The next sentence says, 'His friends or they walk to the gym.'

What's the past tense of ‘walk’?

What's the past tense of 'walk'?

We simply have to add ‘ed’ because it's a regular verb.

We simply have to add 'ed' because it's a regular verb.

‘His friends walked to the gym.’

'His friends walked to the gym.'

Now, find a mistake in the next sentence.

Now, find a mistake in the next sentence.

‘She didn't likes math.’

'She didn't likes math.'

‘didn't’ is correct.

'didn't' is correct.

However, remember we keep the verb as ‘is’ in the base form.

However, remember we keep the verb as 'is' in the base form.

So we don't say ‘likes’.

So we don't say 'likes'.

We say ‘like’.

We say 'like'.

‘She didn't like math.’

'She didn't like math.'

The next sentence says, ‘Did it rained this morning?’

The next sentence says, 'Did it rained this morning?'

Now this is a question.

Now this is a question.

In a question, it’s right to start the sentence with ‘Did’.

In a question, it's right to start the sentence with 'Did'.

‘Did it rained?’

'Did it rained?'

Do you notice the mistake?

Do you notice the mistake?

Remember, we do not use the past tense form in the question.

Remember, we do not use the past tense form in the question.

We use the base form of the verb.

We use the base form of the verb.

‘Did it rain this morning?’

'Did it rain this morning?'

And finally, ‘They not play the piano.’

And finally, 'They not play the piano.'

The verb is an action verb.

The verb is an action verb.

So we need a ‘did’ in front of ‘not’.

So we need a 'did' in front of 'not'.

‘They did not play the piano.’

'They did not play the piano.'

Let's move on to the next checkup.

এর পরবর্তী চেকআপে এগিয়ে যাওয়া যাক।

Now, I'll talk about irregular verbs in the past simple tense.

Now, I'll talk about irregular verbs in the past simple tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

‘He __ to school.’

'He __ to school.'

And the verb is ‘run’.

And the verb is 'run'.

‘run’ is an irregular verb, so the past tense form is ‘ran’.

'run' is an irregular verb, so the past tense form is 'ran'.

‘He ran to school.’

'He ran to school.'

The next sentence says, ‘We __ flowers.’

The next sentence says, 'We __ flowers.'

We want to use the negative because here it says ‘not grow’.

We want to use the negative because here it says 'not grow'.

Remember, no matter what the subject in the negative form,

Remember, no matter what the subject in the negative form,

we say ‘did not’

we say 'did not'

or ‘didn't’.

or 'didn't'.

Then we keep the verb in its base form.

Then we keep the verb in its base form.

‘We did not grow’ or ‘We didn't grow flowers.’

'We did not grow' or 'We didn't grow flowers.'

The next sentence says, ‘Where __ you teach last year?’

The next sentence says, 'Where __ you teach last year?'

This is a question.

This is a question.

Again, all we need to put is ‘did’.

Again, all we need to put is 'did'.

‘Where did you teach last year?’

'Where did you teach last year?'

It doesn't matter what the subject is.

It doesn't matter what the subject is.

We always go with ‘did’.

We always go with 'did'.

Next, try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

Next, try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘He didn't sold newspapers.’

'He didn't sold newspapers.'

Remember, in the negative, ‘didn't’ is correct for whatever subject there is.

Remember, in the negative, 'didn't' is correct for whatever subject there is.

However, we need to keep the verb in its base form.

However, we need to keep the verb in its base form.

So the correct answer is, ‘He didn't sell newspapers.’

So the correct answer is, 'He didn't sell newspapers.'

The next sentence says, ‘Did she sing a song?’

The next sentence says, 'Did she sing a song?'

You'll notice it's a similar problem here.

You'll notice it's a similar problem here.

‘sang’ is the irregular past tense form of ‘sing’.

'sang' is the irregular past tense form of 'sing'.

But in a question, if it starts with ‘did’,

But in a question, if it starts with 'did',

we use the base form.

we use the base form.

‘Did she sing a song?’

'Did she sing a song?'

And finally, ‘We taked it home.’

And finally, 'We taked it home.'

Does that sound right?

Does that sound right?

‘taked’ is not correct.

'taked' is not correct.

The past tense of ‘take’ is ‘took’.

The past tense of 'take' is 'took'.

‘We took it home.’

'We took it home.'

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Wow, we learned a lot in this video.

Wow, we learned a lot in this video.

Keep studying and reviewing the past simple tense.

Keep studying and reviewing the past simple tense.

It's an essential tense that will help you talk about the past.

It's an essential tense that will help you talk about the past.

Keep studying English and I'll see you in the next video.

Keep studying English and I'll see you in the next video.

Bye. 

বিদায়।

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I'm Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video.

In this video.

I will introduce the past continuous tense.

I will introduce the past continuous tense.

This tense can be used to describe an action that was ongoing in the past.

This tense can be used to describe an action that was ongoing in the past.

It can also be used to describe two actions happening at the same time in the past.

It can also be used to describe two actions happening at the same time in the past.

There's a lot to learn so let's get started.

There's a lot to learn so let's get started.

Let's take a look at the first usage of the past continuous tense.

Let's take a look at the first usage of the past continuous tense.

This tense can be used to describe an action that was ongoing in the past.

This tense can be used to describe an action that was ongoing in the past.

Let's take a look at these examples.

আসুন এই উদাহরণগুলি কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

‘I was walking in the park in the evening.’

'I was walking in the park in the evening.'

So first we start with the subject, ‘I’.

So first we start with the subject, 'I'.

For I, he, she, and it, we follow with ‘was’.

For I, he, she, and it, we follow with 'was'.

‘I was’

'I was'

And then we add an ‘ING’ to the end of the verb.

And then we add an 'ING' to the end of the verb.

‘I was walking’

'I was walking'

Now take a look at the whole sentence.

Now take a look at the whole sentence.

‘I was walking in the park in the evening.’

'I was walking in the park in the evening.'

You can see that this was an ongoing action and it happened in the past.

You can see that this was an ongoing action and it happened in the past.

Let's look at the next example.

Let's look at the next example.

‘She was living here last year.’

'She was living here last year.'

Here, the subject is ‘she’.

Here, the subject is 'she'.

So again we use ‘was’ and then ‘verb-ing’.

So again we use 'was' and then 'verb-ing'.

Here we have another expression that shows that this action was happening in the past.

Here we have another expression that shows that this action was happening in the past.

‘The dog,’ or ‘it’, ‘was eating dinner five minutes ago.’

'The dog,' or 'it', 'was eating dinner five minutes ago.'

The subject here is ‘the dog’ which can be replaced by the pronoun ‘it’.

The subject here is 'the dog' which can be replaced by the pronoun 'it'.

And so we follow with ‘was’.

And so we follow with 'was'.

And finally, ‘Andy and Jim,’ we can replace this with ‘they’.

And finally, 'Andy and Jim,' we can replace this with 'they'.

For ‘you’, ‘we’ and ‘they’, we use ‘were’.

For 'you', 'we' and 'they', we use 'were'.

‘They were’, or ‘Andy and Jim were working at 9:00 p.m.’

'They were', or 'Andy and Jim were working at 9:00 pm'

Let's move on.

Let's move on.

The past continuous tense is also used to describe an ongoing

The past continuous tense is also used to describe an ongoing

action in the past that was interrupted by another action.

action in the past that was interrupted by another action.

This interrupting action is used in the past simple tense with the word ‘when’.

This interrupting action is used in the past simple tense with the word 'when'.

Let's take a look at this example.

Let's take a look at this example.

‘I was playing cards when you called.’

'I was playing cards when you called.'

Again we start with the subject ‘was’ or ‘were’,

Again we start with the subject 'was' or 'were',

and then ‘verb-ing’,

and then 'verb-ing',

so this is the action that was ongoing in the past,

so this is the action that was ongoing in the past,

‘I was playing cards’

'I was playing cards'

The interrupting action in this sentence is ‘you called’.

The interrupting action in this sentence is 'you called'.

You'll notice I use the word ‘when’ to show the interrupting action’

You'll notice I use the word 'when' to show the interrupting action'

And I used it in the past simple tense, ‘called’.

And I used it in the past simple tense, 'called'.

Let's take a look at the next sentence.

Let's take a look at the next sentence.

‘The cat' or 'it' was eating when Eric came home.’

'The cat' or 'it' was eating when Eric came home.'

Again the action in progress is ‘the cat was eating’.

Again the action in progress is 'the cat was eating'.

And ‘Eric came home’, you'll notice the past simple tense.

And 'Eric came home', you'll notice the past simple tense.

This is the interrupting action used with the word ‘when’.

This is the interrupting action used with the word 'when'.

‘We were sleeping when Anne arrived.’

'We were sleeping when Anne arrived.'

Again we have the ongoing action in the past.

Again we have the ongoing action in the past.

The subject here is ‘we’.

The subject here is 'we'.

And so we used ‘were’ and then ‘verb-ing’.

And so we used 'were' and then 'verb-ing'.

‘When Anne arrived’ is the interrupting action.

'When Anne arrived' is the interrupting action.

And finally, ‘Alicia and I’, or ‘We' were walking when we saw Mark.’

And finally, 'Alicia and I', or 'We' were walking when we saw Mark.'

‘When we saw Mark’ is the interrupting action that interrupted the ongoing ‘Alicia

'When we saw Mark' is the interrupting action that interrupted the ongoing 'Alicia

and I were walking’.

and I were walking'.

It's also important to note that we can also switch the order of the sentence around and

It's also important to note that we can also switch the order of the sentence around and

say,

‘When you called, I was playing cards,’

say,

'When you called, I was playing cards,'

or ‘When Eric came home, the cat was eating.’

or 'When Eric came home, the cat was eating.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Another usage for the past continuous tense is to talk about two actions that were

Another usage for the past continuous tense is to talk about two actions that were

happening at the same time in the past.

happening at the same time in the past.

We use the past continuous tense for both actions with the word ‘while’.

We use the past continuous tense for both actions with the word 'while'.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first sentence says, ‘While I was playing soccer, she was watching

The first sentence says, 'While I was playing soccer, she was watching

me.’

me.'

You'll notice that both actions are in the past continuous tense.

You'll notice that both actions are in the past continuous tense.

‘I was playing soccer’ and ‘She was watching me’.

'I was playing soccer' and 'She was watching me'.

The word ‘while’ at the beginning shows that these actions were happening at the sametime.

The word 'while' at the beginning shows that these actions were happening at the sametime.

‘While you were reading, I was preparing dinner.’

'While you were reading, I was preparing dinner.'

Again both actions are expressed in the past continuous tense.

Again both actions are expressed in the past continuous tense.

The word ‘while’ shows that they were happening at the same time.

The word 'while' shows that they were happening at the same time.

‘While Her husband’ or ‘he’, ‘was driving

'While Her husband' or 'he', 'was driving

she was taking pictures.’

she was taking pictures.'

Both actions are in the past continuous tense.

Both actions are in the past continuous tense.

And finally,

And finally,

‘While we were eating, the music was playing.’

'While we were eating, the music was playing.'

Both actions were happening at the same time.

Both actions were happening at the same time.

Now, you'll notice that in my examples the word ‘while’ comes at the beginning,

Now, you'll notice that in my examples the word 'while' comes at the beginning,

however, it's important to note that you can move the word ‘while’ around in several

however, it's important to note that you can move the word 'while' around in several

ways.

ways.

For example, instead of saying this,

For example, instead of saying this,

‘While I was playing soccer, she was watching me.’

'While I was playing soccer, she was watching me.'

I can move ‘while’ to the middle of the sentence.

I can move 'while' to the middle of the sentence.

‘I was playing soccer while she was watching me.’

'I was playing soccer while she was watching me.'

I can put the ‘while’ between the two actions.

I can put the 'while' between the two actions.

Or I can also change the sentence around and say,

Or I can also change the sentence around and say,

‘While she was watching me, I was playing soccer.’

'While she was watching me, I was playing soccer.'

So it doesn't matter which action comes first with the ‘while’ if you put it in the

So it doesn't matter which action comes first with the 'while' if you put it in the

beginning.

beginning.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's talk about the negative form of the past continuous tense.

Now let's talk about the negative form of the past continuous tense.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘She was not reading last night.’

'She was not reading last night.'

The subject is ‘she’ and so we use ‘was’.

The subject is 'she' and so we use 'was'.

However, before the ‘verb-ing’, we add ‘not’.

However, before the 'verb-ing', we add 'not'.

‘She was not reading last night.’

'She was not reading last night.'

I can use a contraction and say,

I can use a contraction and say,

‘She wasn't reading last night.’

'She wasn't reading last night.'

‘We were not listening to music this morning.’

'We were not listening to music this morning.'

In this case, the subject is ‘we’ and so we use ‘were’.

Again ‘not’ comes before the ‘verb-ing’.

In this case, the subject is 'we' and so we use 'were'. Again 'not' comes before the 'verb-ing'.

‘We were not listening to music this morning.’

Again I can use a contraction and say,

'We were not listening to music this morning.' Again I can use a contraction and say,

‘We weren't listening to music this morning.’

'We weren't listening to music this morning.'

And the next one says, ‘He wasn't watching TV when his dad came

And the next one says, 'He wasn't watching TV when his dad came

home.’

home.'

In this example, the contraction is already there for you,

In this example, the contraction is already there for you,

‘He wasn't watching TV’.

'He wasn't watching TV'.

You'll notice the word ‘when’.

You'll notice the word 'when'.

Remember ‘when’ + ‘a past simple tense verb’ shows an interrupting action,

Remember 'when' + 'a past simple tense verb' shows an interrupting action,

so, ‘When his dad came home he wasn't watching TV.’

so, 'When his dad came home he wasn't watching TV.'

He was doing something else.

He was doing something else.

And finally,

And finally,

‘They weren't talking while the game was playing.’

'They weren't talking while the game was playing.'

The word ‘while’ is in this sentence.

The word 'while' is in this sentence.

Remember that shows 2 past ongoing actions happening at the same time,

Remember that shows 2 past ongoing actions happening at the same time,

so ‘While the game was playing they weren't talking’.

so 'While the game was playing they weren't talking'.

They were doing something else.

They were doing something else.

Let's move on now.

Let's move on now.

Let's talk about how to form ‘be’ verb questions for the past continuous tense.

Let's talk about how to form 'be' verb questions for the past continuous tense.

Take a look at the first statement.

Take a look at the first statement.

It says,

It says,

‘It was raining this morning.’

'It was raining this morning.'

In order to turn this into a question, it's quite easy,

In order to turn this into a question, it's quite easy,

all we have to do is change the order of the first two words.

all we have to do is change the order of the first two words.

Instead of ‘It was’, I now say ‘Was it’ to make it a question.

Instead of 'It was', I now say 'Was it' to make it a question.

You'll notice that the rest of the words stay in the same place.

You'll notice that the rest of the words stay in the same place.

‘Was it raining this morning?’

'Was it raining this morning?'

You can answer by saying, ‘Yes, it was.’ or ‘No, it wasn't.’

You can answer by saying, 'Yes, it was.' or 'No, it wasn't.'

The next statement says,

The next statement says,

‘They were living there when the fire happened.’

'They were living there when the fire happened.'

To turn this into a big question, again we just switched the order of the first two words.

To turn this into a big question, again we just switched the order of the first two words.

Instead of ‘They were’, we say ‘Were they’.

Instead of 'They were', we say 'Were they'.

And again, the rest of the words can stay in the same place.

And again, the rest of the words can stay in the same place.

‘Were they living there when the fire happened?’

'Were they living there when the fire happened?'

And you can answer by saying,

And you can answer by saying,

‘Yes, they were’ or ‘No, they weren't.’

'Yes, they were' or 'No, they weren't.'

Let's continue on.

চলুন চালিয়ে যান.

Now I'll go into how to make WH questions for the past continuous tense.

Now I'll go into how to make WH questions for the past continuous tense.

You'll notice that the examples here all begin with some WH words.

You'll notice that the examples here all begin with some WH words.

For example, ‘what’, ‘where’, ‘why’, and ‘who’.

For example, 'what', 'where', 'why', and 'who'.

Let's take a look at the first question.

Let's take a look at the first question.

‘What were they doing last night?”

'What were they doing last night?”

The subject of this sentence is ‘they’.

এই বাক্যের বিষয় 'তারা'।

So what you do is after the WH word you put the proper ‘be’ verb.

So what you do is after the WH word you put the proper 'be' verb.

In this case, ‘were’.

In this case, 'were'.

‘What were they doing last night?’

'What were they doing last night?'

You'll notice that after the subject comes the ‘verb-ing’.

You'll notice that after the subject comes the 'verb-ing'.

‘What were they doing last night?’

'What were they doing last night?'

I can answer by saying, ‘They were playing games’ or

I can answer by saying, 'They were playing games' or

‘They were reading a book’.

'They were reading a book'.

The next question says,

The next question says,

‘Where was he working last week?’

'Where was he working last week?'

In this case the subject is ‘he’ and so the be verb to use is ‘was’.

In this case the subject is 'he' and so the be verb to use is 'was'.

‘Where was he working last week?’

I can say, ‘He was working in Canada.’

‘Why was she crying when she finished the book?’

In this case, the subject is ‘she’ and so I put ‘was’ after ‘why’.

'Where was he working last week?' I can say, 'He was working in Canada.'

'Why was she crying when she finished the book?' In this case, the subject is 'she' and so I put 'was' after 'why'.

‘Why was she crying when she finished the book?’

'Why was she crying when she finished the book?'

I can say, ‘She was crying because the ending was sad.’

I can say, 'She was crying because the ending was sad.'

And finally,

And finally,

‘Who were the children staying with while their mom was working?’

'Who were the children staying with while their mom was working?'

In this case, ‘the children’ is a ‘they’

In this case, 'the children' is a 'they'

so we follow 'who' with ‘were’.

so we follow 'who' with 'were'.

‘Who were they’ or

'Who were they' or

‘Who were the children staying with while their mom was working?’

'Who were the children staying with while their mom was working?'

To answer, I can say, ‘The children’ or

To answer, I can say, 'The children' or

‘They were staying with their dad.’

'They were staying with their dad.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

In this section, let's do a checkup for the past continuous tense.

In this section, let's do a checkup for the past continuous tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

‘Last night they were blank at school.’

'Last night they were blank at school.'

I want you to try to fill in the blank with the negative for the verb ‘stay’.

I want you to try to fill in the blank with the negative for the verb 'stay'.

‘not stay’

'not stay'

What do you think it is?

What do you think it is?

Remember, for the negative of the past continuous,

Remember, for the negative of the past continuous,

all you have to do is put ‘not’ and then ‘verb-ing’ after the 'be' verb.

all you have to do is put 'not' and then 'verb-ing' after the 'be' verb.

‘They were not staying at school last.’

'They were not staying at school last.'

‘Last night, they were not staying at school.’

'Last night, they were not staying at school.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘Two days ago you blank soccer.’

'Two days ago you blank soccer.'

Again try the negative for the verb ‘play’.

Again try the negative for the verb 'play'.

‘Two days ago blank not play soccer.’

'Two days ago blank not play soccer.'

In this case, the first thing that's missing is the ‘be’ verb.

In this case, the first thing that's missing is the 'be' verb.

If the subject is ‘you’, can you think of which be verb needs to be put in there?

If the subject is 'you', can you think of which be verb needs to be put in there?

The correct answer is ‘were’.

The correct answer is 'were'.

And then, we say ‘not’.

And then, we say 'not'.

What happens after that?

What happens after that?

Remember, ‘verb-ing’.

Remember, 'verb-ing'.

So ‘you were not playing’

So 'you were not playing'

‘two days ago, you were not playing soccer’

'two days ago, you were not playing soccer'

You can also use a contraction and say,

You can also use a contraction and say,

‘You weren't playing soccer.’

'You weren't playing soccer.'

Now try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Yesterday, she were reading at home.’

'Yesterday, she were reading at home.'

hmmm

hmmm

The subject of this sentence is ‘she’ so the ‘be’ verb to use is not ‘were’.

The subject of this sentence is 'she' so the 'be' verb to use is not 'were'.

It's 'was'.

It's 'was'.

‘Yesterday, she was reading at home.’

'Yesterday, she was reading at home.'

In the next sentence it says, ‘Tomorrow, they were seeing their friends.’

In the next sentence it says, 'Tomorrow, they were seeing their friends.'

hmmm

hmmm

‘They’ and ‘were’

'They' and 'were'

That's correct.

That's correct.

And we have the ‘verb-ing’

And we have the 'verb-ing'

So what's the mistake?

So what's the mistake?

Remember the past continuous is for the past.

Remember the past continuous is for the past.

‘Tomorrow’ is not the past.

'Tomorrow' is not the past.

So instead, we need to put a word that shows the past.

So instead, we need to put a word that shows the past.

For example, I can say, ‘yesterday’.

For example, I can say, 'yesterday'.

‘Yesterday, they were seeing their friends.’

'Yesterday, they were seeing their friends.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's start a checkup of the ‘when’ usage

Now, let's start a checkup of the 'when' usage

of the past continuous tense.

of the past continuous tense.

Take a look at the first example.

Take a look at the first example.

It says, ‘Andrea and John’ blank when they bank hurt.’

It says, 'Andrea and John' blank when they bank hurt.'

Remember ‘when’ shows an interrupting action.

Remember 'when' shows an interrupting action.

It needs to be used with the past simple tense.

It needs to be used with the past simple tense.

So let's first look at the second blank.

So let's first look at the second blank.

‘When they blank hurt’

'When they blank hurt'

What's the past tense of the verb ‘get’?

What's the past tense of the verb 'get'?

The answer is ‘got’.

The answer is 'got'.

Now let's take a look at the action that was in progress in the past.

Now let's take a look at the action that was in progress in the past.

‘Andrea and John’ or ‘they’

'Andrea and John' or 'they'

Well what comes after ‘they’?

Well what comes after 'they'?

‘were’.

'were'.

‘Andrea and John were’

'Andrea and John were'

Then remember we need to add -ing to the verb.

Then remember we need to add -ing to the verb.

‘They were skiing’ or ‘Andrea and John were skiing when they got hurt’.

'They were skiing' or 'Andrea and John were skiing when they got hurt'.

The next example says, ‘It blank not raining when the game blank’.

The next example says, 'It blank not raining when the game blank'.

And I want you to use the verb ‘start’ for the second blank.

And I want you to use the verb 'start' for the second blank.

Take a look ‘when the game blank’ what's the past tense of ‘start’?

Take a look 'when the game blank' what's the past tense of 'start'?

‘started’

'started'

Now let's look at the first part of the sentence.

Now let's look at the first part of the sentence.

The subject is ‘it’.

The subject is 'it'.

So what ‘be’ verb do we use for 'it'?

So what 'be' verb do we use for 'it'?

‘was’

'was'

‘It was not raining when the game started.’

'It was not raining when the game started.'

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘I wasn't study at the library yesterday’.

'I wasn't study at the library yesterday'.

The subject here is ‘I’ and so the ‘be’ verb ‘was’ is correct.

The subject here is 'I' and so the 'be' verb 'was' is correct.

Here there's a contraction, ‘I wasn't’ for ‘I was not’.

Here there's a contraction, 'I wasn't' for 'I was not'.

Now the problem is with the verb.

Now the problem is with the verb.

Remember we need to put ‘–ing’ at the end of the verb.

Remember we need to put '–ing' at the end of the verb.

‘I wasn't studying at the library yesterday.’

'I wasn't studying at the library yesterday.'

And finally, ‘We did meet our friends last weekend.’

And finally, 'We did meet our friends last weekend.'

That sounds right, but remember we're doing the past continuous tense.

That sounds right, but remember we're doing the past continuous tense.

Take a look again.

Take a look again.

The subject is ‘we’.

The subject is 'we'.

We need a ‘be’ verb.

We need a 'be' verb.

‘were’

'were'

Then what happens?

Then what happens?

Remember, we need to add an ‘-ing’ to the end of the verb,

Remember, we need to add an '-ing' to the end of the verb,

so we take out ‘did’ and say, ‘We were meeting our friends last weekend.’

so we take out 'did' and say, 'We were meeting our friends last weekend.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, for this checkup, we'll look at the ‘while’ usage of the past continuous tense.

Now, for this checkup, we'll look at the 'while' usage of the past continuous tense.

Take a look at the first example.

Take a look at the first example.

‘While I blank someone blank my bike.’

'While I blank someone blank my bike.'

When we use ‘while’ in the past continuous tense,

When we use 'while' in the past continuous tense,

we're showing that two actions happened at the same time in the past

we're showing that two actions happened at the same time in the past

or they were happening at the same time in the past.

or they were happening at the same time in the past.

So we need to use the past continuous for both actions.

So we need to use the past continuous for both actions.

‘While I blank’

'While I blank'

I want you to use ‘shop’ in the first blank.

I want you to use 'shop' in the first blank.

Remember, the subject here is ‘I’ so I need to use the ‘be’ verb ‘was’.

Remember, the subject here is 'I' so I need to use the 'be' verb 'was'.

Then ‘verb-ing’.

Then 'verb-ing'.

‘While I was shopping’

'While I was shopping'

Now ‘someone’ can be a ‘he’ or ‘she’.

Now 'someone' can be a 'he' or 'she'.

Therefore, again we need to use ‘was’

Therefore, again we need to use 'was'

and then the ‘verb-ing’ of ‘steal’.

and then the 'verb-ing' of 'steal'.

‘While I was shopping, someone was stealing my bike.’

'While I was shopping, someone was stealing my bike.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘While he blank’

'While he blank'

I want you to use the verb ‘cook’.

I want you to use the verb 'cook'.

The subject is ‘he’ and so I need to use ‘was cooking’.

The subject is 'he' and so I need to use 'was cooking'.

‘While he was cooking, his girlfriend was cleaning.’

'While he was cooking, his girlfriend was cleaning.'

Did you get that?

Did you get that?

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

Try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Jane was looking for us while we get off the plane.’

'Jane was looking for us while we get off the plane.'

The first part of the sentence is correct.

The first part of the sentence is correct.

‘Jane was looking’

'Jane was looking'

Now the second part of the sentence.

Now the second part of the sentence.

Notice it's not in the past continuous tense.

Notice it's not in the past continuous tense.

‘While we get off the plane’

'While we get off the plane'

So what we need to do is say, ‘were getting’.

So what we need to do is say, 'were getting'.

‘Jane was looking for us while we were getting off the plane.’

'Jane was looking for us while we were getting off the plane.'

The next sentence says, 'I was watching TV while my wife sleep’

The next sentence says, 'I was watching TV while my wife sleep'

Again this part of the sentence did not use the past continuous tense.

Again this part of the sentence did not use the past continuous tense.

My wife is a ‘she’ and so I need to say ‘was sleeping’.

My wife is a 'she' and so I need to say 'was sleeping'.

‘I was watching TV while my wife was sleeping.’

'I was watching TV while my wife was sleeping.'

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Good job, everybody in learning the past  

Good job, everybody in learning the past

continuous tense.

continuous tense.

This tense can be a little difficult and a little tricky.

This tense can be a little difficult and a little tricky.

Especially when it comes to the ‘when’ and ‘while’ usage.

Especially when it comes to the 'when' and 'while' usage.

It'll take some practice to really master it, but I know you can do it.

It'll take some practice to really master it, but I know you can do it.

Keep studying English and I'll see you in the next video. 

Keep studying English and I'll see you in the next video.

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I'm Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video, I will introduce the past perfect tense.

In this video, I will introduce the past perfect tense.

This tense is used to describe an action that took place at a specific time in the past.

This tense is used to describe an action that took place at a specific time in the past.

This tense can be a little tricky, but don't worry I will guide you through it.

This tense can be a little tricky, but don't worry I will guide you through it.

There's so much to learn and it's a very important tense.

There's so much to learn and it's a very important tense.

So keep watching.

তাই দেখতে থাকুন।

Let's take a look at the first usage of the past perfect tense.

Let's take a look at the first usage of the past perfect tense.

This tense can be used to describe an action in the past

This tense can be used to describe an action in the past

that happened before another action in the past.

that happened before another action in the past.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘I have visited China before I moved there.’

'I have visited China before I moved there.'

No matter what the subject you follow with ‘had’,

No matter what the subject you follow with 'had',

So that's easy.

So that's easy.

‘I had’ ‘Steve had’

'I had' 'Steve had'

‘The plane had’ and ‘We had’.

'The plane had' and 'We had'.

Then, we follow with the past participle of the verb.

Then, we follow with the past participle of the verb.

In this case, it's ‘visited’.

In this case, it's 'visited'.

‘I had visited China.’

'I had visited China.'

Now you'll notice that the second verb is in the past simple tense.

Now you'll notice that the second verb is in the past simple tense.

‘I moved there.’

'I moved there.'

And I'll talk about that a little bit more later on.

And I'll talk about that a little bit more later on.

‘Steve had bought the book.’

'Steve had bought the book.'

Again, ‘subject’, ‘had’ and ‘past participle’.

Again, 'subject', 'had' and 'past participle'.

In this case, the verb is ‘buy’.

In this case, the verb is 'buy'.

‘Steve had bought the book before he read it.’

'Steve had bought the book before he read it.'

Again, we have the simple tense of ‘read’ which is ‘read’.

Again, we have the simple tense of 'read' which is 'read'.

And finally, ‘The plane had left by the time I got to the airport.’

And finally, 'The plane had left by the time I got to the airport.'

Again, the first part of this sentence is in the past perfect tense.

Again, the first part of this sentence is in the past perfect tense.

‘The plane had left’.

'The plane had left'.

This is the past participle of ‘leave’.

This is the past participle of 'leave'.

The second verb says, ‘I got to the airport.’

The second verb says, 'I got to the airport.'

‘got’ is the past tense of ‘get’.

'got' is the past tense of 'get'.

Now what these three sentences have in common is that you'll see, ‘before’.

Now what these three sentences have in common is that you'll see, 'before'.

‘before’ or ‘by the time’.

'before' or 'by the time'.

They all mean the same thing.

They all mean the same thing.

The verb that is in the past perfect tense happened first.

The verb that is in the past perfect tense happened first.

The verb that's in the past simple tense happen after.

The verb that's in the past simple tense happen after.

So again, for the first example.

So again, for the first example.

‘before I move there’ That happened later.

'before I move there' That happened later.

Before that, ‘I had already visited China.’

Before that, 'I had already visited China.'

Do you understand how that works?

Do you understand how that works?

Let's take a look at the last example.

Let's take a look at the last example.

‘When they arrived, we had already started the game.’

'When they arrived, we had already started the game.'

So maybe they were late or something had happened.

So maybe they were late or something had happened.

But ‘When they arrived’, this is the past simple tense.

But 'When they arrived', this is the past simple tense.

So this happened second.

So this happened second.

‘We had already started the game.’

'We had already started the game.'

This action had already started.

This action had already started.

It started before this action.

It started before this action.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Earlier I mentioned that the past perfect tense can be used to describe an action

Earlier I mentioned that the past perfect tense can be used to describe an action

that happened in the past before another action in the past.

that happened in the past before another action in the past.

We can do the same thing but also emphasize the duration.

We can do the same thing but also emphasize the duration.

How long that first action happened.

How long that first action happened.

We do this by using four and a duration.

We do this by using four and a duration.

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

‘I had owned my computer for two months before it broke.’

'I had owned my computer for two months before it broke.'

This is very similar to the first usage.

This is very similar to the first usage.

‘I had’ and the past participle of the verb.

'I had' and the past participle of the verb.

This part shows the action that happened earlier in the past.

This part shows the action that happened earlier in the past.

The second part, ‘it broke’.

The second part, 'it broke'.

The past simple tense verb shows the action in the past

The past simple tense verb shows the action in the past

that happened later than the first action.

that happened later than the first action.

However, you'll notice that this sentence has a duration, ‘for two months’.

However, you'll notice that this sentence has a duration, 'for two months'.

‘I had owned my computer for two months before it broke.’

'I had owned my computer for two months before it broke.'

All I'm doing here is showing how long the first action had been true.

All I'm doing here is showing how long the first action had been true.

Let's take a look at the next example.

Let's take a look at the next example.

‘Jim had been lonely for a long time until he got a puppy.’

'Jim had been lonely for a long time until he got a puppy.'

Again, we have subject ‘had’, past participle.

Again, we have subject 'had', past participle.

And then we have the past simple ‘he got a puppy’.

And then we have the past simple 'he got a puppy'.

All we're doing here is emphasizing how long first action had been true.

All we're doing here is emphasizing how long first action had been true.

He had been lonely for a long time.

He had been lonely for a long time.

That is until the later action, ‘he got a puppy.’

That is until the later action, 'he got a puppy.'

And finally, ‘She and I had been friends for many years before she became my wife.’

And finally, 'She and I had been friends for many years before she became my wife.'

The first part of the sentence is the past perfect.

The first part of the sentence is the past perfect.

It happened before she became my wife.

It happened before she became my wife.

But I want to explain how long that had been true for many years.

But I want to explain how long that had been true for many years.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now I'll introduce how to form the negative in the past perfect tense.

Now I'll introduce how to form the negative in the past perfect tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

The first sentence says, ‘I had not eaten at the restaurant before I went yesterday.’

The first sentence says, 'I had not eaten at the restaurant before I went yesterday.'

Again, we have the past perfect tense here and the past simple tense here.

Again, we have the past perfect tense here and the past simple tense here.

This one is the action that happened earlier in the past

This one is the action that happened earlier in the past

And this one over here is the action that happened later in the past.

And this one over here is the action that happened later in the past.

However, because this is the negative, what I'm going to do is add a 'not' between

However, because this is the negative, what I'm going to do is add a 'not' between

the ‘had’ and the past participle of the verb.

the 'had' and the past participle of the verb.

So I say, ‘I have not eaten’.

So I say, 'I have not eaten'.

Or I can use the contraction

Or I can use the contraction

and say, ‘I hadn't eaten at the restaurant before I went yesterday.’

and say, 'I hadn't eaten at the restaurant before I went yesterday.'

The next sentence is very similar.’

The next sentence is very similar.'

‘She had not been to the circus before she went last week.’

'She had not been to the circus before she went last week.'

Here's the action that happened earlier in the past,

Here's the action that happened earlier in the past,

and here's the action that happened later in the past.

and here's the action that happened later in the past.

However, again, because it's negative,

However, again, because it's negative,

I put a 'not' between ‘had’ and the past participle of the verb.

I put a 'not' between 'had' and the past participle of the verb.

Also, I can use the contraction and say, ‘She hadn't been to the circus.’

Also, I can use the contraction and say, 'She hadn't been to the circus.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘The cat hadn't chased the bird for very long before it flew away.’

'The cat hadn't chased the bird for very long before it flew away.'

Remember, we can show duration,

Remember, we can show duration,

or how long the first action was true.

or how long the first action was true.

by using 'for' and a duration.

by using 'for' and a duration.

Because this is the negative form,

Because this is the negative form,

again, I use 'had not' after the subject and before the past participle of the verb

again, I use 'had not' after the subject and before the past participle of the verb

In this case, the contraction ‘hadn't’ is already there for you.

In this case, the contraction 'hadn't' is already there for you.

‘We hadn't known each other for three months before we married.’

'We hadn't known each other for three months before we married.'

That's a pretty short time.

That's a pretty short time.

It shows the duration by saying ‘for’, How long?

It shows the duration by saying 'for', How long?

‘three months’

'three months'

Let's move on.

Let's move on.

Now, let's take a look at questions using ‘had’ in the past perfect tense.

Now, let's take a look at questions using 'had' in the past perfect tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘She had eaten lunch by noon.’

It says, 'She had eaten lunch by noon.'

Now, to turn this into a question is quite easy.

Now, to turn this into a question is quite easy.

All you have to do is change the order of the first two words.

All you have to do is change the order of the first two words.

So instead of ‘she had’, we say ‘Had she’.

So instead of 'she had', we say 'Had she'.

‘Had she eaten lunch by noon?’

'Had she eaten lunch by noon?'

You can say, ‘Yes, she had.’

You can say, 'Yes, she had.'

or ‘No, she hadn't.’

or 'No, she hadn't.'

The next sentence says, ‘It had rained before they left.’

The next sentence says, 'It had rained before they left.'

Again simply switched the order of the first two words.

Again simply switched the order of the first two words.

Instead of ‘It had’, say ‘Had it’ to make a question.

Instead of 'It had', say 'Had it' to make a question.

‘Had it rained before they left?’

'Had it rained before they left?'

To reply you can say, ‘Yes, it had.’

To reply you can say, 'Yes, it had.'

or ‘No, it hadn't.’

or 'No, it hadn't.'

Let's move on now.

Let's move on now.

I'll go into how to form ‘WH’ questions in the past perfect tense.

I'll go into how to form 'WH' questions in the past perfect tense.

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

Here we see at the beginning of each question a 'WH' word.

Here we see at the beginning of each question a 'WH' word.

‘where’, ‘who’, ‘what’, and ‘how’.

'where', 'who', 'what', and 'how'.

Let's take a look at the first question.

Let's take a look at the first question.

‘Where had he traveled before?’

'Where had he traveled before?'

You'll notice that after each ‘WH’ word, we have ‘had’.

You'll notice that after each 'WH' word, we have 'had'.

And then the subject and then the past participle of the verb.

And then the subject and then the past participle of the verb.

‘Where had he traveled before?’

'Where had he traveled before?'

The next question says, ‘Who had she talked to before?’

The next question says, 'Who had she talked to before?'

This is the same thing the ‘WH’ word

This is the same thing the 'WH' word

‘had she’ and then the past participle.

'had she' and then the past participle.

You'll notice here that we have the word ‘before’, but we didn't write a specific point in time.

You'll notice here that we have the word 'before', but we didn't write a specific point in time.

If you see that it simply means before now.

If you see that it simply means before now.

The next question says, ‘What had he eaten before lunch?’

The next question says, 'What had he eaten before lunch?'

Again we follow the same formula, however, here it says ‘lunch for you'.

Again we follow the same formula, however, here it says 'lunch for you'.

The last one says,

The last one says,

‘How long had she known him before she dated him?’

'How long had she known him before she dated him?'

Again how long ‘had’ + ‘subject’ and then the past participle.

Again how long 'had' + 'subject' and then the past participle.

Let's take a look at how  to answer these questions.

Let's take a look at how to answer these questions.

‘Where had he traveled before?’

'Where had he traveled before?'

‘He had traveled to Europe.’

'He had traveled to Europe.'

is one possible answer.

is one possible answer.

‘Who had she talked to before?’

'Who had she talked to before?'

Here I can say, ‘She had talked to her brother.’

Here I can say, 'She had talked to her brother.'

‘What had he eaten before lunch?’

'What had he eaten before lunch?'

‘He had eaten sushi before lunch.’

'He had eaten sushi before lunch.'

And finally, ‘How long had she known him before she dated him?’

And finally, 'How long had she known him before she dated him?'

‘She had known him for three years.’

'She had known him for three years.'

That is one possible answer.

That is one possible answer.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's take a look at some practice exercises for the basic usage of the past perfect tense.

Now let's take a look at some practice exercises for the basic usage of the past perfect tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

‘I blank for six hours before I had a break.’

'I blank for six hours before I had a break.'

The verb here is ‘work’.

The verb here is 'work'.

Remember, we need to say ‘I had’.

Remember, we need to say 'I had'.

No matter what the subject is, say ‘had’.

No matter what the subject is, say 'had'.

And then, you take the past participle of the verb.

And then, you take the past participle of the verb.

In this case, we would say ‘worked’.

In this case, we would say 'worked'.

‘I had worked for six hours before I had a break.’

'I had worked for six hours before I had a break.'

For the next sentence, I want you to try the negative form.

For the next sentence, I want you to try the negative form.

‘We blank TV before we listened to the radio.’

'We blank TV before we listened to the radio.'

Remember, for the negative form, we say ‘had not’

Remember, for the negative form, we say 'had not'

or we use the contraction, ‘hadn't’.

or we use the contraction, 'hadn't'.

‘We hadn’t’.

'We hadn't'.

And then, we need the past participle.

And then, we need the past participle.

‘We hadn't watched TV before we listened to the radio.’

'We hadn't watched TV before we listened to the radio.'

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Reggie had it be to Mexico before he went to Peru.’

'Reggie had it be to Mexico before he went to Peru.'

Well, we have the subject here and for the negative, ‘hadn't’ is correct.

Well, we have the subject here and for the negative, 'hadn't' is correct.

However, we need the past participle of the verb ‘be’.

However, we need the past participle of the verb 'be'.

So the correct answer is,

So the correct answer is,

‘Reggie hadn't been to Mexico before he went to Peru.’

'Reggie hadn't been to Mexico before he went to Peru.'

And finally, ‘Sally and Jan or they had do their job.’

And finally, 'Sally and Jan or they had do their job.'

Hmm.

Hmm.

Remember, we need the past participle.

Remember, we need the past participle.

We don't say do.

We don't say do.

We say ‘done’.

We say 'done'.

‘Sally and Jan had done their job before they watched TV.’

'Sally and Jan had done their job before they watched TV.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

In this checkup, we'll take a look at some practice exercises

In this checkup, we'll take a look at some practice exercises

for the past perfect tense that describes how long.

for the past perfect tense that describes how long.

Let's take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘You blank at the park for three hours before you came home.’

'You blank at the park for three hours before you came home.'

Remember, we start with the subject and then ‘had’.

Remember, we start with the subject and then 'had'.

So I'm going to add that here,

So I'm going to add that here,

then we need the past participle of the verb ‘be’.

then we need the past participle of the verb 'be'.

And that is ‘been’.

And that is 'been'.

‘You had been at the park for three hours before you came home.’

'You had been at the park for three hours before you came home.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘They blank for six hours before they took a break.’

'They blank for six hours before they took a break.'

Again, no matter what the subject, we have ‘had’ and then the past participle.

Again, no matter what the subject, we have 'had' and then the past participle.

So the answer is,

So the answer is,

‘They had studied for six hours before they took a break.’

'They had studied for six hours before they took a break.'

Now, find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now, find the mistake in the next sentence.

It's a little bit longer so it might take you a while.

It's a little bit longer so it might take you a while.

‘They had been known each other for ten years before they had their first fight.’

'They had been known each other for ten years before they had their first fight.'

Can you find the mistake?

আপনি ভুল খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

Well, we have the subject and ‘had’, but check this out.

Well, we have the subject and 'had', but check this out.

There are two past participles here.

There are two past participles here.

We need to get rid of one of them.

We need to get rid of one of them.

We can take out this verb and say, ‘They had known each other for ten years

We can take out this verb and say, 'They had known each other for ten years

before they had their first fight.’

before they had their first fight.'

The next sentence says, ‘I have played soccer for many years before I scored my first goal.’

The next sentence says, 'I have played soccer for many years before I scored my first goal.'

This sentence doesn't look wrong at first.

This sentence doesn't look wrong at first.

But remember, in the past perfect tense, we need to say ‘had’.

But remember, in the past perfect tense, we need to say 'had'.

‘I had played soccer for many years before I scored my first goal.’

'I had played soccer for many years before I scored my first goal.'

Good job, everybody.

Good job, everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Now you have a better understanding of the past perfect tense.

Now you have a better understanding of the past perfect tense.

I know it can be a little difficult but keep studying,

I know it can be a little difficult but keep studying,

and keep practicing, and you will get better.

and keep practicing, and you will get better.

I know studying English is not easy but with time and effort,

I know studying English is not easy but with time and effort,

I know you'll master it.

I know you'll master it.

Thank you so much for watching and I'll see you in the next video.

Thank you so much for watching and I'll see you in the next video.

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I'm Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video, I will introduce the past perfect continuous tense.

In this video, I will introduce the past perfect continuous tense.

It's a great tense that helps you express an ongoing action

It's a great tense that helps you express an ongoing action

in the past continuing up to another point in the past.

in the past continuing up to another point in the past.

There's a lot to learn, so keep watching.

There's a lot to learn, so keep watching.

One usage of the past perfect continuous tense is to talk about an ongoing action in the

One usage of the past perfect continuous tense is to talk about an ongoing action in the

past that continued up to another point in the

past that continued up to another point in the

past.

past.

You can use ‘for’ and a duration to talk about

You can use 'for' and a duration to talk about

how long that action was in progress.

how long that action was in progress.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘I had been waiting for the bus for two hours before it arrived.’

'I had been waiting for the bus for two hours before it arrived.'

You'll notice that at the beginning.

You'll notice that at the beginning.

It doesn't matter what the subject is, we follow with ‘had been’.

It doesn't matter what the subject is, we follow with 'had been'.

For example, ‘I had been’, ‘Chuck had been’,

For example, 'I had been', 'Chuck had been',

And ‘Tom and Kim had been.’

And 'Tom and Kim had been.'

And then we follow with the verb ‘-ing’.

And then we follow with the verb '-ing'.

‘waiting’.

'waiting'.

‘I had been waiting.’

'I had been waiting.'

Now this is the ongoing action that happened first.

Now this is the ongoing action that happened first.

Again, four and two hours shows the duration.

Again, four and two hours shows the duration.

The second part says, ‘it arrived’.

The second part says, 'it arrived'.

This verb is in the past simple tense.

This verb is in the past simple tense.

Therefore, that is the second action.

Therefore, that is the second action.

It's the action that this first action happened until this action happened,

It's the action that this first action happened until this action happened,

so again, ‘I had been waiting for the bus,’ happened

so again, 'I had been waiting for the bus,' happened

first.

first.

And then, it happened until the bus arrived.

And then, it happened until the bus arrived.

‘Chuck had been cooking,’ Again, that part's easy.

'Chuck had been cooking,' Again, that part's easy.

No matter what’s the subject, we say ‘had been’ and then verb ‘-ing’.

No matter what's the subject, we say 'had been' and then verb '-ing'.

Again, I can show how long Chuck had been cooking by saying ‘for an hour’, showing

Again, I can show how long Chuck had been cooking by saying 'for an hour', showing

the duration.

the duration.

And then, I finished by saying, ‘before he finished’.

And then, I finished by saying, 'before he finished'.

He had been cooking up to this point in the past.

He had been cooking up to this point in the past.

Finally, ‘Tom and Kim had been walking,’ This part should be familiar to you by now,

Finally, 'Tom and Kim had been walking,' This part should be familiar to you by now,

‘for an hour’ Again, that shows duration.

'for an hour' Again, that shows duration.

‘before they rested.’

'before they rested.'

So they had been walking for an hour before they took a break.

So they had been walking for an hour before they took a break.

Before they rested.

Before they rested.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

The past perfect continuous tense is also used to express cause and effect in the

The past perfect continuous tense is also used to express cause and effect in the

past.

past.

The verb that's in the past perfect continuous tense shows the cause,

The verb that's in the past perfect continuous tense shows the cause,

why something happened.

why something happened.

We can use ‘because’ or ‘so’ to show the cause and effect.

We can use 'because' or 'so' to show the cause and effect.

Here, I'll explain.

Here, I'll explain.

‘Jason was tired because he had been jogging.’

'Jason was tired because he had been jogging.'

The first part of the sentence is in the past tense.

The first part of the sentence is in the past tense.

‘Jason was tired,’ However, we see ‘why?’

'Jason was tired,' However, we see 'why?'

Well, because, ‘he had been jogging’.

Well, because, 'he had been jogging'.

The second part of this sentence is in the past perfect continuous tense.

The second part of this sentence is in the past perfect continuous tense.

‘he had been’, remember no matter what the subject,

'he had been', remember no matter what the subject,

we follow with ‘had been’ and jogging – ‘verb -ing’.

we follow with 'had been' and jogging – 'verb -ing'.

‘he had been jogging’ This shows why Jason was tired.

'he had been jogging' This shows why Jason was tired.

The next sentence says, ‘The pavement’ or it ‘was wet because

The next sentence says, 'The pavement' or it 'was wet because

it had been raining.’

it had been raining.'

Similar to the first sentence, ‘it had been raining’ shows the cause.

Similar to the first sentence, 'it had been raining' shows the cause.

Why was the pavement wet?

Why was the pavement wet?

‘The pavement was wet because it had been raining.’

'The pavement was wet because it had been raining.'

In this sentence, we see a little difference.

In this sentence, we see a little difference.

‘The children had been playing’ Again, this is the past perfect continuous

'The children had been playing' Again, this is the past perfect continuous

tense.

tense.

‘had been playing’ The second part says, ‘the room was a mess’.

'had been playing' The second part says, 'the room was a mess'.

So here, instead of ‘because’ like the first two sentences,

So here, instead of 'because' like the first two sentences,

I used ‘so’.

I used 'so'.

So the order has been changed but the meaning is the same.

So the order has been changed but the meaning is the same.

This, ‘the children had been playing’ is why the room was a mess.

This, 'the children had been playing' is why the room was a mess.

This is the cause and this is the effect.

This is the cause and this is the effect.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's go into the negative form of the past perfect continuous tense.

Now let's go into the negative form of the past perfect continuous tense.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘I had not been working for a day before I quit.’

'I had not been working for a day before I quit.'

So no matter what the subject ‘I’, ‘you’, ‘she’, or ‘it’,

So no matter what the subject 'I', 'you', 'she', or 'it',

just like in the affirmative, we say ‘had’, but after the ‘had’, in the negative form,

just like in the affirmative, we say 'had', but after the 'had', in the negative form,

we add ‘not’. ‘had not’

we add 'not'. 'had not'

‘had not’ or you can use the contraction ‘hadn't’.

'had not' or you can use the contraction 'hadn't'.

Which is a combination of ‘had’ and ‘not’ together.

Which is a combination of 'had' and 'not' together.

‘I had not been working’ The rest of the sentence is the same.

'I had not been working' The rest of the sentence is the same.

‘been + verb -ing’ ‘I had not been working for a day before

'been + verb -ing' 'I had not been working for a day before

I quit.’

I quit.'

The next sentence says, ‘You had not been cutting onions for long

The next sentence says, 'You had not been cutting onions for long

before you cried.’

before you cried.'

Again, the ‘not’ goes between ‘had’ and ‘been’.

Again, the 'not' goes between 'had' and 'been'.

‘She hadn't been studying for long when she fell asleep.’

'She hadn't been studying for long when she fell asleep.'

Here, we have the contraction.

Here, we have the contraction.

And finally, ‘It hadn't been snowing for long when it

And finally, 'It hadn't been snowing for long when it

stopped.’

stopped.'

Again, we have the contraction for ‘had not’ here.

Again, we have the contraction for 'had not' here.

You'll notice that in the first two sentences, I used ‘before’.

You'll notice that in the first two sentences, I used 'before'.

And in the last two, I used ‘when’.

And in the last two, I used 'when'.

Either one can be used to show when the first action stopped.

Either one can be used to show when the first action stopped.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's go into how to form basic questions in the past perfect continuous tense.

Now let's go into how to form basic questions in the past perfect continuous tense.

Here is the first example.

Here is the first example.

‘He had been driving all day before he arrived.’

'He had been driving all day before he arrived.'

Now, to turn this into a question, all we have to do is change the order of the first

Now, to turn this into a question, all we have to do is change the order of the first

two words.

two words.

Instead of ‘He had’, now I can say, ‘Had he’, in order to form a question.

Instead of 'He had', now I can say, 'Had he', in order to form a question.

‘Had he been driving all day before he arrived?’

'Had he been driving all day before he arrived?'

The next sentence says, ‘The dog had been barking because it was

The next sentence says, 'The dog had been barking because it was

scared.’

scared.'

In this case, the subject is ‘The dog’.

In this case, the subject is 'The dog'.

And then we follow with ‘had’.

And then we follow with 'had'.

To turn this into a question, again, we switch the order.

To turn this into a question, again, we switch the order.

‘Had the dog been barking because it was scared?’

'Had the dog been barking because it was scared?'

You'll notice that in the question, the rest of the words stay in the same place.

You'll notice that in the question, the rest of the words stay in the same place.

Now, in the first question, we're asking how long an action happened,

Now, in the first question, we're asking how long an action happened,

or how long it was ongoing in the past.

or how long it was ongoing in the past.

And in this question, we ask about cause and effect.

And in this question, we ask about cause and effect.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, I'll introduce how to form WH questions in the past perfect continuous tense.

Now, I'll introduce how to form WH questions in the past perfect continuous tense.

Take a look at these examples.

Take a look at these examples.

You'll notice that they all start with a WH word.

You'll notice that they all start with a WH word.

Why, where, what, and who.

Why, where, what, and who.

You might also have noticed that after we have ‘had’.

You might also have noticed that after we have 'had'.

‘Why had’ ‘Where had’

'Why had' 'Where had'

‘What had’ and ‘Who had’

'What had' and 'Who had'

In the first question, after that comes the subject.

In the first question, after that comes the subject.

‘Why had you’ And then ‘been + verb -ing’

'Why had you' And then 'been + verb -ing'

And that's the same pattern we follow for all of these sentences.

And that's the same pattern we follow for all of these sentences.

So ‘Why had you been studying so much?’

So 'Why had you been studying so much?'

I can answer by saying, ‘I had been studying so much because I have

I can answer by saying, 'I had been studying so much because I have

a test.’

a test.'

‘Where had you been traveling before you came here?’

'Where had you been traveling before you came here?'

I can say, ‘I had been traveling through Asia.’

I can say, 'I had been traveling through Asia.'

‘What had they been playing before they played soccer?’

'What had they been playing before they played soccer?'

I can answer, ‘They had been playing baseball.’

I can answer, 'They had been playing baseball.'

And finally, ‘Who had she been talking to before she

And finally, 'Who had she been talking to before she

left home?’

left home?'

I can answer, ‘She had been talking to her boyfriend.’

I can answer, 'She had been talking to her boyfriend.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's start a checkup for the past perfect continuous tense.

Let's start a checkup for the past perfect continuous tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘They __ for a long time before they went home.’

It says, 'They __ for a long time before they went home.'

Try to fill in the blank with the verb ‘work’ in this tense.

Try to fill in the blank with the verb 'work' in this tense.

Remember, no matter what the subject, we follow the subject with ‘had been’.

Remember, no matter what the subject, we follow the subject with 'had been'.

So we say, ‘They had been’.

So we say, 'They had been'.

What happens to the verb?

What happens to the verb?

Remember, we add ‘-ing’.

Remember, we add '-ing'.

So the sentence is, ‘They had been working for a long time before they went home.’

So the sentence is, 'They had been working for a long time before they went home.'

Now, take a look at the second sentence.

Now, take a look at the second sentence.

I want you to use the negative.

I want you to use the negative.

‘I __ TV for a year before I started again.’

'I __ TV for a year before I started again.'

Remember, the negative form for this tense starts with the subject

Remember, the negative form for this tense starts with the subject

and then ‘had not been’.

and then 'had not been'.

Or I can use the contraction ‘hadn't’.

Or I can use the contraction 'hadn't'.

‘I hadn't been’ And then again, verb ‘-ing’.

'I hadn't been' And then again, verb '-ing'.

‘I hadn't been watching TV for a year before I started again.’

'I hadn't been watching TV for a year before I started again.'

Now, try to find the mistake in this next sentence.

Now, try to find the mistake in this next sentence.

‘Gina and I hadn't been do any work before we started.’

'Gina and I hadn't been do any work before we started.'

What's the error?

What's the error?

You'll notice that the verb does not have an ‘-ing’.

You'll notice that the verb does not have an '-ing'.

To make the sentence correct, we must say, ‘Gina and I hadn't been doing

To make the sentence correct, we must say, 'Gina and I hadn't been doing

any work before we started.’

any work before we started.'

Now, find the mistake here.

Now, find the mistake here.

‘He had be watching YouTube because he had some free time.’

'He had be watching YouTube because he had some free time.'

‘He had’, that's correct, but we need to change ‘be’ to been’.

'He had', that's correct, but we need to change 'be' to been'.

And ‘watching’ is correct.

And 'watching' is correct.

So, ‘He had been watching YouTube because he had some free time.’

So, 'He had been watching YouTube because he had some free time.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's move on to another checkup of the past perfect continuous tense.

Now, let's move on to another checkup of the past perfect continuous tense.

Take a look at the first example.

Take a look at the first example.

It says, ‘The company __ employees because they worked hard.’

It says, 'The company __ employees because they worked hard.'

Use the verb ‘promote’ in the past perfect continuous tense.

Use the verb 'promote' in the past perfect continuous tense.

Remember, no matter what the subject, we follow with ‘had been’.

Remember, no matter what the subject, we follow with 'had been'.

So we say, ‘The company had been’ and then verb ‘-ing’, so ‘promoting’.

So we say, 'The company had been' and then verb '-ing', so 'promoting'.

‘The company had been promoting employees because they worked hard.’

'The company had been promoting employees because they worked hard.'

The next example says, ‘I __ your emails for a while because they went to the spam

The next example says, 'I __ your emails for a while because they went to the spam

folder.’

folder.'

Here, try to use the negative form with the verb ‘get’.

Here, try to use the negative form with the verb 'get'.

Remember, in the negative form, we say ‘had not been getting’

Remember, in the negative form, we say 'had not been getting'

Or the contraction ‘hadn't been getting’.

Or the contraction 'hadn't been getting'.

‘I hadn't been getting your emails for a while because they went to the spam folder.’

'I hadn't been getting your emails for a while because they went to the spam folder.'

Now look for the mistake in the next sentence.

Now look for the mistake in the next sentence.

‘I had been work a lot because I needed the money.’

'I had been work a lot because I needed the money.'

What's the mistake?

What's the mistake?

Remember, we need to add ‘-ing’ to the verb.

Remember, we need to add '-ing' to the verb.

‘I had been working a lot because I needed the money.’

'I had been working a lot because I needed the money.'

The last sentence says, ‘He has been smoking because he was stressed.’

The last sentence says, 'He has been smoking because he was stressed.'

Can you find the mistake?

আপনি ভুল খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

Remember, we're practicing the past perfect continuous.

Remember, we're practicing the past perfect continuous.

In this case, we need ‘had’ after the subject, not ‘has’.

In this case, we need 'had' after the subject, not 'has'.

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Thank you so much for watching this  grammar course on the past tense. 

Thank you so much for watching this grammar course on the past tense.

Now, if you haven’t had a chance to check  out my grammar course on the present tense  

Now, if you haven't had a chance to check out my grammar course on the present tense

or the future tense, make sure you do that now. Thank you again for watching and I will see you  

or the future tense, make sure you do that now. Thank you again for watching and I will see you

next time. Bye. 

next time. বিদায়।

Hi, everyone.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I'm Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video, I will introduce the future simple tense

In this video, I will introduce the future simple tense

using 'will' and 'be going to'.

using 'will' and 'be going to'.

This is a very important tense that will help you express future actions and plans.

This is a very important tense that will help you express future actions and plans.

There's a lot to learn, so let's get started.

There's a lot to learn, so let's get started.

The future simple tense can be used to express a future action.

The future simple tense can be used to express a future action.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

‘I'm cold.’

'I'm cold.'

Well that's right now.

Well that's right now.

‘I will close the window.’

'I will close the window.'

We start with the subject ‘will’.

We start with the subject 'will'.

And then, the base verb.

And then, the base verb.

‘I will close the window.’

'I will close the window.'

In this example, I'm making a sudden decision because how I feel right now.

In this example, I'm making a sudden decision because how I feel right now.

I will close the window because I'm cold right now.

I will close the window because I'm cold right now.

‘I will be at the library tomorrow.’

'I will be at the library tomorrow.'

Again, you start with the subject and then ‘will’.

Again, you start with the subject and then 'will'.

After that, you have the base verb.

After that, you have the base verb.

You can use the ‘be’ verb to talk about a confirmed plan.

You can use the 'be' verb to talk about a confirmed plan.

‘I will be at the library tomorrow.’

'I will be at the library tomorrow.'

The economy will get better next year.

The economy will get better next year.

In this case, the subject is ‘the economy’.

In this case, the subject is 'the economy'.

Again, we follow with ‘will’ and the base verb ‘get’.

Again, we follow with 'will' and the base verb 'get'.

‘The economy will get better next year.’

'The economy will get better next year.'

I'm making a prediction here about something that will happen in the future.

I'm making a prediction here about something that will happen in the future.

And finally, ‘I will help you with your homework.’

And finally, 'I will help you with your homework.'

I'm making a future plan to help you.

I'm making a future plan to help you.

‘I will help you with your homework.’

'I will help you with your homework.'

It doesn't say when but I am talking about the future.

It doesn't say when but I am talking about the future.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

You can also use ‘be going to’ to express a future action.

You can also use 'be going to' to express a future action.

It's almost the same as ‘will’.

It's almost the same as 'will'.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

‘There's no milk.

'There's no milk.

I'm going to buy some.’

I'm going to buy some.'

So what you see here is the subject and then the ‘be’ verb - ‘am’.

So what you see here is the subject and then the 'be' verb - 'am'.

‘I am’

'I am'

And then here we used a contraction ‘I'm’.

And then here we used a contraction 'I'm'.

‘I'm going to buy some.’

'I'm going to buy some.'

I made a decision to buy some because there's no milk.

I made a decision to buy some because there's no milk.

The next sentence says, ‘It looks like it's going to snow tomorrow.’

The next sentence says, 'It looks like it's going to snow tomorrow.'

Here the subject is ‘it’ and so I use the ‘be’ verb – ‘is’.

Here the subject is 'it' and so I use the 'be' verb – 'is'.

‘it is’

'it is'

‘It's’ is the contraction.

'It's' is the contraction.

‘It's going to’ And then we use the base verb ‘snow’.

'It's going to' And then we use the base verb 'snow'.

The word ‘tomorrow’ shows that this is a future action.

The word 'tomorrow' shows that this is a future action.

‘He's going to take a trip in the summer.’

'He's going to take a trip in the summer.'

Because the subject is ‘he’, we use the ‘be’ verb – is.

Because the subject is 'he', we use the 'be' verb – is.

And we can use the contraction ‘he's’. ‘he is’ or ‘he's’ going to

And we can use the contraction 'he's'. 'he is' or 'he's' going to

And then the base verb ‘take’

And then the base verb 'take'

‘take a trip in the summer’

'take a trip in the summer'

Again an action happening in the future.

Again an action happening in the future.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's take a look at the negative form of

Now, let's take a look at the negative form of

the future simple tense.

the future simple tense.

The first example says, ‘Stan will not like his English score.’

The first example says, 'Stan will not like his English score.'

No matter what the subject is, we follow with ‘will not’ and then the

No matter what the subject is, we follow with 'will not' and then the

base form of the verb.

base form of the verb.

‘Stan will not like his English score.’

'Stan will not like his English score.'

‘We won't give you money anymore.’

'We won't give you money anymore.'

In this case, the subject is ‘we’.

In this case, the subject is 'we'.

And we follow with the contraction ‘won't’.

And we follow with the contraction 'won't'.

It sounds really different and it's different from other contractions,

It sounds really different and it's different from other contractions,

but ‘won't’ is the contraction for ‘will not’

but 'won't' is the contraction for 'will not'

so you can say ‘we will not’ or ‘we won't’.

so you can say 'we will not' or 'we won't'.

They're the same.

They're the same.

‘We won't give you money anymore.’

'We won't give you money anymore.'

Again, you notice the base verb ‘give’ after ‘not’.

Again, you notice the base verb 'give' after 'not'.

‘He is not going to fly until next week.’

'He is not going to fly until next week.'

This sentence uses ‘be going to’.

This sentence uses 'be going to'.

The subject is ‘he’.

The subject is 'he'.

And therefore the ‘be’ verb we use is – ‘is’

And therefore the 'be' verb we use is – 'is'

However we put a ‘not’ after the ‘be’ verb.

However we put a 'not' after the 'be' verb.

‘He is not going to …’ And then the base verb.

'He is not going to …' And then the base verb.

‘He is not going to fly until next week.’

'He is not going to fly until next week.'

The last sentence says, ‘You are not going to go to the party tonight.’

The last sentence says, 'You are not going to go to the party tonight.'

The subject is ‘you’ and so we use the ‘be’ verb – ‘are’.

The subject is 'you' and so we use the 'be' verb – 'are'.

‘You are not going to go …’ That's the base verb.

'You are not going to go …' That's the base verb.

‘… to the party tonight.’

'… to the party tonight.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's take a look at how to form basic questions in the future simple tense.

Now let's take a look at how to form basic questions in the future simple tense.

The first sentence says, ‘He will play with us.’

The first sentence says, 'He will play with us.'

To turn this into a question, all we have to do is change the order of the

To turn this into a question, all we have to do is change the order of the

first two words.

first two words.

So ‘He will becomes ‘Will he’.

So 'He will becomes 'Will he'.

‘Will he play with us?’

'Will he play with us?'

‘The next sentence says, ‘He is going to play with us.’

'The next sentence says, 'He is going to play with us.'

This one uses ‘be going to’.

This one uses 'be going to'.

The subject is ‘he’.

The subject is 'he'.

And so the ‘be’ verb to use is – ‘is’.

And so the 'be' verb to use is – 'is'.

Then we have ‘going to’ and then the base verb.

Then we have 'going to' and then the base verb.

‘He is going to play with us.’

'He is going to play with us.'

When I make a question, I simply again change the order of the first two words.

When I make a question, I simply again change the order of the first two words.

‘Is he going to play with us?’

'Is he going to play with us?'

Now if the subject were to be ‘you’ or ‘we’ or ‘they’,

Now if the subject were to be 'you' or 'we' or 'they',

we would say ‘they are’.

we would say 'they are'.

And so the question would say, ‘Are they'.

And so the question would say, 'Are they'.

'Are they going to play with them?’

'Are they going to play with them?'

for example.

for example.

So again, remember, for ‘will’ in the future simple tense,

So again, remember, for 'will' in the future simple tense,

just say ‘will’ subject and then the base form of the verb.

just say 'will' subject and then the base form of the verb.

However for ‘be going to’ questions, make sure that you pay attention to the proper

However for 'be going to' questions, make sure that you pay attention to the proper

'be' verb to use at the beginning of the question.

'be' verb to use at the beginning of the question.

To answer the first question, ‘Will he play with us?’

To answer the first question, 'Will he play with us?'

You can say ‘Yes, he will’ or ‘No, he won't’.

You can say 'Yes, he will' or 'No, he won't'.

‘Is he going to play with us?’

'Is he going to play with us?'

You can say, ‘Yes, he's going to’ or ‘No, he isn't going to’.

You can say, 'Yes, he's going to' or 'No, he isn't going to'.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's look at how to form ‘WH’ questions in the future simple tense.

Let's look at how to form 'WH' questions in the future simple tense.

If you notice each question begins with a ‘WH’ word.

If you notice each question begins with a 'WH' word.

Who

Who

When

When

Where

Where

And What

And What

The first two sentences use ‘will’ for the future simple tense.

The first two sentences use 'will' for the future simple tense.

‘Who will win the game?’

'Who will win the game?'

To answer I can say, ‘My team will win the game.’

To answer I can say, 'My team will win the game.'

‘When will they arrive?’

'When will they arrive?'

‘They will arrive in two hours.’

'They will arrive in two hours.'

Now these two sentences have ‘be going to’.

Now these two sentences have 'be going to'.

‘Where is he going to study?’

'Where is he going to study?'

In this case, I have the ‘be’ verb – ‘is’ because the subject is ‘he’.

In this case, I have the 'be' verb – 'is' because the subject is 'he'.

‘Where is he going to study?’

'Where is he going to study?'

I can say, ‘He is going to study at the library.’

I can say, 'He is going to study at the library.'

And finally, ‘What are you going to do?’

And finally, 'What are you going to do?'

In this case, I use the ‘be’ verb – ‘are’ because the subject is ‘you’.

In this case, I use the 'be' verb – 'are' because the subject is 'you'.

‘What are you going to do?’

'What are you going to do?'

‘I am going to take a shower.’

'I am going to take a shower.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

For this checkup let's take a look at the will usage for the future simple tense.

For this checkup let's take a look at the will usage for the future simple tense.

The first example says, ‘Jen and Paul [blank] home soon’

The first example says, 'Jen and Paul [blank] home soon'

with the verb ‘go’.

with the verb 'go'.

Remember, when using ‘will’ for the future simple tense,

Remember, when using 'will' for the future simple tense,

it doesn't matter what the subject is.

it doesn't matter what the subject is.

We say ‘will’ and then the base verb.

We say 'will' and then the base verb.

So here we can say, ‘Jen and Paul’ or ‘They will go home soon’.

So here we can say, 'Jen and Paul' or 'They will go home soon'.

‘I [blank] a scientist after I graduate.’

'I [blank] a scientist after I graduate.'

Try filling in the blank with ‘be’.

Try filling in the blank with 'be'.

Again, we simply say ‘will be’.

Again, we simply say 'will be'.

‘I will be a scientist after I graduate.’

'I will be a scientist after I graduate.'

Now try this one, ‘We [blank] that because it smells bad.’

Now try this one, 'We [blank] that because it smells bad.'

I want you to use the negative form with the verb ‘eat’.

I want you to use the negative form with the verb 'eat'.

Here we say, ‘will not eat’ or remember we can use the contraction ‘won't’.

Here we say, 'will not eat' or remember we can use the contraction 'won't'.

‘We will not eat that’ or ‘We won't eat that because it smells bad’.

'We will not eat that' or 'We won't eat that because it smells bad'.

Now look for the mistake in this sentence.

Now look for the mistake in this sentence.

‘I will eat a pizza for lunch.’

'I will eat a pizza for lunch.'

Remember, we need the base form of the verb.

Remember, we need the base form of the verb.

‘I will eat a pizza for lunch.’

'I will eat a pizza for lunch.'

‘Angie and I will playing a game.’

'Angie and I will playing a game.'

Again we need the base form of the verb.

Again we need the base form of the verb.

Angie and I will play a game.’

Angie and I will play a game.'

And finally, ‘Will she be cook dinner?’

And finally, 'Will she be cook dinner?'

This is a question.

This is a question.

However we need to say, ‘Will she cook dinner.’

However we need to say, 'Will she cook dinner.'

We do not need a ‘be’ verb here.

We do not need a 'be' verb here.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's practice the ‘be going to’ usage of the future simple tense.

Let's practice the 'be going to' usage of the future simple tense.

‘We [blank] going to _blank_ soccer.’

'We [blank] going to _blank_ soccer.'

I want you to use the verb ‘watch’.

I want you to use the verb 'watch'.

Remember, for ‘be going to’ in the future simple tense,

Remember, for 'be going to' in the future simple tense,

we start with the subject and then the ‘be’ verb.

we start with the subject and then the 'be' verb.

The subject here is ‘we’.

The subject here is 'we'.

So we need the ‘be’ verb – ‘are’.

So we need the 'be' verb – 'are'.

‘We are going to’ and then the base verb ‘watch’.

'We are going to' and then the base verb 'watch'.

‘We are going to watch soccer.’

'We are going to watch soccer.'

‘I [blank] going to [blank].’

'I [blank] going to [blank].'

The verb is ‘talk’.

The verb is 'talk'.

And I want you to use the negative form.

And I want you to use the negative form.

In this case, the subject is ‘I’.

In this case, the subject is 'I'.

And so I use the ‘be’ verb – ‘am’.

And so I use the 'be' verb – 'am'.

‘I am’ and then we need ‘not’.

'I am' and then we need 'not'.

‘I am not going to’

'I am not going to'

Then the base verb ‘talk’.

Then the base verb 'talk'.

‘Why [blank] you going to [blank]?’

'Why [blank] you going to [blank]?'

The verb here is ‘go’.

The verb here is 'go'.

In a question, especially a ‘WH’ question, we start with the ‘WH’ word,

In a question, especially a 'WH' question, we start with the 'WH' word,

and then the ‘be’ verb.

and then the 'be' verb.

‘are’ is the correct ‘be’ verb because the subject is ‘you’.

'are' is the correct 'be' verb because the subject is 'you'.

Then we have ‘going to’.

Then we have 'going to'.

And again, the base form of the verb.

And again, the base form of the verb.

‘Why are you going to go?’

'Why are you going to go?'

Now try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now try to find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘You are going to studying at home.’

'You are going to studying at home.'

Can you find the mistake?

আপনি ভুল খুঁজে পেতে পারেন?

‘You are going to’ that's correct.

'You are going to' that's correct.

But we need the base form of the verb.

But we need the base form of the verb.

‘You are going to study at home.’

'You are going to study at home.'

‘You will be going to learn English.’

'You will be going to learn English.'

‘You will be going’

'You will be going'

That sounds a little strange.

That sounds a little strange.

Remember, we don't need the ‘will’ here.

Remember, we don't need the 'will' here.

We're using ‘be going to’ and we need to change the ‘be’ verb to match the subject.

We're using 'be going to' and we need to change the 'be' verb to match the subject.

‘You are going to learn English’.

'You are going to learn English'.

Or remember, you can also say, ‘You will learn English.

Or remember, you can also say, 'You will learn English.

and finally ‘Is he going to do play soccer.’

and finally 'Is he going to do play soccer.'

uh-oh We have two verbs here.

uh-oh We have two verbs here.

‘Is he going to’ - that's correct.

'Is he going to' - that's correct.

But we have ‘do’ and ‘play’.

But we have 'do' and 'play'.

We don't need both, so we say, ‘Is he going to play soccer?’

We don't need both, so we say, 'Is he going to play soccer?'

Great job everybody.

Great job everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

You now have a better understanding of the future simple tense.

You now have a better understanding of the future simple tense.

There's still a lot of practice you need to do because this tense is so important.

There's still a lot of practice you need to do because this tense is so important.

Keep studying and I'll see you in the next video. 

Keep studying and I'll see you in the next video.

Hi, everybody.

সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I'm Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video, I will introduce the future continuous English grammar tense.

In this video, I will introduce the future continuous English grammar tense.

This tense can be used to express an ongoing action in the future.

This tense can be used to express an ongoing action in the future.

I'll go over the basics of this lesson.

I'll go over the basics of this lesson.

And by the end you'll have a better idea of when to use this tense.

And by the end you'll have a better idea of when to use this tense.

There's a lot to learn, so let's get started.

There's a lot to learn, so let's get started.

One usage of the future continuous tense

One usage of the future continuous tense

is to talk about an ongoing action that will happen in the future.

is to talk about an ongoing action that will happen in the future.

We include when this action will be happening.

We include when this action will be happening.

We can use ‘will be’ or ‘be going to be’.

We can use 'will be' or 'be going to be'.

To do this, let's take a look at some examples.

To do this, let's take a look at some examples.

‘I will be taking the test soon.’

'I will be taking the test soon.'

So you can see here we have the subject and then ‘will be’.

So you can see here we have the subject and then 'will be'.

After that, we include verb +ing.

After that, we include verb +ing.

The word ‘soon’ at the end of this sentence indicates when this action will be happening.

The word 'soon' at the end of this sentence indicates when this action will be happening.

‘I am going to be taking the test soon.’

'I am going to be taking the test soon.'

This sentence means the same thing as the first sentence,

This sentence means the same thing as the first sentence,

but instead of ‘will be’, we used ‘be going to be’.

but instead of 'will be', we used 'be going to be'.

Here the subject is ‘I’.

Here the subject is 'I'.

And therefore we have the ‘be’ verb ‘am’.

And therefore we have the 'be' verb 'am'.

‘I am going to be’ And then verb +ing.

'I am going to be' And then verb +ing.

‘I am going to be taking the test soon.’

'I am going to be taking the test soon.'

I can also use the contraction and say.

I can also use the contraction and say.

‘I'm going to be taking the test soon.’

'I'm going to be taking the test soon.'

The next sentence says, ‘He will be sleeping by 10 p.m.’

The next sentence says, 'He will be sleeping by 10 pm'

And the last sentence says, ‘They are going to be …’

And the last sentence says, 'They are going to be …'

Here, because the subject is ‘they’, we use ‘are’.

Here, because the subject is 'they', we use 'are'.

‘They are going to be studying …’ There's the verb +ing

'They are going to be studying …' There's the verb +ing

‘… next October.’

'… next October.'

‘by 10 pm’ and ‘next October’ show when these actions will be happening.

'by 10 pm' and 'next October' show when these actions will be happening.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

The future continuous tense is also used to show

The future continuous tense is also used to show

that a short action in the future is happening

that a short action in the future is happening

during or while a longer action is in progress in the future,.

during or while a longer action is in progress in the future,.

We can use the word ‘when’ to show when the shorter action occurs.

We can use the word 'when' to show when the shorter action occurs.

Take a look at the first example,

Take a look at the first example,

‘I will be sleeping when they arrive.’

'I will be sleeping when they arrive.'

Here we see two actions,

Here we see two actions,

‘I will be sleeping’ and ‘they arrive’.

'I will be sleeping' and 'they arrive'.

The part of the sentence that's in the future continuous tense is the longer action

The part of the sentence that's in the future continuous tense is the longer action

that's in progress in the future.

that's in progress in the future.

‘I will be sleeping.’

'I will be sleeping.'

Remember, ‘I will be’ and then verb +ing.

Remember, 'I will be' and then verb +ing.

This is the action that is ongoing in the future.

This is the action that is ongoing in the future.

Then we see ‘when they arrive’.

Then we see 'when they arrive'.

This is in the present tense.

This is in the present tense.

‘they arrive’

'they arrive'

This is the shorter action that happens while this action is ongoing.

This is the shorter action that happens while this action is ongoing.

‘We will be having dinner when the movie starts.’

'We will be having dinner when the movie starts.'

This is very similar to the first sentence.

This is very similar to the first sentence.

‘We will be having dinner …’

'We will be having dinner …'

That's the ongoing action that will happen in the future.

That's the ongoing action that will happen in the future.

And while this is happening, the movie will start.

And while this is happening, the movie will start.

But again, we use the present tense here.

But again, we use the present tense here.

‘the movie starts’

'the movie starts'

So we will be having dinner when the movie starts.

So we will be having dinner when the movie starts.

‘Tina is going to be working when you leave.’

'Tina is going to be working when you leave.'

Remember, we can use ‘be going to be’ in this tense so,

Remember, we can use 'be going to be' in this tense so,

‘She is going to be working when you leave.’

'She is going to be working when you leave.'

This shorter action will happen while this ongoing action is in progress.

This shorter action will happen while this ongoing action is in progress.

And finally, ‘It will be raining when you go shopping’.

And finally, 'It will be raining when you go shopping'.

Again, this is the ongoing action.

Again, this is the ongoing action.

And this is the shorter action.

And this is the shorter action.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, I'll talk about the negative form of the future continuous tense.

Now, I'll talk about the negative form of the future continuous tense.

Here are some examples:

Here are some examples:

‘He will not be reading before bed.’

'He will not be reading before bed.'

For the negative form, after the subject and ‘will’, we say ‘not be’.

For the negative form, after the subject and 'will', we say 'not be'.

And then verb +ing.

And then verb +ing.

‘He will not be reading before bed.’

'He will not be reading before bed.'

He'll be doing something else.

He'll be doing something else.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘My dad won't be cheering when the game ends.’

'My dad won't be cheering when the game ends.'

So this is very similar to the first sentence.

So this is very similar to the first sentence.

We have the subject, ‘my dad,’

We have the subject, 'my dad,'

and instead of ‘will not’ we use the contraction ‘won't’.

and instead of 'will not' we use the contraction 'won't'.

Remember, ‘won't’ is a contraction for ‘will not’.

Remember, 'won't' is a contraction for 'will not'.

‘My dad won't …’ and then we have ‘be’ verb +ing.

'My dad won't …' and then we have 'be' verb +ing.

‘My dad won't be cheering when the game ends.’

'My dad won't be cheering when the game ends.'

The next sentence says, ‘He is not going to be working tomorrow.’

The next sentence says, 'He is not going to be working tomorrow.'

Here we have the ‘be going to be’.

Here we have the 'be going to be'.

So ‘he’ is the subject and so we use the ‘be’ verb ‘is’.

So 'he' is the subject and so we use the 'be' verb 'is'.

After the ‘be’ verb, we say ‘not’.

After the 'be' verb, we say 'not'.

He is not going to ‘be’ verb +ing.

He is not going to 'be' verb +ing.

‘He is not going to be working tomorrow.’

'He is not going to be working tomorrow.'

Remember, we can also use a contraction here and say,

Remember, we can also use a contraction here and say,

‘He isn't going to be working tomorrow.’

'He isn't going to be working tomorrow.'

That's okay as well.

That's okay as well.

‘We aren't going to be shopping on Sunday.’

'We aren't going to be shopping on Sunday.'

Here the subject is ‘we’.

Here the subject is 'we'.

And so the ‘be’ verb to use is ‘are’.

And so the 'be' verb to use is 'are'.

I use the contraction here ‘aren't’ for ‘are not’.

I use the contraction here 'aren't' for 'are not'.

‘We are not …’ or ‘We aren't going to be shopping on Sunday.’

'We are not …' or 'We aren't going to be shopping on Sunday.'

Great job.

দারূন কাজ.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's talk about how to form basic questions in the future continuous tense.

Now let's talk about how to form basic questions in the future continuous tense.

Take a look at this first sentence.

Take a look at this first sentence.

It says, ‘He will be traveling next month.’

It says, 'He will be traveling next month.'

Now, to turn this into a question,

Now, to turn this into a question,

all you have to do is change the order of the first two words.

all you have to do is change the order of the first two words.

So ‘He will’ becomes ‘Will he’.

So 'He will' becomes 'Will he'.

‘Will he be traveling next month?’

'Will he be traveling next month?'

You'll notice that the rest of the words don't change.

You'll notice that the rest of the words don't change.

Only the first two words.

Only the first two words.

So, ‘Will he be traveling next month?’

So, 'Will he be traveling next month?'

To answer you can say, ‘Yes, he will.’

To answer you can say, 'Yes, he will.'

or ‘No, he won't.’

or 'No, he won't.'

The next sentence says, ‘They are going to be living there.’

The next sentence says, 'They are going to be living there.'

Again to turn this into a question, simply switch the order of the first two words.

Again to turn this into a question, simply switch the order of the first two words.

‘They are’ becomes ‘Are they’.

'They are' becomes 'Are they'.

‘Are they going to be living there?’

'Are they going to be living there?'

To reply you can say, ‘Yes, they are.’

To reply you can say, 'Yes, they are.'

or ‘No, they aren't.’

অথবা 'না, তারা নয়।'

Now, you'll notice in these two sentences,

Now, you'll notice in these two sentences,

there is no exact point in time that shows when this action will be happening in the

there is no exact point in time that shows when this action will be happening in the

future.

future.

There is no ‘next month’ or anything like that.

There is no 'next month' or anything like that.

In that case, it simply means sometime in the future.

In that case, it simply means sometime in the future.

So, they are going to be living there sometime in the future.

So, they are going to be living there sometime in the future.

That's what that means.

That's what that means.

Great job, everyone.

Great job, everyone.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, I'll go into how to form ‘WH’ questions in the future continuous tense.

Now, I'll go into how to form 'WH' questions in the future continuous tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

First, you'll notice that all of these questions begin with the ‘Wh’ words -

First, you'll notice that all of these questions begin with the 'Wh' words -

‘Where,’ ‘What,’ ‘Who,’ and ‘When’.

'Where,' 'What,' 'Who,' and 'When'.

Let's take a look at the first question.

Let's take a look at the first question.

‘Where will he be working?’

'Where will he be working?'

When we use ‘will be’, we start with ‘Where’ and then ‘will’.

When we use 'will be', we start with 'Where' and then 'will'.

After that, we have the subject + be and then verb +ing.

After that, we have the subject + be and then verb +ing.

‘Where will he be working?’

'Where will he be working?'

I can answer by saying,

I can answer by saying,

‘He will’ or ‘He'll be working at the factory.’

'He will' or 'He'll be working at the factory.'

The next question says, ‘What will she be watching?’

The next question says, 'What will she be watching?'

This is very similar to the first question.

This is very similar to the first question.

The only difference is that the subject is now ‘she’ and the verb is different.

The only difference is that the subject is now 'she' and the verb is different.

‘What will she be watching?’

'What will she be watching?'

I can say, ‘She'll be watching’ or ‘She will be watching her favorite tv show’.

I can say, 'She'll be watching' or 'She will be watching her favorite tv show'.

‘Who will they be talking to?’

'Who will they be talking to?'

Again, very similar.

Again, very similar.

To answer,I can say,

To answer,I can say,

‘They will be talking to their mom.’

'They will be talking to their mom.'

The last question has ‘be going to be’.

The last question has 'be going to be'.

‘When are we …’ here the subject is ’we’.

'When are we …' here the subject is 'we'.

So we start with the ‘be verb’ – ‘are’.

So we start with the 'be verb' – 'are'.

‘When are we going to be meeting Casey?’

'When are we going to be meeting Casey?'

I can say,

I can say,

‘We are going to be meeting Casey later tonight.’

'We are going to be meeting Casey later tonight.'

Good job, everybody.

Good job, everybody.

Let’s move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's start a checkup for the future continuous tense.

Let's start a checkup for the future continuous tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘They _blank_ at school tomorrow.’

It says, 'They _blank_ at school tomorrow.'

I want you to use ‘will' and then the verb ‘study’, for this tense.

I want you to use 'will' and then the verb 'study', for this tense.

Remember, in the future continuous tense,

Remember, in the future continuous tense,

no matter what the subject, we say ‘will be’ and then verb +ing.

no matter what the subject, we say 'will be' and then verb +ing.

So the correct answer for this sentence is ‘they will be studying’

So the correct answer for this sentence is 'they will be studying'

‘They will be studying at school tomorrow.’

'They will be studying at school tomorrow.'

The next sentence says.

The next sentence says.

‘Jesse _blank_ a TV show later.’

'Jesse _blank_ a TV show later.'

Here, instead of ‘will’ try to use ‘be going to be’.

Here, instead of 'will' try to use 'be going to be'.

‘Jesse _blank_ watch a TV show later.’

'Jesse _blank_ watch a TV show later.'

I want you to use the verb ‘watch’.

I want you to use the verb 'watch'.

So, Jessie is a ‘he’ or it can be a ‘she’.

So, Jessie is a 'he' or it can be a 'she'.

Sometimes the name is used for a boy or a girl.

Sometimes the name is used for a boy or a girl.

Either way I need to use the ‘be’ verb – ‘is’.

Either way I need to use the 'be' verb – 'is'.

‘Jesse is going to be’

'Jesse is going to be'

and then we need verb +ing.

and then we need verb +ing.

‘Jesse is going to be watching a TV show later.’

'Jesse is going to be watching a TV show later.'

The next sentence, I want you to find the mistake.

The next sentence, I want you to find the mistake.

‘We willn’t be studying at the library today.’

'We willn't be studying at the library today.'

‘We will not …’

'We will not …'

What's the contraction for ‘will not’?

What's the contraction for 'will not'?

Well it definitely isn't ‘willn’t’.

Well it definitely isn't 'willn't'.

The contraction is ‘won't’.

The contraction is 'won't'.

‘We won't be studying at the library today.’

'We won't be studying at the library today.'

And finally, ‘Sally and I will be meet our friends soon.’

And finally, 'Sally and I will be meet our friends soon.'

Remember, we need ‘will be’ and then verb +ing.

Remember, we need 'will be' and then verb +ing.

So the correct answer is,

So the correct answer is,

‘Sally and I will be meeting our friends soon.’

'Sally and I will be meeting our friends soon.'

Good job, everyone.

ভাল কাজ, সবাই.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's move on to the next checkup of the future continuous tense.

Now, let's move on to the next checkup of the future continuous tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘He _blank_ at the door when the movie ends.’

It says, 'He _blank_ at the door when the movie ends.'

I want you to use ‘will’ and the verb ‘wait’.

I want you to use 'will' and the verb 'wait'.

Remember, for this tense, we need ‘will be’ and then verb +ing,

Remember, for this tense, we need 'will be' and then verb +ing,

so the correct answer is,

so the correct answer is,

‘He will be waiting at the door when the movie ends.’

'He will be waiting at the door when the movie ends.'

The next sentence says, ‘We are not …’ so this is a negative,

The next sentence says, 'We are not …' so this is a negative,

‘_blank_ the play when he performs’.

'_blank_ the play when he performs'.

Here, instead of ‘will’, I want you to use ‘be going to be’ and the verb ‘see’.

Here, instead of 'will', I want you to use 'be going to be' and the verb 'see'.

We already have part of that phrase for you.

We already have part of that phrase for you.

‘We are …’, here's the ‘be’ verb, ‘not’

'We are …', here's the 'be' verb, 'not'

so this is negative.

so this is negative.

And then we say ‘going to be’

And then we say 'going to be'

and then verb +ing.

and then verb +ing.

‘We are not going to be seeing the play when he performs.’

'We are not going to be seeing the play when he performs.'

Now find the mistake in this sentence.

Now find the mistake in this sentence.

‘They won't be stay at home when the delivery man visits.’

'They won't be stay at home when the delivery man visits.'

‘They won't be’

'They won't be'

That's correct in the negative form.

That's correct in the negative form.

However, we need verb +ing.

However, we need verb +ing.

‘They won't be staying at home when the delivery man visits.’

'They won't be staying at home when the delivery man visits.'

And finally, ‘Terry is going to working when the manager arrives’.

And finally, 'Terry is going to working when the manager arrives'.

‘Terry’ is a ‘he’ or ‘she’ so ‘is’ is the correct ‘be’ verb to use.

'Terry' is a 'he' or 'she' so 'is' is the correct 'be' verb to use.

‘going to’ that's also correct.

'going to' that's also correct.

What we're missing here is ‘be’.

What we're missing here is 'be'.

‘Terry is going to be working when the manager arrives.’

'Terry is going to be working when the manager arrives.'

Good job, everybody.

Good job, everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, you have a better understanding of the future continuous tense.

Now, you have a better understanding of the future continuous tense.

Please take some time to study and practice this tense as it is very important.

Please take some time to study and practice this tense as it is very important.

I know English can be a struggle, but don't worry, I'm here for you.

I know English can be a struggle, but don't worry, I'm here for you.

And I believe in you.

And I believe in you.

I'll see you in the next video. Hi, everyone.

পরের ভিডিওতে দেখা হবে। সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I’m Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

In this video, I will introduce the future perfect tense.

In this video, I will introduce the future perfect tense.

This tense is used to express an action in the future

This tense is used to express an action in the future

that will happen by a specific time in the future.

that will happen by a specific time in the future.

This tense can be a little difficult to understand but don't worry I will guide you through it

This tense can be a little difficult to understand but don't worry I will guide you through it

so keep watching.

so keep watching.

The future perfect tense is used to express an action in the future

The future perfect tense is used to express an action in the future

that will happen by a specific time in the future.

that will happen by a specific time in the future.

Let's look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখি।

The first sentence says,

The first sentence says,

‘The snow will have stopped by April.’

'The snow will have stopped by April.'

We start with the subject.

We start with the subject.

In this case, ‘The snow’.

In this case, 'The snow'.

Then, we follow with ‘will have’ and the past participle of the verb.

Then, we follow with 'will have' and the past participle of the verb.

In this case, we used ‘stopped’ for the verb ‘stop’.

In this case, we used 'stopped' for the verb 'stop'.

At the end of the sentence, you'll notice ‘by April’.

At the end of the sentence, you'll notice 'by April'.

‘by April’ shows the specific time in the future when this action will have happened.

'by April' shows the specific time in the future when this action will have happened.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘By the time he graduates, he will have completed five years of study.’

'By the time he graduates, he will have completed five years of study.'

In this sentence,

In this sentence,

‘By the time he graduates’ or the specific time in the future.

'By the time he graduates' or the specific time in the future.

comes at the beginning of the sentence

comes at the beginning of the sentence

so ‘by’ plus ‘a time in the future’

so 'by' plus 'a time in the future'

can come at the end or it can come at the beginning.

can come at the end or it can come at the beginning.

‘By the time he graduates, he will have completed…’

'By the time he graduates, he will have completed…'

Again, you see ‘subject + will + have’ and the past participle of the verb.

Again, you see 'subject + will + have' and the past participle of the verb.

In this case, ‘completed’.

In this case, 'completed'.

‘By the time he graduates, he will have completed five years of study.’

'By the time he graduates, he will have completed five years of study.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘Her arm will have fully healed by the summer.’

'Her arm will have fully healed by the summer.'

In this example, ‘by the summer’, the future specific time, comes at the end.

In this example, 'by the summer', the future specific time, comes at the end.

By this time in the future, her ‘arm’, that's the subject, will have ‘healed’,

By this time in the future, her 'arm', that's the subject, will have 'healed',

the past participle.

the past participle.

Here I put ‘fully’ just to show how much it will have healed.

Here I put 'fully' just to show how much it will have healed.

I’m just adding an extra description.

I'm just adding an extra description.

The last sentence says,

The last sentence says,

‘By next month, …’ so here we see ‘by’ and ‘the time’ at the beginning of the

'By next month, …' so here we see 'by' and 'the time' at the beginning of the

sentence.

sentence.

‘you’, that's the subject.

'you', that's the subject.

‘will have received’, there's the past participle.

'will have received', there's the past participle.

‘your promotion.’

'your promotion.'

Again, ‘By next month you will have received your promotion.’

Again, 'By next month you will have received your promotion.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's talk about the negative form of the future perfect tense.

Now, let's talk about the negative form of the future perfect tense.

Here are some examples.

Here are some examples.

Let's take a look.

এর কটাক্ষপাত করা যাক.

The first sentence says,

The first sentence says,

‘I will not have graduated from university by July.’

'I will not have graduated from university by July.'

First, I want to point out that at the end, I have the specific time in the future,

First, I want to point out that at the end, I have the specific time in the future,

‘byJuly’.

'byJuly'.

Now for the negative form, what I do is say, ‘subject’ and ‘will not have’,

Now for the negative form, what I do is say, 'subject' and 'will not have',

then we put the past participle of the verb.

then we put the past participle of the verb.

‘I will not have graduated from university by July.’

'I will not have graduated from university by July.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘Ollie and Max will not have spoken ...’

'Ollie and Max will not have spoken ...'

There it is again, ‘will not have’ and then the past participle of speak ...

There it is again, 'will not have' and then the past participle of speak ...

which is ‘spoken’.

which is 'spoken'.

‘… before the plane leaves.’

'… before the plane leaves.'

Here, instead of the word ‘by’, we used ‘before’ to show a specific time in the

Here, instead of the word 'by', we used 'before' to show a specific time in the

future.

That's okay as well.

future.

That's okay as well.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘You will not have eaten dinner by 6 p.m.’

'You will not have eaten dinner by 6 pm'

Here, again, we've used ‘by 6 p.m.’ to show a time in the future.

Here, again, we've used 'by 6 pm' to show a time in the future.

And again, you see ‘you will not have’ and then the past participle of eat which

And again, you see 'you will not have' and then the past participle of eat which

is ‘eaten’.

is 'eaten'.

The last sentence says, ‘By noon …’, there's the time again,

The last sentence says, 'By noon …', there's the time again,

‘I will not have taken off to Japan.’

'I will not have taken off to Japan.'

‘taken’ is the past participle of ‘take’.

'taken' is the past participle of 'take'.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, let's move on to how to form questions in the future perfect tense.

Now, let's move on to how to form questions in the future perfect tense.

The first sentence here says,

The first sentence here says,

‘You will have gone to work by 10 a.m.’

'You will have gone to work by 10 am'

To turn this into a question, all we have to

To turn this into a question, all we have to

do is switch the order of the first two words.

do is switch the order of the first two words.

‘You will’ becomes ‘Will you’.

'You will' becomes 'Will you'.

You'll notice that the rest of the question stays the same as the sentence.

You'll notice that the rest of the question stays the same as the sentence.

‘Will you have gone to work by 10 a.m.?’

'Will you have gone to work by 10 am?'

You can answer by saying, ‘Yes, I will have.’

You can answer by saying, 'Yes, I will have.'

or ‘No, I will have not.’

or 'No, I will have not.'

The next sentence says, ‘She will have woken up by noon.’

The next sentence says, 'She will have woken up by noon.'

Again, to turn this into a question just switch the first two words.

Again, to turn this into a question just switch the first two words.

‘She will’ becomes ‘Will she’.

'She will' becomes 'Will she'.

‘Will she have woken up by noon?’

'Will she have woken up by noon?'

Again, the rest of the sentence stays the same.

Again, the rest of the sentence stays the same.

‘Will she have woken up by noon?’

'Will she have woken up by noon?'

To reply, you can say, ‘Yes, she will have.’

To reply, you can say, 'Yes, she will have.'

or ‘No, she will have not.’

or 'No, she will have not.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now, I'll talk about how to form ‘WH’ questions in the future perfect tense.

Now, I'll talk about how to form 'WH' questions in the future perfect tense.

If you notice on the board, each of these questions begins with the ‘WH’ word.

If you notice on the board, each of these questions begins with the 'WH' word.

‘Where’, ‘what’, ‘who’, and ‘when’.

'Where', 'what', 'who', and 'when'.

Then after each ‘WH’ word comes the word ‘will’.

Then after each 'WH' word comes the word 'will'.

‘Where will’ ‘What will’

'Where will' 'What will'

‘Who will’ and ‘When will’

'Who will' and 'When will'

So let's take a look at the first question.

So let's take a look at the first question.

‘Where will’…’ then you add ‘the subject’.

'Where will'…' then you add 'the subject'.

In this case, ‘you’.

In this case, 'you'.

And then, ‘have’ and after that the past participle of the verb.

And then, 'have' and after that the past participle of the verb.

In this case, it's ‘traveled’.

In this case, it's 'traveled'.

‘Where will you have traveled by December?’

'Where will you have traveled by December?'

I can answer by saying, ‘I will have traveled to Germany and Denmark.’

I can answer by saying, 'I will have traveled to Germany and Denmark.'

There are many possible answers here and this is just an example.

There are many possible answers here and this is just an example.

The next question says, ‘What will they have done …’

The next question says, 'What will they have done …'

‘done’ is the past participle of ‘do’.

'done' is the past participle of 'do'.

‘… by the end of the evening?’

'… by the end of the evening?'

I can answer by saying, ‘They will have done their homework.’

I can answer by saying, 'They will have done their homework.'

The next question says, ‘Who will she have interviewed by 5 p.m.?’

The next question says, 'Who will she have interviewed by 5 pm?'

Again, ‘who will’ + the subject ‘have’ and the past participle of the verb.

Again, 'who will' + the subject 'have' and the past participle of the verb.

I can answer this question by saying,

I can answer this question by saying,

‘She will have interviewed the teachers by 5 p.m.’

'She will have interviewed the teachers by 5 pm'

And finally, ‘When will they have started to learn?’

And finally, 'When will they have started to learn?'

One way to answer this question is to say,

One way to answer this question is to say,

‘They will have started to learn in January.’

'They will have started to learn in January.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's start this checkup for the future perfect tense.

Let's start this checkup for the future perfect tense.

Take a look at the first sentence.

প্রথম বাক্যটি একবার দেখুন।

It says, ‘We _blank_ that book by tomorrow.’

It says, 'We _blank_ that book by tomorrow.'

The verb to use is ‘read’.

The verb to use is 'read'.

Remember, in the future perfect tense, we start with the subject,

Remember, in the future perfect tense, we start with the subject,

and we have that here, ‘we’.

and we have that here, 'we'.

Then say, ‘will have’ and the past participle of the verb.

Then say, 'will have' and the past participle of the verb.

So here we need to say ‘will have’.

So here we need to say 'will have'.

What is the past participle of ‘read’?

What is the past participle of 'read'?

The correct answer is ‘read’.

The correct answer is 'read'.

They're spelled the same, but they are pronounced differently.

They're spelled the same, but they are pronounced differently.

‘We will have read that book by tomorrow.’

'We will have read that book by tomorrow.'

The next sentence says, ‘She _blank_ the video by bedtime.’

The next sentence says, 'She _blank_ the video by bedtime.'

Here we have ‘not’ so I want you to try the negative form.

Here we have 'not' so I want you to try the negative form.

And the verb to try is ‘watch’.

And the verb to try is 'watch'.

In the negative form, we start with the subject.

In the negative form, we start with the subject.

And instead of ‘will have’, we say ‘will not have’.

And instead of 'will have', we say 'will not have'.

‘She will not have …’ Then we need the past participle of the verb.

'She will not have …' Then we need the past participle of the verb.

In this case, it is ‘watched’.

In this case, it is 'watched'.

‘She will not have watched the video by bedtime.’

'She will not have watched the video by bedtime.'

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Ryan will not have be to Cuba by summer.’

'Ryan will not have be to Cuba by summer.'

This is the negative form because we have ‘will not have’.

This is the negative form because we have 'will not have'.

That's correct.

এটাই সঠিক.

But we need the past participle of ‘be’.

But we need the past participle of 'be'.

So we need to change it to ‘been’.

So we need to change it to 'been'.

‘Ryan will not have been to Cuba by summer.’

'Ryan will not have been to Cuba by summer.'

The last sentence says, ‘I will have go to school by 8 30 a.m.’

The last sentence says, 'I will have go to school by 8 30 am'

Here, we have the affirmative, ‘will have’.

Here, we have the affirmative, 'will have'.

But, uh oh, we forgot the past participle of ‘go’ which is ‘gone’.

But, uh oh, we forgot the past participle of 'go' which is 'gone'.

‘I will have gone to school by 8 30 a.m.’

'I will have gone to school by 8 30 am'

Great job, everybody.

Great job, everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Good job, guys.

ভালো করেছো বন্ধুরা.

Now you have a better understanding of the future perfect tense.

Now you have a better understanding of the future perfect tense.

I want you to keep studying and practicing this tense.

I want you to keep studying and practicing this tense.

I know studying English can be difficult, but I believe in you

I know studying English can be difficult, but I believe in you

and I will guide you through it.

and I will guide you through it.

I'll see you in the next video. Hi, everybody.

পরের ভিডিওতে দেখা হবে। সবাই কেমন আছেন.

I’m Esther.

আমি ইস্টার।

Welcome to the last tense.

Welcome to the last tense.

If you haven't checked out my earlier videos on the tenses,

If you haven't checked out my earlier videos on the tenses,

please go check them out now.

please go check them out now.

In this video, I will talk about the future perfect continuous tense.

In this video, I will talk about the future perfect continuous tense.

This tense can be used to describe an ongoing action

This tense can be used to describe an ongoing action

or situation that will last for a specified period of time in the future.

or situation that will last for a specified period of time in the future.

There's a lot to learn, so keep watching.

There's a lot to learn, so keep watching.

The future perfect continuous tense is used to talk about an ongoing situation

The future perfect continuous tense is used to talk about an ongoing situation

that will be in progress for a period of time at a specific point in time in the future.

that will be in progress for a period of time at a specific point in time in the future.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first sentence says,

The first sentence says,

‘She will have been living in Ireland for 10 years at that point.’

'She will have been living in Ireland for 10 years at that point.'

So no matter what the subject, in this case we have ‘she’,

So no matter what the subject, in this case we have 'she',

we follow with ‘will have been’ and then ‘verb +ing’.

we follow with 'will have been' and then 'verb +ing'.

So, ‘She will have been living in Ireland …’

So, 'She will have been living in Ireland …'

Then this sentence has the duration.

Then this sentence has the duration.

What period of time will this last? ‘for 10 years’

What period of time will this last? 'for 10 years'

And when?

And when?

Remember, we need a point in time in the future.

Remember, we need a point in time in the future.

In this case, we just use a general expression, ‘at that point’.

In this case, we just use a general expression, 'at that point'.

Here, it's not specific and that's okay.

Here, it's not specific and that's okay.

We'll see some specific examples in the next sentence.

We'll see some specific examples in the next sentence.

‘By midnight, he will have been sleeping for four hours.’

'By midnight, he will have been sleeping for four hours.'

Here, the specific time in the future comes at the beginning of the sentence.

Here, the specific time in the future comes at the beginning of the sentence.

‘By midnight’ And, again, we see ‘will have been’ +

'By midnight' And, again, we see 'will have been' +

verb 'ing'.

verb 'ing'.

‘By midnight, he will have been sleeping for four hours.’.

'By midnight, he will have been sleeping for four hours.'.

Here we have ‘for four hours’.

Here we have 'for four hours'.

This shows the duration or how long this action will be in progress.

This shows the duration or how long this action will be in progress.

So, again, ‘By midnight he will have been sleeping for four hours.’

So, again, 'By midnight he will have been sleeping for four hours.'

The last sentence says, ‘In June …’

The last sentence says, 'In June …'

Here, again, we have the specific time in the future at the beginning of the sentence.

Here, again, we have the specific time in the future at the beginning of the sentence.

‘In June, ‘we’ that's the subject.

'In June, 'we' that's the subject.

‘we'll have been studying …’ There's the ‘verb +ing’.

'we'll have been studying …' There's the 'verb +ing'.

‘… at this university for four years.’

'… at this university for four years.'

Here is the duration, ‘for four years’.

Here is the duration, 'for four years'.

Good job.

And let's move on.

ভাল করেছ.

And let's move on.

Now, let's look at the negative form of the future perfect continuous tense.

Now, let's look at the negative form of the future perfect continuous tense.

In the affirmative form, we say ‘subject’ + ‘will have been’ and then ‘verb +ing’.

In the affirmative form, we say 'subject' + 'will have been' and then 'verb +ing'.

In the negative form, however, we say, ‘subject’ + ‘will not have been’

In the negative form, however, we say, 'subject' + 'will not have been'

and then ‘verb +ing’.

and then 'verb +ing'.

Let's take a look at some examples.

আসুন কিছু উদাহরণ দেখে নেওয়া যাক।

The first sentence here says,

The first sentence here says,

‘At that point, I will not have been living in Spain for 10 years.’

'At that point, I will not have been living in Spain for 10 years.'

And so you see it.

And so you see it.

‘I’ is the subject.

'I' is the subject.

‘… will not have been’ and then ‘verb +ing’.

'… will not have been' and then 'verb +ing'.

In this case, ‘living’.

In this case, 'living'.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘He will not have been sleeping for four hours by midnight.’

'He will not have been sleeping for four hours by midnight.'

Again, we see the ‘subject’ + ‘will not have been’ and then ‘verb +ing’,

Again, we see the 'subject' + 'will not have been' and then 'verb +ing',

‘sleeping’.

'sleeping'.

The last sentence says,

The last sentence says,

‘By then, we will not have been studying at this university for three years.’

'By then, we will not have been studying at this university for three years.'

Again, we see the ‘subject’ + ‘we will not have been’ and then ‘verb +ing’

Again, we see the 'subject' + 'we will not have been' and then 'verb +ing'

here, ‘studying’.

here, 'studying'.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's take a look at how to form questions in the future perfect continuous tense.

Now let's take a look at how to form questions in the future perfect continuous tense.

Here, the sentence says,

Here, the sentence says,

‘Sean will have been playing soccer for a year by December.’

'Sean will have been playing soccer for a year by December.'

To turn this into a question, all we have to do is switch the order of the first two

To turn this into a question, all we have to do is switch the order of the first two

words.

words.

So instead of ‘Sean will’, I can say ‘Will Sean’.

So instead of 'Sean will', I can say 'Will Sean'.

‘Will Sean have been playing soccer for a year by December?’

'Will Sean have been playing soccer for a year by December?'

You'll notice that the rest of the sentence stays the same.

You'll notice that the rest of the sentence stays the same.

I can answer by saying, ‘Yes, he will have.’

I can answer by saying, 'Yes, he will have.'

or ‘No, he will have not.’

or 'No, he will have not.'

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘They will have been working there for three months by that time.’

'They will have been working there for three months by that time.'

Again, I changed the order of the first two words.

Again, I changed the order of the first two words.

To turn this into a question ‘They will’ becomes ‘Will they’.

To turn this into a question 'They will' becomes 'Will they'.

‘Will they have been working there for three months by that time?’

'Will they have been working there for three months by that time?'

Again, the rest of the sentence stays the same.

Again, the rest of the sentence stays the same.

I can answer by saying, ‘Yes, they will have.’

I can answer by saying, 'Yes, they will have.'

or ‘No, they will have not.’

or 'No, they will have not.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Now let's take a look at how to form ‘WH” questions in the future perfect continuous

Now let's take a look at how to form 'WH” questions in the future perfect continuous

tense.

tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

All of these questions begin with a ‘WH’ word.

All of these questions begin with a 'WH' word.

‘where’ ‘what’

'where' 'what'

‘who’ and ‘how long’

'who' and 'how long'

Take a look at the first question.

Take a look at the first question.

‘Where will you have been walking?’

'Where will you have been walking?'

To form a ‘WH’ question, we start with the ‘WH’ word, then ‘will’.

To form a 'WH' question, we start with the 'WH' word, then 'will'.

After that, we add the subject, ‘you’, ‘they’, ‘she’ and ‘you’.

After that, we add the subject, 'you', 'they', 'she' and 'you'.

After that, we add ‘have been’ + ‘verb +ing’.

After that, we add 'have been' + 'verb +ing'.

‘Where will you have been walking?’

'Where will you have been walking?'

‘What will they have been playing?’

'What will they have been playing?'

‘Who will she have been talking to?’

'Who will she have been talking to?'

and ‘How long will you have been working …?’

and 'How long will you have been working …?'

There's the ‘verb +ing’.

There's the 'verb +ing'.

‘ … there by the time you finish?’

' … there by the time you finish?'

So let's go through one more time and I'll show you how to answer these questions.

So let's go through one more time and I'll show you how to answer these questions.

‘Where will you have been walking?’

'Where will you have been walking?'

I can answer by saying, ‘I will have been walking in the park.’

I can answer by saying, 'I will have been walking in the park.'

‘What will they have been playing?’

'What will they have been playing?'

‘They will have been playing video games.’

'They will have been playing video games.'

‘Who will she have been talking to?’

'Who will she have been talking to?'

‘She will have been talking to her cousin.’

'She will have been talking to her cousin.'

And finally,

And finally,

‘How long will you have been working there by the time you finish?’

'How long will you have been working there by the time you finish?'

‘By the time I finish, I will have been working there for five years.’

'By the time I finish, I will have been working there for five years.'

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Let's start a checkup for the future perfect continuous tense.

Let's start a checkup for the future perfect continuous tense.

Take a look at the board.

Take a look at the board.

The first sentence says,

The first sentence says,

‘By 10 p.m., I _blank_ that game for three hours.’

'By 10 pm, I _blank_ that game for three hours.'

I’m looking to use the verb ‘play’.

I'm looking to use the verb 'play'.

Remember, in this tense, we need to have ‘subject’ + ‘will have been’ and then ‘verb +ing’.

Remember, in this tense, we need to have 'subject' + 'will have been' and then 'verb +ing'.

So ‘By 10 p.m., I will have been playing …’

So 'By 10 pm, I will have been playing …'

Again, we need ‘verb +ing’.

Again, we need 'verb +ing'.

‘… I will have been playing that game for three hours.

'… I will have been playing that game for three hours.

The next sentence says,

The next sentence says,

‘When she gets here, he _blank_ dinner for an hour.’

'When she gets here, he _blank_ dinner for an hour.'

Try to use the verb ‘cook’.

Try to use the verb 'cook'.

Again, no matter what the subject, it doesn't change.

Again, no matter what the subject, it doesn't change.

‘When she gets here, he will have been cooking …’

'When she gets here, he will have been cooking …'

‘When she gets here, he will have been cooking dinner for an hour.’

'When she gets here, he will have been cooking dinner for an hour.'

Now, find the mistake in the next sentence.

Now, find the mistake in the next sentence.

‘Steve and Jan will not have be waiting for a year when it arrives.’

'Steve and Jan will not have be waiting for a year when it arrives.'

Here, we have a negative form, ‘they will not have’.

Here, we have a negative form, 'they will not have'.

Then we need ‘been’.

Then we need 'been'.

‘They will not have been …’

'They will not have been …'

And then the ‘verb +ing’ is here so that's correct.

And then the 'verb +ing' is here so that's correct.

‘Steve and Jan will not have been waiting for a year when it arrives.’

'Steve and Jan will not have been waiting for a year when it arrives.'

The last sentence says,

The last sentence says,

‘It will have been work for 10 years on January 15th.’

'It will have been work for 10 years on January 15th.'

So maybe here I’m talking about a computer or a TV.

So maybe here I'm talking about a computer or a TV.

Maybe some kind of machine.

Maybe some kind of machine.

‘it’ ‘It will have been …’

'it' 'It will have been …'

I see the mistake here.

I see the mistake here.

We need ‘verb +ing’.

We need 'verb +ing'.

‘It will have been working for 10 years on January 15th.

'It will have been working for 10 years on January 15th.

Great job, everybody.

Great job, everybody.

Let's move on.

চল এগোই.

Thank you so much for watching this  course on the twelve English tenses. 

Thank you so much for watching this course on the twelve English tenses.

Now, you have a better understanding  of how to use these tenses. 

Now, you have a better understanding of how to use these tenses.

I know studying English can be hard, but  with time and practice, you will get better. 

I know studying English can be hard, but with time and practice, you will get better.

Please watch my other videos. And I’ll see you next time. 

Please watch my other videos. And I'll see you next time.

Bye.

বিদায়।